John A Keel - Our Haunted PlanetAFuturaBook
First published in Great Britain in 1971
by Neville Spearman Limited.
Fint Futura Publications edition 1975
Copyright © John A Keel 1971
This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trade or 
otherwise, be lent, re-sold, hired oat or otherwise circulated without the 
publisher's prior consent in any form of binding or cover other than that in 
which it is published and without a similar condition including this condition 
being imposed on the subsequent purchaser.
ISBN o 8600 71537
Printed in Great Britain by
Cox&WymanLtd,
London, Reading and Fakenham
CONTENTS
Introduction 7
1
PART ONE
Chapter One: 'You Can't Get There From Here' 13
Chapter Two: The Continent That Vanished 22
Chapter Three: If's a Nice Place To Visit But… 29
Chapter Four: Towers of Glass and Theories of Putty 40
Chapter Five: Strong Men and Stupid Enterprises 45
Chapter Six:
A Funny Thing Happened on the Way to Extinction 56 Chapter Seven:
Scientists in Collision 6$
FART TWO
Chapter Eight; Mimics of Man 79
Chapter Nine: Men-in-Black Lore and the CIA 90
Chapter Ten: Rendezvous with the Damned 101
Chapter Eleven: Not One of Them, Etc____ 113
Chapter Twelve: The Demise of the Gods 125
' 'tTb» Secret of the A^es 137
PART THREE Chapter Fourteen:
'HeUoj Central. Give me Ganymede' 155
Chapter Fifteen:
Where Is Everybody Going? X71
^Jüfipfer Sixteen ■
TheRerohitioaoftieMind 184
INTRODUCTION
In September 1953,1 spent right hours inside the Great Pyramid in Egypt 
producing a radio programme which was aired throughout Europe over the American 
Forces Network (AFN) the following month. Egypt so impressed me, and archaeology 
so fascinated me, that I returned to Cairo the next year and lived there for 
several months, wading through the musty libraries and museums, prowling the 
desert, and visiting the ancient tombs. During a trek to Aswan and the Upper 
Nile I saw my first flying saucer, a metallic looking disk, with a rotating 
outer rim, which hovered for several minutes above the Aswan Dam in broad 
daylight. I had written and produced a radio documentary, Things in the Sky, in 
1952, and my earlier researches into unidentified flying objects had already 
convinced me that such things not only existed, but that they had been present 
in our skies since the dawn of man.
Eventually my travels took me to Beirut, Damascus, Baghdad and a thousand places 
in between. I walked among the ancient ruins and puzzled over man's illustrious 
but forgotten past. In India I wan­dered alone into the Himalayas and crossed 
the border of Tibet (which has since been sealed by the Chinese). As I 
travelled, I inter­viewed archaeologists, historians, and assorted experts and 
Spent endless hours in remote libraries poring over rare old books. I was 
puzzled at first to discover that none of the leading authorities seemed to 
agree on anything. Indeed, a large part of the scientific literature is devoted 
to theorization and incredibly vicious attacks on the theories of other 
theorists. Most perplexing of all was the fact that some of the literature about 
the ruins I had visited smacked of pure fiction, because the authors had not 
visited the sites but laboured instead to couple fictitious theories with 
dubious facts. This led, of course, to conclusions that bordered on the 
imbecilic.
An offshoot of this process is, understandably enough, an enor­mous quantity of 
crank literature created by unqualified researchers who attempted to interpret 
the scientific material in their own ways. In many areas of the less popular 
sciences the crank material out­weighs the scientific because few if any 
scientists have tackled those subjects. So 98 per cent of all the available 
literature on Atlantis,
flying saucers, Tibet, and prehistoric ruins falls into the crank cat­egory. The 
task of sotting all this out and developing a valid syn­thesis is a formidable 
one - one which! have undertaken with great trepidation.
In his book, In the Name of Science, Martin Gardner defines the characteristics 
of the common crank or pseudoscientist. He lists the four chief attributes as 
being: (1) The crank considers himself a genius… even a towering genius who is 
years ahead of hi&time. (2) He considers his colleagues and fellow researchers 
'ignorant block­heads', largely because they fail to recognize his genius. He 
assaults his opponents by impugnation, questioning their honesty, intelli­gence, 
and motives. They respond in kind, naturally, and so great storms are whipped up 
in the trivial teacups of the scientific and pseudoscientific journals. 
Controversy is the lifeblood of crankism. (3) The pseudoscientist is paranoid 
and feels he is the victim of a vast conspiracy designed to suppress his 
brilliant work. In many instances these imagined conspiracies become a vital 
part of the subject itself, as for example, the endless literature discussing 
how the U.S. Air Force has been keeping the truth about flying saucers from the 
public. (4) The crank delights in focusing his attacks 'on the greatest 
scientists and the best-established theories'. He goes after big game. He is 
wiser than Einstein, knows more about astron­omy than Fred Hoyle, and is better 
informed about the moon than Neil Armstrong.
The crank also invents his own terminology: a jabberwocky understood only by him 
and his closest allies. So, we find the litera­ture filled with confusing and 
complicated terms which are merely displays of pseudoerudition, or what 
psychiatrists call neologisms.
Over the years I have met the leaders of many peculiar cults and 
pseudoscientific factions of belief. With very few exceptions, they have all 
lived up to the above criteria. Most were friendly and co­operative with me 
until they realized that I did not share their beliefs in Atlantis or visitors 
from Andromeda. Then they turned on me with wrathful vengeance and launched such 
campaigns of un­founded slander that I could only be amazed and amused. I have 
now been accused of being everything from a Communist con man to a secret agent 
for the Central Intelligence Agency; from a religious fanatic (I'm a lifelong 
agnostic) to a pawn of the devil. Typo­graphical errors, over which I have no 
control, in my many articles and books have been lovingly dissected by these 
groups and prompted countless letters and essays reviewing their sinister 
im­plications. After twenty-five years as a writer and reporter dedicated
to collecting the facts as objectively and as honestly as possible, my integrity 
has been attacked from all angles.
For these reasons this book is written in a style which discusses known facts 
with the popular and unpopular beliefs they have in­spired. I am not supporting 
any <ji these beliefs, I am merely dis­cussing them. It may be that the great 
civilizations oif Atlantis and Lemnria once actually flourished on this planet 
In this book I am only weighing the evidence pro and coo. It may be that little 
green men from Mars really are visiting housewives in Nebraska. I am only 
reporting the claims of the housewives, not trying to prove that Martians are 
really dropping in. The believers in Atlantis will un­doubtedly hate me. The 
believers in Martians already despise me.
Parts of this book are so obviously tongue-in-cheek that it shouldn't be 
necessary to mention it. Yet I know from bitter experi­ence that some of my 
humorous comments will be taken seriously and will prompt new venom. I am not 
attacking any specific indi­viduals or cults. I am attacking man's abysmal 
ignorance and his impassioned effort to hide that ignorance from himself. I have 
seen a large part of this world and its mysteries. Wonder and curiosity have 
always been an integral part of my life. I am only trying to share that wonder 
with the reader.
This book is based upon countless interviews, endless correspon­dence, many 
in-depth personal investigations, and hundreds of books covering everything from 
alchemy to zoology. Wherever pos­sible, I have tried to include key source 
references for the benefit of those readers who might be interested in pursuing 
some of these matters further. It has been impossible, however, to list all my 
sources. Some of the books used in my research were privately pub­lished and are 
quite rare. [But even some of these can be obtained through Gray Barker, Box 
2228, Clarksburg, West Virginia 26301; and Health Research, 70 Lafayette Street, 
Mokelumne Hill, CaK-fornia 95245.]
Although unidentified flying objects are mentioned frequently in these pages, 
the UFO controversy is not the main theme. Some of the major UFO cases discussed 
are drawn from reports which appeared originally in England's Ftying Saucer 
Review, the only truly scientific publication devoted to the subject. [Queries 
should be -directed to Flying Saucer Review, 49a Kings Grove, London SE15, 
England.]
I do not pretend to know any answers. After a lifetime of travel and study I am 
still learning the questions. This is a journey into man's past and the curious 
manifestations which have always sur­rounded Mm and which have directed the 
human race upwards from
the caves to the moon itself. It is a Journey into a jungle of myth, legend, and 
belief, and hopefully, it is another small step towards the larger truth that 
man has always sought but never really found.
John A. Keel
PART ONE
Archaeology is not a science, it's a vendetta.
—5Qt MORTIMER WHBBLER
CHAPTER ONE
'YOU CANT GET THERE FROM HERE*
While hairy, beetled-browed cavemen were labouring to invent fire and the wheel, 
there already existed on this planet a highly de­veloped civilization of 
intelligent beings, they built massive cities of stone, many of which are still 
standing. They methodically con­structed giant mounds of earth all over this 
planet for some purpose which still escapes us. They scattered peculiar 
artifacts of stone and metal across every continent, and they sailed every 
ocean, map­ping the entire globe systematically.
Then they vanished.
Cavemen inherited the earth. They regarded the ancient cities as sacred places. 
As the centuries ticked off, they became conscious of other life forms around 
them. Life forms that seemed to possess die power of invisibility, of life and 
death itself. They invented names for these forms. They worshipped them. They 
recorded the mani­festations of that invisible world in myths and legends handed 
down from generation to generation. Eventually they perfected sciences .based 
upon their observations of those manifestations. In time those sciences 
developed new myths. The original owners of the earth, the builders of those 
great cities, were forgotten. But as men spread across the face of the planet, 
the traces of those lost Elders were rediscovered Man's new-fangled sciences 
couldn't fit such traces into their new concepts, however, so the evidence was 
ignored. As a result, the earth has two histories: the history taught in our 
colleges and schools, and the real but ignored history of a very ancient people 
and of strange forces which have often supervised human events.
Ten thousand years ago that unknown civilization carefully mapped the entire 
surface of the globe. Their maps were copied and recopied and passed along from 
one age to the next. Finally, copies of them were rediscovered by Capt. 
Arlington H. Mallery in, of all places, the library of Congress. Known as the 
Pin Re'is maps, they were originally found among the relics in the former 
imperial palace of the Sultan of Constantinople in 1929. Eventually they ended 
up in the archives in Washington DC. At first glance these mapss which
are dated a.d. 1513, appear to be nothing more than a hopelessly garbled view of 
the ancient world. No one paid much attention to them until Captain Mallery came 
along. Working with the U.S. Hy-drographic Office and the Weston Observatory of 
Boston, he de­veloped a grid system which suddenly brought the maps into focus. 
The modern Mercator grid system was not invented until 1559, so the ancient 
surveyors had to develop a method of their own. Once Mallery had unscrambled 
that method, he could hardly believe the results.
These maps were incredibly detailed and as accurate as the latest charts. 
Antarctica, for example, was not discovered until Captain Cook reached it in 
1773, and it was not fully explored until the 1950s. But the frozen continent is 
laid out with almost pinpoint accuracy on the Pi'ri Re'is maps, including 
mountain ranges that were not even known to us until 19521
Even more astonishing, these maps outline glaciers and land areas which are 
known to have existed in the Ice Age… before the last great shift of the earth's 
crust an estimated ten thousand years ago. This fact led Mallery to conclude 
that tbe,origjnal on which the Piri Re'is maps were apparently based had to have 
been drawn before the Ice Age.
Professor Charles Hapgood, a science historian, heard of Mallery's woik and 
turned the maps into a class study project at Keene State College. His students 
painstakingly compared each detail with modern charts and found that the ancient 
maps were never more than five degrees off… and those errors were probably due 
to land movements that occurred after the originals were drawn. Many of the 
details of the early maps correlated precisely with modern surveys. The results 
of Hapgood's studies, together with full-colour reproductions of the maps, were 
published in a book titled Maps of the Ancient Sea Kings,
Modem scientists can't seem to agree on the age of mankind. Each year produces a 
new bit of bone and new controversy. Some claim man might be half a million 
years old. Others offer more con­servative estimates ranging between thirty to 
seventy thousand years. But all seem to share the notion that our ancestors were 
embarrassingly primitive ten thousand years ago. They certainly were not 
developed enough to sail and chart the earth.
It would have been impossible for anyone to contrive the maps in 1929, the year 
they were found in Constantinople, It would have been even more impossible for 
someone to hoax them in 1513. And it is downright ridiculous to think that 
someone could have surveyed
the earth before the Ice Age. Modern scientists have a very scientific method 
for coping with such humiliating discoveries. They put them in the basements of 
their museums and forget them.
The museums are filled with such erratics, as they are called. A cube of metal, 
carefully machined, notched, and rounded on one side, was found in the centre of 
a block of coal in Austria in 1885. It's still in a museum in Salzburg and no 
one has ever come up with an explanation for it. Basing their conclusions on the 
age of the coal bed. various experts have estimated it to be three hundred 
thousand years old. That makes it quite a bit younger than the piece of gold 
thread that workmen found imbedded in eight feet of rock at a quarry in 
Rutherford Mills, England. The London Times announced the discovery on June 
22nd. 1844… and the experts mumbled that it had to be sixty million years old. 
Who could have dropped a gold thread in England sixty million years ago ? Or who 
could have manu­factured that iron and nickel cube three hundred thousand years 
back? Maybe these things were the handiwork of the same people who ma^e the 
strange pieces of very ancient pottery which have been found in rock quarries 
and coal mines around the world along with steel nails, perfect glass lenses, 
and even - believe it or not -bones of prehistoric animals with bullets in them. 
Giant chains have been found imbedded in great rocks in both North and South 
America. Not merely imbedded but actually passing through the rocks. They seem 
to predate the arrival of the Europeans by thousands of years.
Electric batteries have been found in ancient Egyptian tombs. A huge slab of 
perfect green glass weighing many tons was found in a cave in Israel a few years 
ago. It ranks as the largest piece of glass ever cast and is very ancient. Who 
made it, how, and why are still unsolved mysteries.
Science tells us one thing: these artifacts put the lie to all the scientific 
theories. Take man's earliest records - the cave paintings. Scientists assert 
that the great saurians were extinct long before man arrived on the scene. Yet 
cave paintings have been found de­picting dinosaurs. Other cliff carvings in the 
south-west show men hurling weapons at gigantic creatures that look like 
elephants or mammoths.
Captain Mallery created a stir when he first revealed his work with the Piri 
Re'is maps on a broadcast from Georgetown University in 1956. He dared to 
suggest that the maps may have been the product of an aerial survey. Professor 
Hapgood was more cautious, however, and merely implied they were the work of 
some lost sea­faring culture. The aerial survey hypothesis would have 
necessarily
been dependent upon a highly advanced technological society. Not only would 
flying machines have been required, but photography would also be needed for 
such a survey. Did the Elders have cameras, too?
A mere forty-seven thousand years ago somebody carved an intri­guing picture on 
the side of the Hunan Mountains in China. A pic­ture of cylinders in the sky 
with strange beings standing on them. Russian and Chinese archaeologists could 
date it. but they couldn't explain it Nor could they explain the drawing they 
found carved in a cliff at Fergana in Central Asia in 1961. A Reuters dispatch 
de­scribed it as resembling a man wearing an 'airtight helmet' with some kind of 
mechanical contraption on his back. It has been dated at 7000 b.c. Other 
peculiar cave and cliff carvings have been found in South America, Japan, and 
the Sahara Desert. Some of these pictures show giants with round heads towering 
over ordinary hunters. Others depict circular objects with, odd creatures coming 
out of them. These drawings were apparent; attempts to record highly unusual and 
significant events, but today they are open to all kinds of interpretation and 
speculation.
Scattered throughout France there are many ancient caverns heavily decorated 
with carvings and paintings dating back ten to thirty thousand years. More than 
two thousand animals are de­picted, including 610 horses, 510 bison, 205 
mammoths, and 176 ibex, according to a study published by H. Breuil in 1952. 
Alongside this impressive menagerie there are scores of other designs which are 
far more mysterious. They show oval- and disk-shaped objects some apparently 
standing on tripod legs with ladders extending down from them. Archaeologists 
can't account for them, but they look uneasily like the modern descriptions of 
flying saucers. The leading French authority, Aime Michel, goes so far as to 
suggest that that is exactly what they are.
Ancient records in China describe flying saucers and mysterious lights in the 
sky. They were usually regarded as dragons, and the early Chinese noted that 
these things flew regular routes year after year, century after century. Other 
early manuscripts preserved in India mention vimanas, 'aerial cars", as if they 
were commonplace. Five thousand years ago a sage named Mahaüshi Bharadwaj wrote 
a thorough description of these vimanas. telling how they could move in all 
directions silently, cover vast distances, and even become in­visible. They were 
supposedly propelled by 'tunes and rhythms'… perhaps a poetic way of describing 
the humming and whirring of intricate and little-understood machinery. In 
appearance they re-
sembled the flying cones which have been frequently described in the reports of 
modem UFO witnesses around the globe.
Although this sort of evidence is superabundant, it has never been 
systematically studied by trained scholars. Instead, this material has fallen 
into, the hands of assorted cultists and students of fringe pseudoscienccs. It 
has been used to advance belief in everything from lost Atlantis to 
extraterrestrial visitants from some distant planet. To subscribe to any one of 
these multitudinous beliefs is to exclude all other possibilities. We should 
consider every possibility, avoid belief, and accept only the hard facts.
Two key facts are already clear: (1) There have always been strange objects in 
the skies above this planet. They were seen by early man and have been seen 
constantly ever since, as the Bible and other available records still firmly 
attest. (2) Somebody mapped the earth before the Ice Age. We have no way of 
knowing who they were or how they did it. If the Piri Re'is maps were the 
product of an aerial survey, then perhaps there was an advanced civilization 
somewhere in the Americas or the Pacific, removed from the random clusters of 
primitive men. But occasionally the advanced culture dropped in on the cavemen 
or at least flew overhead. Thus, two cultures may have existed simultaneously. 
One highly advanced and purposely aloof from the other - the animal-like cave 
dwellers. It was inevitable that the two cultures should occasionally cross and 
that the higher group should affect the lower in many ways. At some point in 
early history the higher culture was either destroyed by a monumental 
catastrophe or withdrew in some fashion, leaving hardly a trace behind. Sp, our 
entire record of that superculture comes from the observations of primitive man. 
Our only evidence is the flimsy overlapping that took place: the residue of the 
effect of the superculture upon the subculture.
Primitive man was profoundly influenced by the sapetculture and guided by it. 
There are even indications that members of the super-culture actually appeared 
before primitive man and took over as kings and god-kings to direct his early 
development Such ap­pearances helped to generate many of man's first religious 
beliefs.
Some 2,500,000 people believe in the Book of Mormon, the Mormon bible, which is 
purportedly a record of life in North Am­erica thousands of years ago. As with 
all such records from all cul­tures and all religions, there are frequent 
descriptions of events in which some unknown benevolent group supplied man with 
direct help in an hour of need. For example, here is how a compass was 
introduced, presumably, to those long forgotten North Americans:
And it came to pass that as my father arose in the morning and went forth to the 
tent door, to his great astonishment he beheld upon the ground a round ball of 
curious workmanship; and it was of fine brass. And within the ball were two 
spindles; and the one pointed the way whither we should go into the wilderness. 
(1 Nephi 16:10) «
One of the most popular theories bandied about in cultist circles is that man 
was seeded on this planet by some inter-planetary group and that that group has 
kindly, but remotely, observed and guided our progress ever since. If this were 
true, they have been doing a lousy Job in recent centuries. We need a lot more 
help than they have been giving us.
In H. G. Wells' prophetic Things to Come there is a vision of a world ravaged by 
war and divided into fiercetribes ruled by warlords. A handful of surviving 
scientists and thinkers band together and begin the task of restoring 
civilization by flying over the planet. They call their organization Wings over 
the World (WOW). Much of the UFO evidence suggests that a real WOW has always 
existed. Maybe one of their members handed a caveman the first flaming brand and 
the first wheel, just as some unknown party allegedly deposited the first 
compass outside that Mormon tent.
A friend from WOW could have handed the original Ptri Re'ts map to some ancient 
Egyptian. After him it may have passed from the library at Alexandria to the 
palace in Constantinople. The key to the grid system was lost, so the map became 
useless. However, it is known that Christopher Columbus did have some strange 
maps when he set out for his short-cut to India.1
It is easy to speculate and even easier to leap to mind-blowing conclusions. We 
must try instead to assemble the many fragments of tantalizing evidence and 
attempt to construct the whole. To do this, we must first recognize some very 
unpleasant facts. We must admit Just how stupid we really are.
In recent months several different scientists attached to the National 
Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) have issued humble public statements 
admitting that our space programme has produced data which invalidates many of 
the most coveted con­clusions and beliefs of our learned astronomers. Ideas 
which have been accepted as fact for many years have suddenly been proved 
completely false. The more we find out about the moon, the less we
1 See Arlington H. Mallery. Lost America.
know about it. Space probes to Mars and Venus have tossed in­numerable 
astronomical theories into a cocked hat Recent radar probes to the planet 
Mercury discovered that that planet is actually rotating slowly on its axis, 
even though millions of school children have been taught for generations that 
Mercury does not rotate. Leading astronomers are now arguing over the status of 
Jupiter. Some now suspect that it isn't a planet at all but is really a cold 
star.
For the past two centuries astronomers have been peering through telescopes, 
counting stars, and making mathematical calculations to account for the motions 
and fückerings they have observed. They hare published and taught their learned 
conclusions as the gospel. Now we know that they have been wrong in many key 
areas. Before the end of this century all the text-books will have to be 
scrapped. All of the old ideas will be discarded.
'We used to think of the universe as nothing more than abundant fields of stars 
arranged in galaxies,' Dr Frank Drake, Chairman of Cornell University's 
astronomy department, said recently. "But we underestimated the variety and 
quantity of matter in space by a factor of about one trillion. Which means that 
we were about as wrong as we could be.*
In the early 1960s deep-dished radio telescopes discovered a maze of radio 
signals pouring in from outer space. At first there were wild speculations that 
we had made contact with some superdvifeation in some other galaxy. But further 
study discounted this fascinating notion. Instead, it was found that 
interstellar space is filled with invisible objects which don't emit light rays 
but which do give off powerful radio waves. These things have been dubbed 
quasars and pulsars. They constitute one rather trivial aspect of a broad and 
complex phenomenon. Our haunted planet has always been bathed in mysterious 
electromagnetic propagation and radio waves, some of them intelligent signals of 
unknown origin. We have been aware of these signals ever since the invention of 
the radio receiver, but we still can't account for them. All of this will be 
discussed in depth in another chapter.
Just as those funny flying isaucers seem to be an environmental mystery which 
has always existed on this planet, it also seems that the earth's atmosphere has 
always been charged with unidentified radio signals - some of which seem to 
radiate from the planet itself … as if the earth were beaming signals into space 
in response to the signals being received. Of course, the cultists contend that 
WOW has established secret transmitters in underground caverns.
Even gravity is a mystery. Newton discovered the hard way that if you sit under 
an apple tree, you are apt to get hit on the head by a falling apple. But we 
still don't know why. Recent experiments indi­cate that gravity is really a 
slowly pulsing wave pouring across space, beating about once per hour. The 
source of this wave and its true nature are a puzzle. We thought we knew 
something about ic until our astronauts went into space and fumbled around in 
weight­lessness. They found that even friction disappears in space.
R. Buckminster Fuller, the great thinker and designer, has said, "Everything 
you've learned in school as "obvious" becomes less and less obvious as you begin 
to study the universe. For example, there are no solids in the universe. There's 
not even a suggestion of a solid. There are no absolute continuums. There are no 
surfaces. There are no straight lines.'
Everything is up for grabs. We don't know anything about the universe or outer 
space. We have in all likelihood constructed a totally false history of our own 
race. And most humiliating of all, although we have lived on this planet for at 
least forty thousand years, we really don't know much about it. Worse still, we 
haven't even explored it!
Vast sections of this planet encompassing hundreds of thousands of square miles 
have never been surveyed. There are enormous regions that still have not been 
visited by a single scientifically trained man. Seasoned travellers are wearily 
familiar with the prob­lem of locating accurate maps. In many countries in 
Africa, Asia, and South America detailed maps are simply unobtainable because no 
surveys have ever been made. Those maps which are available often have the 
rivers and mountains in the wrong places. Here in the United States precisely 
detailed maps of many areas just don't exist. There are blank spots in Maine and 
even in New Jersey. The average road map doled out by service stations includes 
only the major high­ways and the larger towns. Unincorporated villages - and 
they number in the thousands - can't be found on any map anywhere. The regional 
maps distributed by the Geological Survey in Wash­ington are often based upon 
surveys made in 1880 or 1920, so many of them are virtually useless. New 
highways are being built so rapidly that the average road map is two to five 
years behind.
Travellers to inland Brazil find themselves trying to cope with maps based on 
sketches drawn by missionaries a hundred years ago. Visitors to the Himalaya 
Mountains have to deal with maps drawn by amateur cartographers and guesswork. 
Vast sections of the earth's oceans have not been adequately charted. There are 
count-
less islands everywhere that have never been visited, named, or mapped. If WOW 
actually exists, they could occupy a large island in the Pacific or Antarctica 
and nobody would ever he the wiser.
We have, of course, flown over a great part of the earth. Back in the 1930s 
Charles Lindbergh flew over Brazil and reported seeing an enormous stone wall 
deep in the jungle. A wall that stretched for miles. No explorer has ever 
penetrated to that wall overland. We still don't know anything about it. Other 
flieis in other parts of the world have reported similar oddities and most of 
them remain unex­plored mysteries.
In 1970 the United Nations issued a report which stated that four-fifths of the 
earth's surface was inadequately surveyed and charted and that tremendous areas 
remain unexplored altogether. The car­tographers who drew up the original Piri 
Re'is maps probably knew more about our planet than we do.
Despite all these facts, most of us like to pretend that our planet is fully 
explored and that all of its many mysteries have been adequately solved. We 
believe our history books. In fact, many millions of people still cling to the 
thoroughly discredited religious belief that mankind is only four thousand years 
old. Science labours to ignore the mounting evidence that we may not be the only 
intelli­gent life form on this planet. Yet historians have always carefully 
recorded the events which indicate that a parahuman race does exist alongside 
us. Millions of people have encountered them and thou­sands of books have been 
written about those encounters.
Now that we are zooming headlong into the Age of Aquarius, it is time for us to 
take a new look at the world around us; time for us to study those despicable 
erratics of archaeology and history; time for us to think about the unthinkable. 
Our much-touted technology has led us down the road to ruin, poisoned our 
environment, and given us the implements for destroying the earth itself. If 
there was a great superculture thousands of years ago, perhaps it followed the 
same tragic course. Perhaps even the Abominable Snowmen of the Him­alayas and 
their North American counterparts, the Sasquatch of Canada, will inherit the 
earth, and ten thousand years from now their descendants will be studying a 
frayed copy of an old road map and speculating about us. Naturally, there will 
be scientists among them who will sneer at the whole thing… and they will get 
back to the business of trying to split the atom.
CHAPTER TWO
THE CONTINENT THAT VANISHED
Every two or three years some adventurous scientist or peripatetic deep-sea 
diver discovers lost Atlantis. He usually announces Ms find during the summer 
silly season when news is slow, and the papers are filled with yarns about the 
Loch Ness monster and bathing beauty contests. Atlantis has now been located in 
the Mediterranean (many times), west of the Azores, south of the Azores, in the 
-Car­ibbean, off the west coast of South America, off the east coast of South 
America, in the North Pacific, in the South Pacific, oE the coast of Florida, 
and even in the Indian Ocean.
Recently the ruins of an ancient temple of unknown origin were discovered in the 
blue waters off the Bahamas. The newspapers soberly revealed that Atlantis had 
been found at last. A year of so later a mysterious stone pillar was spotted by 
divers deep in the ocean off the coast of Peru. Atlantis rose again.
This game has been going on for a very long time. Researchers wading through 
fifty-year-old newspapers have found them sprinkled with wondrous tales of 
Atlantean finds. Professors and PhD's nave frequently joined the clamour, 
bidding for publicity (and the often sizable foundation grants that follow such 
publicity), keep­ing alive one of the great fantasies of human history. It isn't 
even a myth or legend; there isn't enough evidence of any kind to give Atlantis 
such stature. Nevertheless, Atlantis has become an import­ant part of our 
folklore. Even the famous prophet Edgar Cayce dis­cussed the lost continent with 
the spirit world and passed along the prediction that it would rise again in the 
stormy Atlantic in 196S-9.
While the reality of Atlantis can be viewed with considerable scep­ticism, the 
persistence of the belief in it provides some interesting farts about the weird 
mechanisms employed by the earth's phantom inhabitants to generate myths and 
camouflage their real existence. Atlantis is no more real than visitors from 
Mars. Yet there are millions of people who have believed wholeheartedly in both. 
The members of WOW have carefully sowed the seeds of such myths in their wake 
and have worked across the generations to nurture them.
First, how did the story of Atlantis begin? It was launched by a single man 
named Plato (427-347 B.C.). In his two dialogues Timaeus* and 'Critias'. he 
offers a description of Atlantis and its demise nine thousand years earlier. His 
source, he states, is a man named Critias, who had heard the story from his 
great-grandfather Dropides, who had heard it from a sage named Solon, who had 
heard it from an Egyptian priest. So the whole foundation of the Atlantis 
fantasy is based upon what a ninety-year-old man told a ten-year-old boy (those 
are the ages given by Plato) about a tale spun by Solon years before. Rather 
like having your great-grand­father tell you the plot of a novel that someone 
else described to him after having heard it from someone else in a far-off land. 
And that someone else hadn't read the novel but had only heard about it, since 
the novel was nine-thousand years old.
Incidentally, the final pages of Plato's discourse are missing, so even his 
record of this hearsay is incomplete.
Scholars have devoted their lives to pondering Plato and search­ing for 
archaeological evidence to support the existence of Atlantis. Visit any library 
and you will find shelves of books on the subject. New pro-Atlantis volumes 
appear each year. A small, inde­fatigable cult of Atlantean believers has 
existed for a century or more, pouncing upon each new archaeological discovery 
as proof of Atlantis. Ruins throughout Central and South America have been 
credited to the Atlantis culture. Everything from Stonehenge in Eng­land to the 
Great Pyramid in Egypt to the monasteries in the Him­alayas has been accepted by 
the believers as further evidence of Atlantis.
In Chapter One the premise was stated that mankind could be an offshoot of some 
earlier superculture. The Atlantophiles have recog­nized this partially and 
think of Atlantis as that superculture. The psychic world has supported this 
contention for years by passing along endless messages about the past glories of 
Atlantis through mediums, Ouija boards, and the like. Many of these messages 
have served as the basis for some of the peculiar books that have ap­peared. 
Surprisingly, some of the data in this torrent of gibberish can be authenticated 
historically, but a pattern is hard to estab­lish.
There are people around the world who claim to have actually met the Atlanteans 
themselves. These percipients (witnesses) de­scribe stately men and women 
dressed in colourful robes and head­dresses, who appear suddenly like ghosts or 
apparitions. People who have never given Atlantis any thought at all are 
suddenly confronted
by these entities. Such visits can last for hours according to the percipients. 
The Atlantean takes great pains to describe the history of Atlantis in detail 
and when the witness scurries to a library, he or she finds some of the things 
mentioned in the literature. Eventually the percipient may write a book or 
pamphlet himself, combining what he has read with what he has been told by the 
entity. His work is entered into the literature and quoted again and again in 
new books by others.
This same phenomenon occurs constantly in religion, spiritualism, and ufodom, In 
the latter the entities claim to represent some other planet and they pass along 
convincing (to the percipient) descrip­tions of life on other worlds. like the 
Atlantean entities, the UFO pilots share the disturbing ability to appear and 
disappear in thin air. The tall, bearded Atlanteans with their high cheekbones 
and Oriental eyes are undoubtedly close brethren of the picturesque spacemen 
who, incidentally, are most often described the same way.
In occult lore these entities have been described for centuries and are called 
elemental. The phenomenon take many forms and un­doubtedly inspired the massive 
folklore on fairies and leprechauns, vampires, and demons, and the multitude of 
ghouls, goblins, and banshees who' have always occupied our haunted planet. They 
appear to have the ability to assume any shape or disguise. Some, if not all, 
seem to be the product of some complicated hallucinatory process which is able 
to feed false images into the minds of the percipients. Thus, a group of people 
in a room can sometimes come up with contradictory descriptions of an 
apparition. Some of the people might not see it at all
There are, of course, all kinds of psychological factors which could explain 
some of these hallucinations and apparitions, too. But it is quite remarkable 
that some of the messages passed along by our elusive Atlanteans are identical 
to messages passed along to un­related witnesses who have chatted with spacemen 
from Ganymede (a satellite of Jupiter). The same mechanism, be it psychic or 
psychological, is clearly at work in all these cases.
The phenomenon utilizes many other frames of reference. An apparition might pose 
as an ancient Greek philosopher or as Abraham Lincoln or a deceased pope. There 
are cases of all these. The folklore of all cultures also takes into account 
apparitions which pose as exact duplicates of living persons. In Germany such 
entities have long been known as doppelgangers.
The manifestations have also led to the creation of many minor
cults, such as the believers in Lemuria (which is supposed to be another lost 
continent) and Mu, Here again, we find that a large part of the literature is 
based upon the alleged experiences of those who have encountered Lemurians. In 
the Middle Ages many people insisted they had visited the underground palaces of 
the fairies, and volumes were written about the secret commonwealth of the 
little People. In modern times the Dero (detrimental robots) myth has blown up 
around the stories of people who claim they have been taken to the secret 
caverns occupied by the ancientj secret Dero culture.
In 1944, Amazing Stories, a science fiction magazine, published Richard Shaver's 
*I Remember Lemuria'. Editor Ray Palmer was amazed when he was swamped by 
thousands of letters from people who swore they had experiences with Deros and 
Lemurians. They often described things identical to the flying saucer phenomenon 
(which did not explode on the American scene until 1947).
The myth-making machinery of WOW has always been in oper­ation and the earliest 
thinkers and scientists recognized it. Strange illusions and purposeful 
distortions of reality have always haunted the human race. Some cults have 
defined the culprits as Masters of Illusion, the Black Mentalists, and the X 
Group. For centuries it was popular to accuse the devil, witches, and warlocks 
for these be­wildering manifestations. Whole religions sprang up around the etfi 
dence supplied by the phenomenon.
In Sweden the great mathematician Emanuel Swedenborg (1688-1772) wrote huge 
tomes about his experiences with the ele-mentals and offered solemn warnings 
such as:
When spirits begin to speak with a man, he must be aware that he believe nothing 
that they say. For nearly everything they say is fabricated by them, and they 
lie: for if they are permitted to narrate anything, as what heaven is and how 
things in the heavens are to be understood, they would tell so many lies that a 
man would be astonished. This they would do with solemn affirmation j,, 
Wherefore men must beware and not believe thems.«
Sir Walter Scott (1771-1832), the famous novelist, made a serious study of these 
matters, and in 1830 he published a series of essays summarizing his 
conclusions. He noted that when trained psychics encountered fairies and visited 
their splendid palaces 'the illusion vanished1. He explained;
The young knights and beautiful ladies showed themselves as wrinkled carles and 
odious hags… The stately halls were turned into miserable damp caverns - all the 
delights of the Elfin Elysium vanished at once. In a word, their pleasures were 
showy but totally unsubstantial - their activity unceasing, but fruitless and 
unavailing - and their condemnation appears to have consisted in the necessity 
of maintaining the appearance of industry or enjoy­ment, though their toil was 
fruitless and their pleasures shadowy and unsubstantial. Hence poets have 
designed them as 'the crew that never rest'. Besides the unceasing and useless 
bustle in which these spirits seemed to live, they had propensities unfavourable 
and distressing to mortals.
Educated theologians and scholars attached to the Vatican made a sober 
investigation into the burgeoning fad of spiritualism in the 1850s. This 
examination led to the issuance of a Papal Bull which warned Catholics that 
spiritualism was dangerous and the 'work of the devil'.
Despite all these warnings, millions of people were gripped in the hopeful 
effort to communicate with the spirit world, and the ele-mentals played the game 
with relish, implanting a whole new lore about life on other worlds or planets. 
New cults were spawned and dozens of frames of references were established, all 
based entirely on the seemingly sincere messages of these characters.
We were guided from beliefs in fairies and their secret commonwealth to new, 
more scientific beliefs in interplanetary visi­tors and their great 
Intergalactic Councils. The flying saucer phenomenon generated a whole new set 
of theories and beliefs as more and more people had encounters with Venusians 
and Martians in the back hills of Kentucky and the deserts of Arizona. The crew 
that never rest* were up to their old tricks in a new guise.
Once the skilled investigator recognizes just how intangible the manifestations 
really are, he is catapulted into the more esoteric world of philosophy. He 
struggles with the task of interpreting these unreal events, trying to 
understand their hidden purposes. This is unfortunately the route to madness. 
The phenomenon is fond of creating allegorical situations which can not be 
interpreted without excessive scholarship. The problem is to sort out the 
meaningful from the rubbish and to search for the hidden consistencies buried in 
the mountains of communications from the past and present.
The scriptures of all the great religions do contain a number of subtle 
correlations. Much of this literature deals vaguely with
rumours of some great past civilization. Isolated Indian tribes in North and 
South America have legends and myths very similar to the stories found in the 
Bible, including tales of a great deluge which destroyed most of mankind 
thousands of years ago. The Toltec Indians, for example, even had a tradition 
about a zacuaü, a very high tower they erected, and according to Ixtikochit], 
"Presently their languages were confused, and, not being able to understand each 
other, they went to different parts of the earth.'
Atlantean scholars have laboured to assemble all this lore as further proof that 
Atlantis did indeed exist as a real continent, which was destroyed by some great 
natural catastrophe. However, much of the information passed along by the 
Atlantean elementals states that Atlantis was an evil place, dominated by a 
warlike tech­nology very similar to our own, and that the Atlanteans eventually 
destroyed themselves - or were deliberately destroyed by some greater force 
which took a dim view of their militarism.
In flying saucer lore we have tales passed on by the spacemen of a great planet 
located between Mars and Jupiter and identified vari­ously as Maldek, Clarion, 
and a dozen other names. The inhabitants of this planet learned to smash the 
atom and soon succeeded in smashing their entire planet. It was broken into 
thousands of bits and pieces and those fragments now constitute the asteroid 
belt.
So, one important thread runs through all this Kterature: a great civilization 
once existed prior to the appearance of modern man, and it was either destroyed 
or destroyed itself. The surviving physical evidence, which will be discussed 
further on, indicates that such a civilization did exist on this planet and that 
its inhabitants vanished before, or soon after, man crawled out of his caves.
It may be that the elementals are actually a part of the human psyche and that 
they have been presenting us with some scrambled racial memory of the distant 
past. like the Garden of Eden, Atlantis may be nothing more than an allegory 
designed to give us a clue about our own history. In flying saucer lore there is 
elaborately detailed literature asserting that Venus was actually the Garden of 
Eden and that Adam and Eve were Venusians planted here to colonize Earth. 
Another variation on the Noah's Ark theme.
Even more interesting are the contiguous activities of the para-human group 
which has remained in constant touch with us throughout history and has greatly 
influenced our theological and philosophical ideas. They are proven liars and 
mischief makers, but it is also possible that they have been slyly trying to 
tell us some­thing about ourselves. In recent years the flying saucer occupants
have passed along innumerable warnings about how we have been upsetting the 
balance of the universe with our atom bombs. They have laced these warnings with 
bloodcurdling tales about Maldek.
A controversial UFO report from Mendoza, Argentina, is rather typical of these 
warnings. On September 1st, 1968, Carlos Peccinetti, twenty-six, and Fernando 
Jose Villegas, twenty-nine, were driving home from their job at the Mendoza 
casino at 3:30 a.m., when their car suddenly stalled. They got out to look under 
the hood and dis­covered a huge circular machine hovering nearby. Three beings 
in coveralls appeared, they said, and they found they were paralysed, unable to 
move. A foreign-sounding voice rang in their heads. 'It was as though they had 
put into our ears the tiny earplug speakers used with transistors,* Peccinetd 
said.
'We have just made three journeys around the sun,' the voice told them, 
'studying customs and languages of the inhabitants of the system… Mathematics is 
the universal language.'
Then a circular screen, similar to a television screen, appeared next to the 
object, and the two men were treated to a series of images. The first was a 
waterfall in lush country; the second, a mushroom-shaped cloud; the third, the 
waterfall scene again but without water.
After the entities clambered into the machine and flew off. the two witnesses 
were able to move again. Their story contains all the fam­iliar ingredients of 
thousands of other UFO contact tales. First, their automobile stalled, then they 
were paralysed, next they heard a telepathic voice, and finally they were given 
a simplified message… and the meaning of that message is quite obvious.
Police officers, doctors, lawyers, college professors, government officials, and 
just plain folks by the thousands have shared similar experiences in recent 
years. The members of WOW have really been engaged in an all-out effort to 
convince us of some impending dis­aster. It is not unusual that they should 
relate their warnings with tales about past civilizations that followed the same 
woeful path.
The Atlantis story seems to acquire another meaning in view of all this. 
Atlantis could be a part of our future instead of our past. Perhaps we are the 
Atlanteans.
CHAPTER THREE IT'S A NICE PLACE TO VISIT BUT…
Soon after be became president of the United Arab Republic, the late Gamal Abdel 
Nasser ordered a giant eighty-foot statue moved from the desert to a park in 
Cairo. The statue had been standing for uncounted centuries near the famous 
Steppe Pyramid. A battery of engineers and workmen descended on it, equipped 
with buildfaers. tractors, and monstrous cranes. They struggled with the project 
for weeks, first perplexed, then annoyed, and finally humiliated by the 
discovery that modern technology simply could not budge the mam­moth piece of 
stone. This raised the even more troublesome ques­tion: how had the ancient 
Egyptians moved the statue into place to begin with?
Archaeologists have been arguing for years about the methods employed by the 
ancient stone masons. Some quite moronic theories have not only been suggested 
but have been widely accepted as the answer. These theories are, as usual, 
taught to schoolchildren. The mystery is regarded as solved. Nobody asks 
questions.
There are over ninety pyramids in Egypt alone. (There are dozens of others all 
over the world, the largest of all is located deep in China.) Most of the 
Egyptian pyramids were once used as the burial places for pharaohs, but the 
Great Pyramid at Giza was never em­ployed for this purpose, and no one has an 
inkling why it was built. Some of the gigantic stones in these structures and in 
the great temples spotted, around Egypt were apparently taken from quarries 
hundreds of miles away. The popular archaeological theory is that these stones 
were floated up the Nile on rafts and then moved into place on wooden rollers. 
Since some of these blocks weigh as much as five tons, this means that in order 
to float them, the Egyptians would have had to build huge rafts capable of 
displacing over five tons of water. Otherwise, they would just sink to the 
bottom with their load. The Egyptians didn't amount to much when it came to 
building ships. No evidence of these super-rafts has ever turned up.
There are other flaws in these theories. We are told that hundreds of thousands 
of slaves were pressed into pyramid building during
certain seasons of each year. This leads us to the problem of logis­tics. It 
would take a complex organization to feed these hundreds of thousands daily and 
administer to their needs. Various modern en­gineers and experts have applied 
their slide rules to the problem, and the most liberal estimate of the time 
required to construct the Great Pyramid is six hundred years.
Strangely, although the ancient Egyptians left profusive records of everything 
else, no one has ever turned up even a single piece of papyrus describing the 
planning or building of these massive monu­ments. The stones were cut and 
dressed with such perfection that a piece of paper cannot be inserted between 
them. Obviously those early stonemasons were superb craftsmen. And obviously 
there were a lot of them in order to undertake and complete such enormous tasks.
When there is a mystery which can't be logically explained by science, cults 
develop which create explanations of their own. Our Atlantophiles naturally 
agree that the Egyptians didn't build the pyramids at all. Our UFO buffs claim 
they were built by the wonder­ful space people.
Morris K. Jessup, an astrophysicist and an early student of urology, reviewed 
the question and suggested:
Levitation is the only feasible answer. I believe that this lifting machine was 
a spaceship, probably of vast proportions; that it brought colonists to various 
parts of the Earth, probably from other terrestrial areas; that it supplied the 
heavy lift power for erecting great stone works; and that it was suddenly 
destroyed or taken away. Such a hypothesis would underwrite all of the 
move­ments o£ stone over which archaeologists and engineers have pon-, dered.
This presents us with a splendid contradiction. If some super-society in the sky 
had the technology to build a spaceship 'of vast proportions' and fly it all the 
way to our humble planet, why would they have the need to play around with stone 
blocks? If they wanted to leave behind evidence of their visit, they did a poor 
job of it, for we never have figured out the real meaning of these monoliths. 
Couldn't they have engraved a nice little message for us inside the Great 
Pyramid, explaining the whole thing in seventy-five languages? The only carvings 
found inside the Great Pyramid are a few little scratchings in the roof of the 
upper chamber which archae­ologists regard as stonemason marks. Similar marks 
have been
found in other structures. Maybe they are just the ancient equivalent of "Kjlroy 
was here".
For centuries the spirit mediums and the percipients who have chatted with 
ghostly Atlanteans have told us that the Great Pyra­mid really contains a hidden 
chamber which is crammed with goodies that will explain everything to us when 
the proper time comes, fjot wishing to be left out, many flying saucer 
contactees have repeated the same promise. An anthropologist named George Hunt 
Williamson wrote in the early 1950s:
The builders of the Great Pyramid buried one of their great spaceships near the 
structure. It wiU be revealed - no doubt within a comparatively short time - 
that there are many secret chambers within the Great Pyramid and that its true 
entrance lies under the silent object that is like a lion and yet like a man… 
the Sphinxl It will not remain silent much longer.. -1
On February 9th, 1960, a fertilizer salesman named Reinhold Schmidt was picked 
up by a flying saucer and flown to Egypt, ac­cording to his pamplet. Edge of 
Tomorrow. The friendly space people conducted him on a tour of those hidden 
chambers where he saw, among other things, the true cross on which Christ had 
died. He was also shown 'thirty-two tablets of a heavy-quality paper, rather 
dark in colour… imagine my surprise when I found the events of the past, 
present, and future there described in modern day English, in black ink, and 
written in beautiful longhand.'
These records indicated, Schmidt claimed, 'The end of this present Earth cycle 
will be 1998.'
So after the endless discussions of the hidden chambers in the pyramid, we 
finally had a genuine eye-witness who had been there and seen them. Unless, of 
course, Schmidt's adventure was just another variation of the classical visits 
to the underground fairy palaces of yesteryear.
Science took over. In 1969 a group of American scientists beaded by Dr Luis W. 
Alvarez travelled to Egypt and set up expensive cosmic ray detectors around the 
Great Pyramid. Their theory was that any cosmic rays penetrating the pyramid and 
passing through hidden chambers would be recorded as moving slightly faster than 
ray par­ticles travelling through solid stone. They fiddled with their gadgets 
for months and did get some very eccentric readings at first. But
* Neville Spearman Limited, London.
finally, in the February 6th, 1970 issue of Science, Dr Alvarez glumly announced 
that no hidden chambers had been detected with his sophisticated apparatus. The 
cuttists all nudged each other and winked knowingly. Obviously it was all a 
cover-up… part of the great conspiracy to keep the truth from the public.
Men have been scratching their heads over the Great Pyramid for at least four 
thousand years. It has never really been dated, and it could be considerably 
older. Whoever built it was so clever that countless efforts to find an entrance 
met with failure for thousands of years. Finally, in a.d. 820 the Caliph Al 
Mamaun launched a full-scale attack on the structure, expecting to find it 
filled with treasure. His men chipped away at it, heating the stones with fires 
and then cooling them suddenly by pouring vinegar over them. Slowly the stones 
cracked and they worked their way into the pyramid until they came upon a 
passageway. It was completely empty.
They found a larger passageway, now known as the great gallery, which leads 
upwards to two small chambers. The lower chamber's entrance is so small a man 
must enter on his hands and knees. The upper chamber contains nothing but a 
crude stone tub which really doesn't resemble the elaborately designed 
sarcophagi used by the ancient Egyptians to entomb deceased royalty. The total 
absence of artifacts and hieroglyphics has given archaeologists plenty to 
specu­late over. Some have suggested that the pyramid was used as a kind of 
grain elevator and that wheat was measured out in that tub. Others have tried to 
find astronomical significance to it.
In the mid-nineteenth century the pseudoscience of pyramidology was bom. A 
writer named John Taylor published a book in which he concluded that the whole 
purpose of the structure was to preserve andent Egyptian measurements. He was 
followed by an astronomer, Charles Piazzi Smyth, who extended this notion to 
include proph­ecies of the past and future. He measured every inch of the 
pyramid, inside and out, and every angle. In 1864 Smyth published a 
six-hundred-page book expounding his theories, and it caused an uproar in 
archaeological circles for years afterwards. A small but devoted cult still 
exists, still trying to validate his now thoroughly dis­credited concepts. Most 
of the literature on lost Atlantis also dis­cusses Smyth and pyramidology. The 
UFO cults also have their pyramidologists. Just as the pyramids are a 
cornerstone in human history, they also serve as key evidence to many cults with 
widely diversified causes.
Aside from the few major population centres, ancient Egypt was a
mud hut culture. Then as now the masses lived under-nourished lives in grinding 
poverty. Technical skills were rare. Yet somehow they managed to quarry those 
gigantic stones, transport them, and put them into place with geometric 
precision. We know that the Egyp­tians did build the ninety odd pyramids (the 
village of Meroe on the Upper Nile contains dozens of pyramids alone), plus 
numerous great temples and tombs which are still standing. But why did they 
build the Great Pyramid?
The Plain of Jars in Laos has been frequently mentioned in the war dispatches 
from Indochina. Did you ever wonder how it got its name? The answer is obvious: 
it is strewn with jars… huge stone jars. Some of them are over six feet high. 
Some are so large they can hold six men. There are over a thousand of these 
peculiar artifacts scattered around a high plateau surrounded by mountains. They 
were apparently carved out of limestone and granite boulders, and they've been 
there forever. No one seems to know who carved them, when and why. Why would 
anyone bother to spend weeks carving a giant stone jar in such a remote place?
Mysterious stone masons have left the fruits of their labours all over our 
haunted planet. Many of these fruits make no sense at all. In Costa Rica giant 
stone balls have been found deep in the jungles. Some of these are as big as 
eight feet in diameter and weigh more than sixteen tons. They are amazingly 
round and smooth. Scores of smaller ones, some only a few inches in diameter, 
have also been found. Scientists have been unable to come up with an explanation 
for their purpose, although they are obviously man-made. Similar stones have 
been found in Mexico and Guatemala.
"One thing the scientists agree on is that the spheres must have been very 
important to the communities of people that made them * Science Digest observed 
in June 1967. "Using the tools they had, it must have taken many years to make 
just one ball, even with many men working on it.'
like the jars of Laos, these balls are made of granite and lime­stone.
The United States is covered with strange artifacts and stone ruins of unknown 
origin. Every state boasts of several mysterious sites. In West Virginia there 
are the remains of huge circular stone structures apparently predating the 
Indians. In many states there are rums which archaeologists have muttered about 
being of Roman origin. Some of these sites have become minor local tourist 
attrac­tions. Others are marked only by brief highway signs. A random few.
such as Mystery Hill in North Salem, New Hampshire, have attained some 
celebrity.
Mystery HUl features several chambers - or tombs - topped by a gigantic 
Sacrificial Table weighing over four tons. It is supported on stone legs and is 
carefully grooved. In 1969 the New England An­tiquities Research Association 
conducted carbon 14 tests2 around the site and concluded that it was probably 
built around 1000 b.c. Recent investigations have demonstrated that some of the 
huge stones on Mystery Hill are carefully aligned with certain stars. Each year 
the sun sets directly over the Winter Solstice Monolith on the first day of 
winter, December 21, when viewed from the centre of the site, the Sacrificial 
Table.
The Delaware Indians have a tradition that a race of giants once inhabited the 
region east of the Mississippi, living in enormous cities and fortifications. 
There are innumerable references to giants in other Indian lore and in ancient 
literature all over the world, in­cluding, of course, the famous There were 
giants in the earth in those days' biblical statement {Genesis 6:4). South 
American Indians also have many legends about giants and their special 
civilization. Most of the tales, no matter what the source, assert that the 
giants were unfriendly and even hostile to normal men. Bones of giants (who must 
have been eight to twelve feet tall) have been found in the mounds of Minnesota 
and several other places. So it is entirely possible that a race of giants did 
exist in earlier times, and some of these huge stone constructions may have been 
their handiwork. Un­fortunately, science doesn't believe in jiants, so all this 
evidence has been ignored.
There is also considerable evidence that Christopher Columbus was a rather late 
arrival to the New World. He was probably preceded by the Vikings and maybe even 
the ancient Phoenicians. Chinese arti­facts have been found in Mexico and 
California, so perhaps even the Chinese beat Chris by several centuries.
A knight from the Orkney Islands left a carving in Massachusetts in the 
fourteenth century. Near Heavener, Oklahoma, there is a stone twelve feet high, 
ten feet wide, and sixteen inches thick, covered with ancient Scandinavian runic 
symbols. It was discovered by Choctaw Indians in 1830, and archaeologists have 
been arguing about it ever since. Several other ninestones have been found, the
1 Organic material contains radioactivity which deteriorates at a known rate. 
The carbon 14 test is a universally accepted method for measuring such 
deterioration and determining the age of the material. The test does not work on 
inorganic substances such as stone, of course.
most famous being the Kensington Scone, found by a farmer sear Kensington, 
Minnesota, at the turn of the century. Two more run-estones have been found in 
Oklahoma in recent years. The last one was discovered by two school boys neat 
Poteau, Oklahoma, in Sep­tember of 1967. As usual, the archaeologists are 
sharply divided over the validity of these discoveries. One group cries hoax, 
even though it would requite an expert archaeologist and linguist to perpetrate 
such a hoax. Others, such as Frederick Pohl, a noted Norse scholar, seem to 
think these stones may be authentic.8
Fifty years before Columbus conned Queen Isabella into financing his expedition, 
someone drew up a rough map of North America. A copy of this map was discovered 
by Laurence Whitten, a rare book dealer from New Haven, Connecticut, in 1957, It 
is now part of the rare document collection in the Beinecke library of Yale 
University and is known as the Yale Vinland Map. Scientific investigators have 
dated it at a.d. 1440, and as usual, the leading experts have been arguing about 
it ever since. Some have branded it an out-and-out hoax, while others regarded 
it as further evidence that the Vikings were frequent visitors to the New World.
More substantial evidence has been found in the form of ruins of a Viking 
longhouse on the Ungava Peninsula in northern Canada. A team from Laval 
University has dated it between the eleventh and twelfth centuries. Numerous 
other ruins and artifacts have been found all over North America. For example, 
two remarkably similar axes, both apparently of medieval European origin, have 
been dis­covered in Beardmore, Ontario, and Rocky Nook Point, Mass­achusetts.
Archaeologists from the Smithsonian Institution uncovered a small slab of stone 
covered with ciphers in 1SS5 near Bat Creek, Tennessee. They decided it was 
probably the work of Cherokee Indians, but modern specialists such as Dr Joseph 
B. Mahan of the Museum of Arts and Crafts at Columbus, Georgia, have taken a 
second look at it and disputed the old Indian theory. Dr Mahan knows Cherokee 
and he persuaded the Smithsonian to re-examine the Bat Creek stone. You simply 
can't ignore evidence,' Dr Mahan stated, "just because it doesn't fit current 
theory."
A similar stone was found by Manfred Metcalf at Fort Benning, Georgia, in 1968. 
Metcalf was looking for stones to build a barbecue griU in his backyard when he 
unearthed the stone. It is nine inches square and covered with triangles, 
circles, and straight and wavy lines. He passed it on to Dr Mahan, who thought 
the markings
* See Frederick Pohl, The VMng Explorers.
appeared to be characteristically Mediterranean. Another scientist, Dr Cyrus H. 
Gordon, chairman of Mediterranean studies at Brandeis University, agreed. There 
were strong similarities between the Met-calf stone and sampled of Minoan 
writing dating back three thou­sand years to the Bronze Age civilization which 
flourished on the Mediterranean island of Crete from 3000 to 1100 b.c. Dr Gordon 
became the centre of another controversy a few years ago when he announced that 
a sample of Phoenician writing found on a stone in Brazil was authentic… after 
other archaeologists had denounced it as a fraud. After all, it was hardly 
possible that the ancient Pho­enicians could have visited Brazil. Or was it?
As for the Bat Creek stone, Dr Gordon thinks it might have been the handiwork of 
Hebrews from Palestine during the Bronze Age. Both scientists speculate that 
ancient Semitic tribes from the Middle East may have visited North America 
thousands of years ago. This, of course, revives memories of the lost tribes of 
Israel. Could they have somehow found their way to this continent: and become 
that-lost American culture described in the Mormon Bible? Dr Mali an believes 
that some Indian tribes can be traced back to seafaring Mediterranean peoples. 
The Yuchi, he points out, are racially and linguistically different from other 
North American tribes. Their legends state, 'We came as the sun came, and we 
went as the sun went.* Dr Mahan interprets this to mean that the YucM came from 
the east, across the Atlantic Ocean, and then moved northwards from Florida to 
Georgia.
Some archaeologists tend to lump runestones together with the stones bearing 
Indian petroglyphs. Petroglyphs are designs carved into rocks as pathmarkers, 
and thousands have been found all over the Americas. Although innumerable 
isolated Indian tribes were ob­viously responsible for them, there are many 
interesting similarities in the symbols used. Some of these same symbols have 
been found carved on other ancient rocks in other parts of the world, suggesting 
that this form of writing was universal at one time… even though the races and 
tribes responsible could not understand each other's languages and in most cases 
had little or no contact. Archaeologists studiously try to overlook the fact 
that some of these pictographs can be traced to ancient Mediterranean cultures. 
But the runic writ­ing is quite distinct from the Indian petroglyphs. The 
runestones carry alphabetic symbols, while petroglyphs bear picture writing 
loosely related to the Egyptian hieroglyphs.
The Kensington stone, as translated by Frederick Pohl, describes how 'eight 
Goths and twenty-two Norwegians' established a camp.
One group went fishing, and when they returned, they found the ten who had 
remained behind 'red with blood and dead'. The year is given as 1362. Indian 
petroglyphs. on the other hand, were cus­tomarily devoted to traU information, 
where to find water, and the like.
One Indian pictograph of particular interest is a complex design which has been 
found throughout North, Central, and South Am­erica. It depicts a series of 
squares inside one another. The Hop! Indians call this the Mother Earth Symbol. 
To the Pimas it is the House of Teuhu: to the Cunas in Panama it is the Tree of 
life. Anthropologist Harold Sterling Gladwin saw something else in it when he 
studied this symbol carved on the wall of Casa Grande, Arizona. In his book, Men 
Out of Asia, he noted that the Mother Earth symbol isidentical with the Minoan 
labyrinth depicted on coins from Knossos, Crete, circa 200 b.c. The famous 
labyrinth was said to have been built by Daedalus to hide the half-man, 
half-bull Min­otaur. Dr Gladwin and Dr Clyde Keeler of Milledgeville, Georgia, 
both seem to think that the Indians' use of the ancient labyrinth symbol is 
evidence of the influence of the early Minoan culture.
In the eariy 1960s Angelos Galanopoulos, a Greek scientist, pro­posed still 
another theory for Atlantis. He suggested that sunken Minoan cities of Crete 
might have supplied the basis for the Atlantis legends. According to his theory, 
Plato got his dates wrong. Atlantis may have disappeared only a thousand or so 
years before the his­torian heard the tale, not nine thousand years before. It 
may have been one of the Greek islands, possibly Thera, Divers and 
archae­ologists working in the waters there in recent years have uncovered all 
kinds of evidence indicating that the Minoan culture came to a very abrupt end. 
So abrupt that craftsmen left their tools next to unfinished works and fled. The 
explanation currently in vogue is that a sudden volcanic eruption destroyed the 
islands. Dr Galanopoulos has been partially successful in matching Plato's 
description of At­lantis with what is now known about Thera. Dr Bruce C. Heezen, 
an oceanographer, believes that the eruption occurred around 1400 b.c. Needless 
to say, other scientists and schools loudly dispute this date.
We do know that early Crete was the centre of an impressive culture, that great 
cities and temples were built there, and that it was a major naval power. It is 
not likely, however, that Crete and Thera could have lived up to Plato's 
description of the super-civilization of Atlantis.
Still we have all the perplexing evidence of the runestones and
other artifacts scattered around this continent, wMch demonstrate that men from 
Europe and possibly from Crete and Thera did visit America in pre-Columbian 
times. It is even possible that groups settled here and built forts and temples, 
the remnants of which have served to augment the beliefs of dozens of cults and 
fringe so­cieties.
In a learned dissertation on petroglyphs published by the Smithsonian in 1937. 
Julian H. Steward frowned on the arguments that attempt to prove that 
"Egyptians, Scythians, Chinese, and a host of other Old World peoples, including 
the Ten Lost- Tribes of Israel, invaded America in ancient days'. He noted that 
'devotees of the subject have written voluminously, argued bitterly, and even 
fought duels'.
Now, over "thirty years later the Smithsonian is slowly changing its tune. They 
have stopped blaming the Indians for all these carved slabs. The Indians have 
been denying credit all along, of course.
"When the white men first arrived here [in British Columbia, Canada] in I860, 
the West Coast Indians had already incorporated the carvings in their legends,1 
Phil Thornburg, a petroglyph expert in Victoria, Canada, said recently. They 
showed them to white ex­plorers and explained they were left by an ancient 
civilization and were the hub of creation."
Thomburg points to what appears to be a carving of a Chinese dragon, known in 
Indian legend as a sisutl. There does seem to be an Oriental background to 
them," he observes. 'Being carved in sand­stone, it*s virtually impossible to 
say what age they are. I've found some that were buried under more than a foot 
o£ topsoil.
"Now this wasn't the kind of topsoil that would have washed over them. This was 
formed there, placing the age of the carving around five to seven thousand years 
- which is really ancient for this country.*
Thomburg found one petroglyph on Vancouver Island that had a hole worn 
completely through it by dripping water - proof that it had been there for a 
very long time. At another site he found a carving which had crumbled when a 
massive tree grew straight up through it.
Petroglyphs which were definitely the work of Indian tribes often tell 
interesting stories about hunts and battles, and in several in­stances, 
encounters with the little people and other phantom inhabi­tants. Some contain 
solemn warnings that the valley or mountain ahead is the abode of these sinister 
phantoms.
The Cherokee Indians have legends about the strange entities who
resided around Chimney Rock. North Carolina. White people have also seen them 
occasionally. In 1806 the Rev. George Newton re­ported to the Raleigh Register 
*a very extraordinary vision of thou­sands of beings in the air. They possessed 
a glittering appearance resembling the human form and were seen on or about 
Chimney Rode on the thirty-first of July last* Researcher Angelo CappareHo found 
this testimony by a Mrs. Reaves, one of the alleged wit­nesses:
I looked towards the Chimney. I was absolutely amazed, for south of Chimney Rock 
and floating along the side of the moun­tain was a huge crowd of white, 
phantomlike beings. Their cloth­ing (and filmy as it looked, I can only call it 
'clothing*) was so brilliant a white it almost hurt my eyes to look at them… 
Al­though I felt weak, somehow, it left a solemn and pleasing im­pression on my 
mind.
Chimney Rock is only one of the countless haunted places on this haunted planet.
CHAPTER FOUR
TOWERS OF GLASS AND THEORIES OF PUTTY
Vitfify is a ten-dollar word meaning to change into glass. Glass is made by 
heating sand (silica) and/or various oxides of silicon, boron, phosphorus, and 
other materials, then cooling the result rapidly to prevent crystallization. The 
process is fairly simple, and men have been manufacturing glass for thousands of 
years. When the first atomic bomb was exploded in New Mexico in 1945, it not 
only left a big hole in the ground, but the tremendous heat melted the sand and 
fused it together in glasslike fragments. These scorched particles were 
identical to the objects known as tektites. Tektites have been found all over 
our haunted planet and have baffled science for years. One recent expedition 
found tektites scattered over an area six thousand by four thousand miles from 
Tasmania to north of the Philippines and from the East Indies to the east coast 
of Africa. These were analysed as being approximately seven hundred thousand 
years old1.
Like nature, science abhors a vacuum. So most books on mineral­ogy blandly 
assert that tektites are of 'meteoric origin*. It is a nice little theory, and 
everybody seems to believe it. However, a majority of all meteorites are made 
out of solid iron, and most are vapourized by the intense heat of friction when 
they enter our atmosphere. Substances capable of melting into glass would, of 
course, burn up before they hit the surface of the earth.
In 1969 a group of NASA scientists dished up a delicious new version of the 
meteorite theory. They announced that tektites were from the moon. Aeons ago, 
they speculated, a huge meteor plum­meted into the moon, striking with such 
force that its impact hurled tons of moon dust into space. This lunar material 
attained escape velocity and passed into an orbit around the earth, where it 
grad­ually was sucked downwards by gravity, entered the earth's atmos­phere, 
melted, and fell into the Pacific Ocean. So another mystery was solved… unless 
you happen to have an eighth-grade education, a slide rule, and a basic 
knowledge of the mechanics involved. Then
1 See Tektites and Geomagnetic Reversals', B. P. Glass and Bruce C. Heezen, 
Scientific American, July 1967.
you would find that the impacting meteor would have to be of enor­mous size and 
be travelling at fantastic velocity in order to ac­complish the first step - 
casting debris beyond the moon's gravity. Such a meteor would, in all 
probability, affect the moon in other discernible ways - such as changing its 
orbit. Next, a long series of spectacular coincidences would be necessary for 
the debris to enter the proper orbit at the proper time so that it would lapse 
into a retrograde orbit around the earth. Finally, since tons of tektites are 
scattered in paths across the Pacific floor, and since we know that less than 5 
per cent of a mass entering the earth's atmosphere is likely to survive and hit 
the surface, the quantity of lunar material necessary to produce those tektites 
must have been larger than the original impacting meteor.
Hunks of glass have fallen from the sky, however. In fact, since ancient times 
all kinds of odd junk has been dropping on us, ranging from stone pillars and 
metal wheels to huge blocks of ice and vast quantities of real blood and even 
raw meat. Science conveniently ignores everything but the iron lumps which, they 
presume, are pieces of old planets drifting around in space. To astronomy's 
credit, we do know that there are groups of this debris in the earth's orbit 
around the sun, and we can predict annual meteor showers which occur as we pass 
through this mess.
One chunk of glass and metal crashed into a driveway in Can-nifton. Ontario in 
September 1968. Wesley Reid looked at it and saw that it was too hot to handle. 
After it cooled, he found he had a brownish object weighing about twelve ounces. 
When it was tested by experts, they found it was made of glass laced with a 
small quantity of pure zinc. Whatever it was, it didn't seem to be a part of a 
man-made satellite (which contain very little glass anyway), and it definitely 
fell out of the sky.
Earth's phantom inhabitants are always dumping their garbage on us. Flying 
saucer enthusiasts have been collecting and analysing this junk for years and 
have found pieces of pure aluminium, mag­nesium, tin, copper, slag, and endless 
varieties of silicon. Un­fortunately for them, none of this aerial debris seems 
to support their contention that UFOs are space ships from another planet. Nor 
has any known meteorite strewn such materials or tektites in its path.
The discovery of tektites and vitrified stones among the ancient ruins of 
Baalbek has inspired another popular ufological myth: that Baalbek once served 
as a spaceport for rocket ships from another world. A Soviet ethnologist. 
Professor M. Agrest, proposed the
theory in an article in Moscow's Uteraturnaya Gazeta in 1959. He also suggested 
that Sodom and Gomorrah were destroyed by an atomic bomb. Lot's wife, he 
asserted, did not turn into a pillar of salt but was actually reduced to a pile 
of ashes when she ignored a warning not to linger behind Lot's fleeing party.
Baalbek is located in Lebanon, east of Beirut and north of Dam­ascus, Syria. In 
ancient times it was a thriving city filled with great temples dedicated to 
Baal, the sun god. The pillars and stone slabs (some weighing many tons) still 
standing are impressive… but no more impressive than the scores of other similar 
ruins scattered throughout the Middle East, Enormous ruins of this type can be 
found deep in the heart of inhospitable deserts, raising once again the question 
of how the ancient peoples managed to quarry, trans­port, and erect these 
monuments with crude tools and a minimum of mechanical aids. Yet, quite 
obviously, they did manage… and man­aged well.
In 1948 an expedition from the University of Chicago unearthed the remnants of 
an ancient village thirty miles east of KMuk, Iraq. Dr Robert J. Braidwood 
estimated that the village had been settled some eight thousand years ago. 
Baalbek is, in comparison, a modern city.
Professor Agrest's theories were a bombshell to the assorted cults, particularly 
the flying saucer believers. He regarded the presence of tektites as evidence 
that atomic powered rockets had once used the vast stone platforms at Baalbek as 
launching areas. Apparently he did not know that vitrified ruins are a common 
phenomenon all over the world. Forts and towers so old that there are no legends 
to account for them can be found throughout northern Europe and the British 
Isles and the walls of many of these are vitrified. At some point in the distant 
past these structures must have been subjected to tre­mendous heat, though not 
necessarily from the blast of some nuclear powered rocket.
Lightning is the explanation most frequently offered by science. But there is no 
evidence to indicate that lightning bolts vitrify stone or even sand, although 
we really know very little about lightning and its effects. It would take dozens 
of lightning bolts all striking the same spot to produce these vitrified 
monuments. In some parts of the world, such as an area of eighteen thousand 
square yards outside of Cuzco, Peru, whole hillsides have been vitrified. 
Theories of vol­canic activity and glacial movements have been offered to 
account for these, but none of these theories really wo*.
There are legends describing how the planet was once bathed in
fire. Maybe more than once. So this vitrification could be the product of some 
nearly forgotten natural catastrophe.
On October 8th, 1871, a gigantic fireball or meteor roared over the Midwest, 
causing a rash of disastrous fires in several states, including the famous 
Chicago fire. Thousands of people were killed in Illinois and Wisconsin, and 
vast areas were ravaged by flames that night, A similar fiery visitor from space 
could have caused the vitrifications.2
Another strange phenomenon could be to blame. From time to time overpowering 
waves of heat from an unknown source are con­centrated in specific areas. 
Figueira, Portugal, suffered one of these mysterious blasts of'heat for two 
minutes on July 6th, 1949. The temperature soared to 158 degrees. Hundreds of 
people collapsed in the streets, while thousands of chickens and ducks keeled 
over dead, and the Mondego River dried up suddenly in several places, killing 
countless fish, We don't understand this phenomenon at all, and it is possible 
that even more intense heat waves of this type have oc­curred in the past.
The followers of Agrest were not about to accept such mundane explanations for 
the vitrification of Baalbek, however. A young as­tronomer, Dr Carl Sagan, 
presented a paper before the American Rocket Society on November 15th 1962, in 
which he repeated Pro­fessor Agrest's speculations and urged that ancient myths 
and legends be re-examined for possible clues to an early visit by an 
extraterrestrial -civilization. Other researchers scoured the ancient records of 
India and found things such as the Mahabharata, a docu­ment dating back more 
than three thousand years, which describes a 'blazing missile* that hurtled out 
of the sky into the midst of an attacking army, producing 'a radiance of 
smokeless fire' which flat­tened chariots, ignited forests, boiled rivers, and 
produced dark clouds of death. All of this sounded uneasily like an atomic 
attack. In the Mausala Parva, another ancient historical account, there is a 
vivid description of some kind of death-dealing ray which began as a small, 
bright glow, grew into a shaft of brilliant light, and then consumed its target. 
This phenomenon was accompanied by violent winds, peals of thunder in cloudless 
skies, and earth tremors. Terrible rakshasas, shaped like huge mounds, attacked 
another Indian army from the sky and fired 'weapons winged with gold', 
thunderbolts, and hundreds of fiery wheels.
Even in the Bible we are told how the prophet Elijah was saved by
a See Mysterious Fires and lights by Vincent Gaddis foe a fully docu­mented 
description of the 1871 catastrophe.
balls of fire which wiped out a hundred soldiers and their captains (Kings 
II:i). That would have been around $96 b.c. There are in­numerable stories of 
this type from all cultures indicating that WOW is armed with spectacularly 
advanced weapons and doesn't hesitate to use them against mortal men. So, one 
cultist conclusion about the vitrified forts is that they were attacked by 
flying saucers which focused deadly heat rays on them and their occupants. 
How­ever, the entire desert between Damascus and Baghdad is littered with 
blackened cocks. Thousands of square miles seem to be charred, not by the sun 
but by some long forgotten holocaust. Did WOW lay waste to all of Mesopotamia? 
Or did some horrible natural disaster wipe out the great civilization that once 
thrived there?
CHAPTER FIVE
STRONG MEN AND STUPID ENTERPRISES
Four thousand years ago Great Britain was populated by a small group of people 
barely out of the Stone Age. They had a few primi­tive tools made of bones, and 
they probably eked out a living with only the greatest difficulty. 
Anthropologists estimate that there were probably about three hundred thousand 
of them. They were un­doubtedly divided into warring clans and factions, since 
factionalism is a natural state of man. Yet somehow, thousands of these people 
managed to get together to spend many generations quarrying huge stones (some 
weighing thirty tons) in the Prescelly Mountains of Wales and hauling these 
enormous blocks 240 miles to Salisbury. There they systematically arranged these 
stones in a circle, following measurements so precise that they were able to 
construct a math­ematically correct astronomical computer,
It's called Stonehenge.
Like the Great Pyramid, Stonehenge appears to have been a point­less and 
impossible exercise. Thousands of workers had to be fed, clothed and housed for 
generations as they laboured on the profitless project. Top-flight 
administrative talent must have been necessary to plan and organize the work and 
supervise its execution. Architects had to design the monument with care before 
the first block of stone was chipped out of the hillside. Above all, we are 
asked {by the archaeologists) to believe that these early primitives had the 
motivation necessary to dedicate themselves to such an awesome task. We are also 
asked to believe that they pushed and hauled these monstrous stones up and down 
hills, across rivers, through forests and soupy bogs on sledges and wooden 
rollers. Then somehow, they managed to stand the slabs on end, lifted other 
stones on top of them, and built the whole thing so securely that it would last 
for four thousand years.
Plainly, the whole thing is quite absurd.
In his definitive book. Stonekenge Decoded, astronomer Gerald S. Hawkins 
catalogues these absurdities and offers the educated esti­mate that the 
construction of Stonehenge required at least 1.5 million man-days of physical 
labour. He calculates that it took three
centuries to build. That's ten generations. Ten generations of primi­tive people 
who were somehow convinced that it was worth while to arrange a pile of giant 
stones in a circle on an English plain.
'For generations the work on Salisbury plain must have absorbed most of the 
energies - physical, mental, spiritual - and most of the material resources of a 
whole people," Hawkins observed.
There are others, of course, who prefer to believe that the early Britons didn't 
build Stonehenge at all. To them, it is obviously the work of the Atlanteans or 
even the wondrous space people.
If Stonehenge were the only existing megalithic monument of this type in 
Britain, Hawkins' work would be more acceptable. Un­fortunately, there are 
several hundred of these stone circles scat­tered about the British Isles, many 
of them just as mysterious as Stonehenge. We must therefore assume that all the 
Stone Age Britons were frantically engaged in monument building for at least a 
thousand years. If the scientists have dated Stonehenge correctly, then its 
construction occurred around the same time that the Minoan culture blossomed on 
distant Crete. The Great Pyramid had already been built or was in the final 
stages. So far as we can tell, the Indians had not yet appeared in North and 
South America.
On Lewis, the northernmost island of the Outer Hebrides, many hundreds of miles 
north of Stonehenge, there is another group of giant standing stones arranged in 
a circle. Called Callanish, this ring consists of thirteen blocks set around a 
large central stone. It is erected in a desolate, hard-to-reach place, again 
posing the ques­tions, how and why did the early builders put it there? Since 
Cal­lanish is somewhat cruder than Stonehenge, Hawkins speculates that perhaps 
it was built first, and the builders applied what they had learned from that 
effort to the later construction on the Sal­isbury plain. But the two sites are 
separated by a vast distance and expanses of water. In order for the theory to 
work, we need evidence that the early Britons were also great travellers and had 
a society developed enough so that they could travel in large groups. The small, 
wandering tribes couldn't meet these criteria.
Astronomers and scientists have been measuring and studying these sites for 
centuries, and the general conclusion is that the stones were arranged in such a 
way that they deliberately aligned with certain stars and phases of the moon to 
form a crude computer which acted as a calendar. Hawkins fed his own 
calculations into a modern electronic computer and produced numerous charts and 
tables demonstrating such correlations. In essence, when a man stands in the 
centre of the Stonehenge circlej specific stars (or the
sun or moon) appear directly over specific stones at specific times of the year 
in a manner which had to be planned by the builders. Hawkins noted:
Some 240 Stonehenge alignments translated into celestial-de­clinations. For 
whatever reasons those Stonehenge builders built as they did, their final, 
completed creation was a marvel. As intri­cately aEgned as an interlocking 
series of astronomical observing instruments {which Indeed it was) and yet 
architecturally perfectly simple, in function subtle and elaborate, in 
appearance stark, im­posing, awesome, Stonehenge was a thing of surpassing 
Ingenuity of design, variety of usefulness, and grandeur - in concept and 
construction an eighth wonder of the ancient world.
Considering the enormous amount of effort that must have gone into its 
construction, Stonehenge ranks as the costliest calendar in the world.
Earlier investigators tried to explain Stonehenge as the work of the Romans, the 
Danes (similar constructions stand in Denmark), and the Druids, as esoteric 
priesthood which entered Britain from France in 500 B.C. Stonehenge had been 
around for at least one thousand years when the Druids arrived, but 
nevertheless, Druidism has become closely allied with Stonehenge. Even today, 
members of the Most Ancient Order of Druids make an annual pilgrimage to the 
site to perform their rites - rites which they claim date back to the days of 
Atlantis, incidentally.
Hawkins discovered that a significant cycle occurs every 18.6 years at 
Stonehenge. He cglls it midwinter moonrise, for the moon rises over one 
particular stone every 18.6 years. Then he points out with some glee a statement 
by the ancient historian Diodorus (circa 50 b.c): The Moon as viewed from this 
island appears to be but a little distance from the Earth and to have on it 
prominences like those of the Earth, which are visible to the eye. The account 
is also given that the god visits the island every nineteen years, the period in 
which the return of the stars to the same place in the heavens is accomplished.'
What god visited the British Isles every nineteen years? Could Stonehenge have 
been constructed to predict the appearances of some alien being? This would have 
given those ancient stonemasons a strong religious motive for constructing it,
Whoeverplanned Stonehenge had to have a knowledge of math­ematics and astronomy. 
Did the Stone Age Britons possess such
knowledge ? Or was the information passed along to them somehow? Were they 
following orders, just as Moses followed the specifications given to him by 
Jehovah for the construction o£ a gold ark (Exodus 25)? The gods and demons of 
all cultures have always had a pen­chant for ordering men to build huget 
seemingly useless temples, tombs, and artifacts.
Soon after Gerald Hawkins published a summary o£ his findings in Nature, October 
26th, 1963, he became the centre of controversy. Mathematicians, astronomers, 
and archaeologists who had never been near Stonehenge assaulted his thesis and 
dissected his sem­antics. He did leave many unaswered questions - largely 
because they were unanswerable.
Twenty miles from Stonehenge there is another ancient wonder ». > the mammoth 
mound at Silbury. This is a man-made mound of earth 130 feet high, covering over 
five acres. Scientists estimate that it was constructed around 1800 B.C., which 
means that while thou­sands of early Britons were starting work on Stonehenge, 
other hun­dreds or thousands were pointlessly hauling baskets of dirt to Silbury 
to build one of the largest mounds on Earth. In 1S48 a group of investigators 
burrowed a tunnel into it, going from the top to the bottom in hope of finding 
some clue. All they discovered were some picks made from red deer antlers. 
Recently these objects were given the carbon 14 test and were found to be from 
around 800 B.C. This was most upsetting to the theorists who believed the mound 
was at least a thousand years older than that. At the present time a team of 
American and British archaeologists are busy digging new holes in the Silbury 
mound, searching for new clues.
Man-made mounds of unknown origin and purpose number in the thousands all over 
this haunted planet. In Ireland they are called sidhe, or fairy mounds, and are 
purportedly the homes of the little people. St Patrick is supposed to have stood 
on Croagh Patrick, a mound in County Mayo, when he ordered the snakes out of 
Ireland. Hundreds of these mounds are scattered throughout the United States, 
where they are popularly called the Indian mounds, even though the Indians have 
no legends to account for them. Some of the mounds in Ohio, Minnesota, and in 
the Southwest are skilfully laid out in geometric patterns which can be seen 
only from the air. When viewed from above, they represent elephants, birds, 
snakes, and other animals. Whoever laid these things out apparently intended 
them to be seen from the air. From the ground they appear to. be nothing more 
than symmetrical hills with flat tops.
Aerial surveys of South America have revealed elaborate, ridged
fields and earthwork (some covering fifty thousand acres and some as long as a 
thousand miles) in at least five scattered locations. The ridged field at Lake 
Titicaca in the Andes covers two hundred thou­sand acres and is spread over 160 
miles. These man-made ridges and mounds may have been part of a complex 
agricultural and irrigation system.1
Other mounds and ridges of this sort are spread throughout Europe and Asia. 
Stone chests found in mounds in the Mississippi Valley are identical to chests 
dug up in mounds in Yorkshire, Eng­land. But most of the mounds have yielded 
little or nothing to patient diggers. Yet the presence of these mounds 
everywhere is an indication of a worldwide culture in prehistoric times which 
re­garded mound building as an important activity.
We do know that mound building persisted as part of the burial rites of ancient 
peoples. Early historians such as Homer and Her­odotus describe these rites. 
Alexander the Great is supposed to have spent a fortune to erect a huge mound 
over the grave of his friend Hephaestion. The kinds of ancient Scythia on the 
Black Sea were buried under mounds. Archaeologists assume that this mound 
build­ing practice led eventually to the development of the Egyptian pyra­mids. 
The desert sand was. a poor mound-making material, so the Egyptians switched to 
stone blocks. But how did mound building spread to the Americas in the 
pre-Indian epoch?
Flying saucer cults read great significance into the fact that many modern UFO 
sightings seem to congregate around the old 'Indian1 mounds. Strange lights, 
bobbing and weaving and blinking in intelligent patterns, periodically cavort 
above the mounds of the Ohio and Mississippi valleys. Since UFOs have a tendency 
to appear in the same geographical locations year after year, century after 
century it is possible that ancient peoples saw them too and erected the mounds 
for them. Some flying saucer writers have borrowed a page from Professor 
Agrest's Baalbek theory and suggested that the flat-topped mounds were intended 
as UFO. airports.
If the great mounds were merely monuments to the dead, they were costly ones. 
Even with modern bulldozers and steamshovels, it would take much time and money 
to construct, a mound 130 feet - high and five acres square, like the Silbury 
mound. It is difficult to visualize tribes of prehistoric people engaging in 
this activity for months or years. It is even more difficult to think of them 
planning
1 See "Pre-Columbian Ridged Fields', J. J. Parson and W. M. Denevao, Scientific 
American, July 1967.
the mounds so they would present specific symbols when seen from the air.
Now. it has been established that while the early Britons were simultaneously 
erecting Stonehenge and piling dirt for the Silbury mound, they were also 
carving giant figures in nearby hillsides. The figure of a great white horse is 
cut into the summit of a hill in the Berkshire Downs. At Ceine Abbas a giant 
caveman is traced upon a hillside. He carries a club, and his male genitalia are 
prominently displayed. A similar figure, the Long man at Wilmington, was 
emas­culated by early Christians. There are many others spotted from Australia 
to Africa to the United States, all obviously meant to serve as landmarks for 
unknown pilots cruising the virgin skies. The tra­dition for making these 
landmarks survived until at least fifteen hundred years ago, for that is the 
apparent age of the famous Naze a lines found in the Peruvian desert. Nobody 
paid much attention to these lines until the early 1940s. Since then they have 
become an important facet of Atlantean and,flying saucer lore.
From ground level the Nazca Lines are merely a jumble of paths made by brushing 
aside the stones and pebbles of the desert. There is little rain or natural 
erosion in the area, so the lines have remained intact for at least seven 
hundred years and possibly even for fifteen hundred (estimates vary}. Seen from 
the air, the clearances form the outlines of spiders, birds, fish, assorted 
monsters or unknown animals, and numerous squares and rectangles… some longer 
than two football fields. Dr. Maria Reiche, a German astronomer, has lived at 
Nazca for twenty years, carefully charting all the lines by viewing them atop a 
high ladder. Daniel Cohen remarked in Science Digest, May 1970:
In spite of such devotion to her work, she is regarded by some scientists as a 
woman obsessed with a theory, rather than a care­ful scientist. Dr Reiche had 
produced all sorts of correlations be­tween the lines and the positions of the 
sun, moon, and stars. She postulates a gigantic "desert calendar' with which the 
ancient Per­uvians could mark the passing of the years. Her opponents argue that 
with so many lines and so many astronomical bodies with which to make 
alignments, it,is possible to work up many cor­relations, but that they 
are~meaningless. •
The Inca-Nazca people who created these lines were massacred in the wars which 
followed Francisco Pizarro's invasion of Peru in the 1500s. The Inca 
civilization destroyed by Fizarro apparently came
along centuries after the lines were laid out An ancient Inca road slices across 
the desert, ruthlessly severing the lines. It would seem that the Incas regarded 
the lines as insignificant. Nevertheless, hun­dreds of people must have worked 
for years, if not for generations, in planning these lines and scratching away 
the topsoil to render them. The Nazca lines remain as another of early man's 
energetic but seemingly pointless enterprises.
On Easter Sunday, 1722, Dutch admiral Jaakob Rogeveen landed on an island in the 
Pacific some twenty-two hundred miles from the coast of South America. The first 
things he saw were hundreds of giant statues squatting near the water line, 
staring out to sea. They were huge, eyeless heads mounted on small stone bodies. 
Some were as high as thirty-six feet.
Admiral Rogeveen had discovered not Atlantis but Easter Island ».. a pitifully 
barren volcanic island with an area of forty-five square miles, with almost no 
trees, and with no wild-life except for hordes of bothersome insects. It was 
populated by cannibalistic tribes of Polynesian origin who had apparently 
migrated there cen­turies before. The current population is 270, but at one time 
it was considerably larger. Intertribal wars and raids by early slave traders 
whittled the population down.
The aku statues were quarried from volcanic rock. Some weigh as much as thirty 
tons. Since wood is practically non-existent on the island, the statues must 
have been hauled out of the quarries with ropes and sheer muscle power, dragged 
down to the beaches and raised "upright with more muscle power. Many of the 
monuments were topped with a hat, or pukao, made out of red Tock. Some of these 
pukaos weighed five tons. How the natives raised these five ton carvings to the 
tops of the erected statues is another puzzle.
like the builders of Stonehenge, the Easter Islanders had to ac­complish their 
task with the crudest kind of tools. Each statue must represent months or years 
of labour. There are over six hundred on the island. The statue building came to 
an abrupt end for some reason. So abrupt that the workers dropped their stone 
chisels on the spot. Their tools have been found in the quarry, next to two 
hundred unfinished statues, some of which measure sixty-six feet long.
Various expeditions have visited Easter Island and tried to piece together the 
story of the a hv builders, but the surviving natives have only the vaguest 
legends. During the tribal conflicts of the eight­eenth and nineteenth 
centuries, many of the statues were overturned
and destroyed rather contemptuously. Remnants of the island's cul­ture were 
erased by the wars, slavers, a smallpox epidemic, and missionaries who ordered 
the destruction of pagan artifacts. The latter included ancient wooden tablets 
covered with an unknown form of writing. Only a few samples of these tablets 
remain in scat­tered museums.
Scientists who have conluded that the Easter Islanders are Poly­nesians blithely 
overlook the fact that megalithic structures are virtually unknown in Polynesia 
and that the Polynesians never de­veloped a form of writing. One Easter Island 
legend stresses that wars were waged between a tribe of long-eared people and a 
tribe of short ears. The short ears won and presumably ate all the long ears. 
Perhaps the long ears were the ahu builders.
Easter Island is so isolated that the early settlers must have been marooned 
there, and lacking wood.for boat-building, remained out of touch with the rest 
of the world for centuries, while they de­veloped their own peculiar culture. 
They did have a complicated religion, and it is possible that the statues were 
some part of it. The red hats could have some meaning, for even the American 
Indians have legends and prophecies about gods in red hats. But there are also 
intriguing legends of red-haired beings in such distant and iso­lated places as 
Borneo, and the ancient gods of Europe and Asia were often described as having 
red or blond hair. Modern UFO contactees claim that the space people who ride 
around in flying saucers have long red or blond hair, too. So it is not 
surprising that some cultists speculate that members from WOW may have visited 
Easter Island and that the ahu statues are tributes to them, each statue 
sym­bolizing one appearance of a god.
Scores of giant red-haired mummies have been found in a cave twenty-two miles 
from Lovelock, Nevada, in the Ust sixty years. The first ones, discovered in 
1912, were between 6.5 and 7 feet tall. Arti­facts found in the same cave have 
been dated by carbon 14 tests. Apparently, the cave had been occupied as far 
back as five thousand years. The local Piute Indians have legends about these 
giants, de­scribing them as being cannibalistic. In her book, Life Among the 
Piutes (1882), Sarah Winnemucca Hopkins wrote that the last of the red-haired 
giants were exterminated by the Piutes in the nineteenth century. They would dig 
large holes in our trails at night,* Mrs Hopkins reported. 'Our people would 
fall into these holes… That tribe would even eat their own dead. Yes, they would 
even come and dig up our dead after they were buried and would carry them off 
and eat them.*
Atlantis lore also describes giant red-haired cannibals who behaved almost like 
traditional vampires. Some authors have specu­lated that the red-haired giants 
invaded Easter Island from South America, and the cannibalistic rites of the 
Easter Islanders were inherited from them.
There is now an American military base on Easter Island, and recently the 
workmen and heavy equipment constructing an airfield were diverted to raise one 
of the flattened statues. It took a heavy crane to do the job that was once done 
by hundreds of dedicated natives engaged in another of early man's impressive 
but pointless enterprises.
Easter Island has been a favourite of National Geographic for years, and the 
cultists have had a field day inventing explanations for the mystery. But there 
are many other Pacific islands even more remote and very rarely visited which 
pose far more baffling ques­tions. The city of Metalanim on the south-eastern 
shore of Ponape Island in Micronesia is now in ruins, but it once could have 
housed two million people. No one knows who built it or when. Some of the stone 
blocks in those ruins weigh fifteen tons, and the stone nsed in the city is not 
from the island. Gigantic waterways or canals intersect the city, some of them 
large enough to float a battleship. Who built this enormous place, and how did 
they move those huge stone blocks across the Pacific to the island? Whatever 
happened to the two million residents?
Three thousand miles to the south-east of Fonape Island, on tiny Maiden Island 
in the line Island chain there are the ruins of forty Stone temples whose 
architecture is identical to that of Metalanim, Basalt roads lead from these 
ruins straight into the Pacific Ocean. The island is uninhabited and covered 
with guano (bird droppings). But if we draw an imaginary line southwards from 
Maiden for twelve hundred miles, we arrive at Rarotonga in the Cook Islands. 
Here another ancient road of basalt blocks rises out of the ocean.
Innumerable other hard-to-reach islands scattered throughout toe Pacific are 
dotted with enigmatic ruins, canals, and roadways from some long lost culture. 
They all seem to be interrelated, as if they were all once part of some great 
civilization. It would be pro­hibitively expensive to organize a proper 
scientific expedition to visit and study all of these far-flung ruins 
systematically. Besides, their existence doesn't fit in with any of the current 
anthropological theories. Suppose some scientist should find that they date back 
ten thousand years or more and are the remnants of some super-civilization of 
the past? No matter how substantial Ms evidence
might be, he would be immediately crucified by his colleagues and drummed out of 
all the scientific societies.
Obviously. Metalanim was built by cannibals with stone chisels, and those canals 
served their religious rites to the water gods.
Believers in the lost continents of Mu, Pan, and Lemuria (which may have been 
one place) noisily embrace these tidbits as evidence that a great land mass did 
exist in the Pacific at one time and that it was populated with a highly 
advanced race while the Egyptians, Britons, and Cretans were all fashioning 
stone axes. One cultist tra­dition, passed along by talkative elementals and 
members of WOW, is that Lemuria preceded Atlantis. After temuria sank into the 
Pacific, the Atlantis culture got underway and flourished for 14,000 years 
before it, too, sank 10,500 years ago.*
A mystical archaeologist named James Churchward is largely re­sponsible for the 
modern revival of interest in Mu. In the early part of this century he travelled 
through Central and South America probing into ancient ruins and trying to 
decipher stone carvings and petroglyphs. Then he published a series of books 
which combined scientism and sciolism (that is, he applied the scientific method 
to dubious fragments of evidence) to support his contention that a 
supercontinent once existed in the Pacific. la his view, Easter Island served as 
a kind of factory, and the great stone heads manufactured there were shipped off 
to other parts of Mu. The poorly investigated ruins of the Pacific islands and 
the great island mounds (yes, huge man-made mounds are found on many of these 
islands) were all a part of that ancient civilization, he said. He leaned on 
scrambled translations of stone carvings and vague legends of undefined origin. 
These were mixed in with the flat statements of elementals and strange Vise 
men."
Churchward also saw evidence or traces of Mu in the ruins of the Mayan 
civilization in Central America and the Aztec and Incan cul­tures further south. 
He compiled charts which compared the writing of Maya with the hieroglyphs of 
Egypt, and he constructed the an­cient alphabet of Mu. Ultimately, he produced 
precise maps of Mu and tried to demonstrate how the mysterious ruins found in 
the United States were linked to that remote continent. Sciolists every­where 
leaped on to his bandwagon, and an enormous body of Mu literature has developed, 
but science remains unconvinced.1
2 See Eklal Kueshana, The Ultimate Frontier.
8 See The Lost Continent of Mu. The Sacred Symbols of Mu, Cosmic Forces of Mu, 
The Children of Mu, Cosmic Forces of Mu~Book 2, all published by Neville 
Spearman.
Actually, there is considerable merit In Churchward** evidence, even though his 
conclusions and his bold statements about Mu his­tory can be questioned. A 
fantastic culture of stone builders and mound builders, predating modern man by 
centuries or even thou­sands of years, obviously did exist all over this planet 
The only possible explanation for the many Pacific ruins, such as the huge stone 
arch found on the coral atoll of Tonga-Tabu (two upright columns weighing 
seventy tons each, topped by a crosspiece weigh­ing twenty-five tons), is that 
these islands must have somehow been linked together by a land mass in the 
distant past. The culture of this mysterious land spread throughout the world. 
Then an un­thinkable catastrophe occurred. A catastrophe which altered the face 
of the whole earth and wiped out everything but the most durable constructions 
of that doomed race. In effect the slate was wiped dean. The ancient world was 
destroyed and a new race slowly emerged. But we are still haunted by racial 
memories of our planet's .past. Every race and every culture has preserved - and 
even guarded - memories of that earlier epoch. Unfortunately, modern science has 
boxed itself in and dedicated itself to proving Darwin's theory of evolution and 
other theories which supply a rational, but not nec­essarily valid, explanation 
of man's origin and past.
CHAPTER SIX
A FUNNY THING HAPPENED ON THE WAY TO EXTINCTION
Want to discover a lost city and be entered in the annals of archae­ology? It's 
easy, according to James Randi, the famous magician and escape artist who has 
spent considerable time probing into the ruins of Asia and South America. Just 
visit an out-of-the-way place and ask the natives for directions to the nearest 
lost city, Randi explains. There are thousands of these structures an every 
continent, and only a comparative handful have been recognized by archaeology. 
Those prehistoric stonemasons were ubiquitous, and they left their works 
everywhere.
A young geologist named Karl Mauch found the lost city of Zim­babwe in southern 
Rhodesia in 1871 simply by asking an ivory trader for directions. Mauch's story 
is filled with high adventure. The trader, a German-American named Adam Renders, 
rescued him from a tribe of hostile natives and led him to the site of the 
ancient ruins. Mauch decided Zimbabwe was actually the biblical gold centre of 
Ophir, where the fruits of King Solomon's mines were col­lected. But all he and 
Renders found were a series of granite struc­tures on top of a steep bill, 
filled with winding passageways and tunnels. The largest was the Elliptical 
Building roughly 830 feet in circumference and thirty-three feet high. Nearby 
were two towers. A cave on a cliff some distance away has proven to have unusual 
ac­oustics. When someone speaks in the cave, his voice can be heard in the 
Elliptical Building but nowhere else. 'Doubtless, the native priests put this 
phenomenon to nefarious use,' L Sprague de Camp, a reformed science fiction 
writer, notes.
Archaeologists have been arguing about Zimbabwe for one hun­dred years. The 
ruins have been dated variously from a.d. 700 to 1500. They have been credited 
to everyone from the Phoenicians and the Egyptians to the naked Bantu tribesmen. 
Their workmanship is rather crude when compared with the far more impressive 
structures of Asia, the Pacific, and South America. Nevertheless, someone -we'll 
probably never know who - went to the trouble of dragging thousands of granite 
bricks to the top of a hill deep in the African
jungle twelve hundred years age and building an elaborate fortress-temple filled 
with labyrinths and passageways whose only apparent purpose is to drive 
archaeologists mad,
The city of Timbuktu wae little more than a legend until the closing years of 
the nineteenth century, when French adventurers crossed two thousand miles of 
the Sahara wasteland and found it on the banks of the Niger River in what is now 
the country of Mali. It was settled in ajo. 1087 and was once a large, thriving 
trade centre. Today it has a population of about eighty-five hundred.1 The 
archi­tecture of Timbuktu is not particularly Impressive, and the city is most 
noted for the hundreds of storks who reside there,
Since a prominent city Uke Timbuktu could become lost In modem timesj it is not 
surprising that even larger and more impressive cities,' such as Angkor Wat 
could get lost altogether. Angkor was pnly a myth until explorers stumbled on to 
it in Cambodia in 1857. It contains enormous temples and pyramid-like structures 
appar­ently related to the mysterious structures of the Pacific islands. The 
walls are covered with statues and bas-reliefs, and the origins of the city are 
lost in a welter of half-remembered legends. Local natives still speak of the 
great godlike beings who built the place. Hard facts are rare, One story popular 
soon after Angkor's discovery is that the city was abandoned suddenly (probably 
around a.d. 1300} in the same way that the Easter Islanders threw down their 
tools in their quarries and fled. At least it is obvious that Angkor was the 
product of an advanced culture of engineers and stonemasons and that their 
culture vanished rather suddenly<
History demostrates that men have often built imposing, elabor­ate cities, 
flourished in them for hundreds or even thousands of years, then deserted them 
to live in simple grass huts on their peri­meters. Wars and natural calamities 
often played a part in this pattern, of course. Great cultures have risen and 
then died out. Men returned to simpler ways of life. It is a natural order of 
things. A thousand years from now people may be living in thatched shacks in New 
Jersey and on Long Island within full view of the decaying towers of Manhattan. 
They may tell the children about the peculiar ancients who built the towers as 
part of the strange reEgion which worshipped the great god Money.
In the Middle East the little country of Jordan is filled with Roman
1 Population figures for most parts of tie world are debatable. The figures used 
in this book ate up-to-date estimates from the official statistics of the United 
Nations and sources such as the Hammond World Attas.
ruins predating the Christian era. A large Roman theatre with a seating capacity 
of four thousand can be found near Amman. There are great temples and triumphal 
arches and countless stone columns lining dead streets paved with large stone 
blocks.
Far to the south of Amman, in the midst of the unfriendly desert, the traveller 
enters a narrow, gorge which leads through the cliffs to an ancient city right 
out of the Arabian nights. This is Petra, carved out of the red sandstone cliffs 
and filled with stately columns and temples. This Arab Shangri-la was 
constructed around 700 b.c. and must have housed thousands of people. Food, 
water, and supplies had to be brought in through the gorge - the only approach - 
from miles away. Thousands of men must have laboured for generations, hacking 
these monuments out of the walls of this hidden valley. Some of the ruins are 
pre-Roman. There are ancient tombs, and a narrow stone staircase leads to an 
area on top of a cliff where two twenty-foot obelisks are located on 'the high 
place' - a platform measuring forty-five by twenty feet. Perhaps Professor 
Agrest would regard it as another launching platform for nuclear rockets.
The culture that built Petra is lost in legend and archaeological confusion, but 
in the city's final days it was used as a hideout by desert bandits.
For the most part, believers in Mu, Atlantis, and flying saucers have ignored 
the ruins of the Middle East and Africa, concentrating instead on the lost 
cities of Central and South America. The fairly recent Mayan, Inca, and Aztec 
civilizations cannot account for all these ruins. There is evidence that 
another, possibly far more ad­vanced, culture thrived in the Americas in earlier 
times. Remnants of that civilization may have been handed down to the Indians 
who followed.
Tiabuanaco, a fabulous stone ruin high in the Andes Mountains, has inspired more 
curiosity, speculation, and nonsense than any other. It has been the subject of 
countless books and articles and has been used to support the beliefs of nearly 
every outlandish cult going. In recent years there have been innumerable flying 
saucer sightings and appearances of little glowing green men around Lake 
Titicaca, which is 12,644 feet above sea level, Tiahuanaco is at the south-east 
end of the lake. Although the ruins cover only about one sixth of a mile, they 
feature impressive tumuli (man-made mounds), a fifty-foot high pyramid, and a 
number of stone platforms and underground chambers. The famous Gateway of the 
Sun is an arch weighing nearly ten tons. Archaeologists believe that the 
Tiahuana-cans were part of an empire that preceded the Incas by two thou-
sand years, but they left no -written record, and there are no local legends 
about them. When the Incas latet conquered the Lake Titi-caca region, they found 
Tiahuanaco abandoned.2 '
While many of tie structures in Petra were carved from the sand­stone cliffs in 
place, same of the walls in Tiahuanaco were whittled out of huge blocks weighing 
as much as sixty tons and then some­how moved into place. Giant statues also 
stand around the site. One weighing twenty tons has been moved to a museum in La 
Paz. In their book, The Great Idol of Tiahuanaco, Hans Bellamy and P. AlJan 
offer an interpretation of the symbols found in a huge statue dis­covered in a 
Tlahuanacan temple. They claimed the symbols re­corded astronomical knowledge of 
a very advanced order.
Erich Von Daniken, author of Chariots of the'Gods, visited the Andes is his 
search for evidence that spaceships had visited the Earth in prehistoric times. 
He describes seeing a twenty-thousand-toa stone block near the ruins of the 
Incan fort of Sacsahuaman. Danikcn explains:
It is a single stone block the size of a four-storey house. It has been 
impeccably dressed in the most craftsmanlike way; it has steps and ramps and is 
adorned with spirals and holes… the whole monstrous block stands on its head. So 
the steps run down-ward from the roof; the holes point in different directions 
like the indentations of a grenade; strange depressions, shaped rather like 
chairs, seem to hang floating in space. Who can imagine that human hands and 
human endeavour excavated, transported, and dressed this block? What power 
overturned it? What titanic forces were at work here? And to what end?
The fortress of Sacsahuaman is surrounded by a wall sixty-feet high, containing 
stones weighing as much as two hundred tons. Two hundred tons! Morris K. Jessup, 
a qualified investigator, viewed the fortress and described these stones.
AH of them crudely rough quarried and were then ground into their designated 
niches in the structure by pushing them back and forth in situ, until they 
fitted so closely, completely, and accu­rately that a knife blade can not be 
inserted between them. This is a logical and practical shortcut to effective 
stone fitting, which we have not qualified in modern engineering.
z See Road in ike Sky by George Hunt Williamson, Neville Spearman.
Science writer Joseph Goodavage questioned Jessup's theory in Flying Saucers - 
UFO Reports, No. 4. The stones, he pointed out,
… had to be lifted into the air. placed roughly into their proper positions, and 
then by some force inconceivable to us, shoved back and forth, grinding down the 
roughly hewn surfaces until they fitted smoothly and perfectly into their proper 
niches. To lift, swing into position, then rub the massive weight back and forth 
(against enormous friction) without loosening its snugly fitting neighbours was 
no job for simple aborigines or even for an ad­vanced Inca culture; the fact is 
that Sacsahuaman was ancient long before the Incas appeared on the scene.
To add to the mystery, some of the larger stones found in the Andes ruins were 
quarried in a valley two hundred toiles away. Somehow these enormous blocks of 
stone had to be transported up and down mountains to their final resting place. 
Those fond archae­ological inventions, wooden rollers and rafts, couldn't have 
been used. So how did the ancient builders accomplish this task?
A possible explanation taken seriously by some scientists - and loudly berated 
by others - is that these monuments were built in a time when the surface of the 
earth was actually different from what it is now. A time when the Andes were 
level with the rest of the land. Hans Schindler Bellamy prowled around Lake 
Titicaca and claimed that he found traces of marine sediment indicating that the 
Great Deluge had once engulfed the area. This of course was evidence that the 
ruins had been built before the deluge and were many thousands of years old.
Two Frenchmen, Louis Pauwels, editor of the magazine Planite, and Jacques 
Bergier, a nuclear physicist, seem to go along with Bell­amy in their book, The 
Morning of the Magicians. They propose that the Earth was once inhabited by a 
giant race which built the mounds and monoliths and maintained a worldwide 
civilization with key centres in the Andes, New Guinea, Mexico, Abyssinia, and 
Tibet. They were the true Atlanteans and were destroyed by some great cosmic 
disaster.
The evidence reviewed thus far does indicate that this planet was once occupied 
by a single great culture or a series of intertwining cultures which possessed 
secrets of engineering and stone building beyond anything known by the ancient 
Minoans, Romans, had Britons. They constructed their monuments in isolated 
places, such as the islands of northern Scotland, the Pacific, and the Andes 
Moun-
tains, demonstrating an incredible sense of purpose as well as awe­some 
perseverance.
Our anthropologists and archaeologists have been struggling to uncover and 
understand the history of the past four thousand years. They have steadfastly 
refused to consider the possibility that man­kind may be only the latest race to 
infest the Earth, that other races and other civilizations may have thrived here 
and died here. One of the increasingly popular themes in science fiction is the 
notion that an earlier super-race built space ships and sent their members off 
to visit the stars. Now those space travellers are returning to home base in 
their flying saucers, and they're looking around in unhappy confusion, asking, 
'Where did everybody go? Who are all these piti­ful little ants shooting at each 
other?'
Alfred Wegener, an obscure German meteorologist, died in 1930 after suffering 
fifteen years of ridicule, slander, and contempt at the hands of his peers and 
colleagues. He was branded a fool because he believed that the earth once 
contained two large land masses which had gradually split up and drifted apart 
to form the six continents. Every schoolboy who has ever studied a map of the 
globe has reached the same tentative conclusion, for the great land masses do 
seem to conform like the pieces of a massive jigsaw puzzle. Wege-ner's evidence 
was a bit more complicated than that, however. He considered fossils from 
different continents, climatic changes, and specific geological formations, such 
as mountains which seem to dis­play marked similarities on the different 
continents. But science was not ready to consider the theory of continental 
drift in 1915. It was easier to denounce Wegener, dissect his ideas with more 
popular theories, and consign Ms books to the scrap heap. When Wegener died in 
1930, his theory seemed to die with him.
In the late 1950s, the Wegener controversy long forgotten, a new crop of 
scientists began to explore the oceans, and new data were fed into computers. 
Mountain ranges were discovered under the oceans, laid out in ways which 
confirmed Wegener's earlier speculations. Almost overnight the continental drift 
theory became a new scientific fact. The National Science Foundation has now 
committed $5.4 million for new tests and studies. Alfred Wegener may soon have 
the last laugh.3
Rock layers at specific levels in South America have been found to'
*Se<f The Confirmation of Continental Drift*, Patrick M. Hurley, Scientific 
American, April 196S. Also, 'Jigsaw of the Primeval World", Life, January 30th, 
1970.
match identical layers in Africa, indicating that both land masses were once a 
single unit. The current guess is that 150 to 200 million years ago thete were 
two supercontments. They broke apart and drifted away from each other slowly. 
They are still moving slowly, almost imperceptibly, and their movements have 
been measured by satellite photos and other means. North America is moving away 
from Europe at the rate of an inch per year.
New instruments are able to measure the magnetic fields of rocks on the ocean's 
bottom. These measurements indicate that the Earth's magnetic field has 
frequently shifted, the North Pole be­coming the South Pole and vice versa. Such 
magnetic shifts have occurred at least 171 times in the past seventy-sfac mil 
Bon years -further proof that the Earth's crust is wriggling about.4
What all this means is that, about two hundred million years ago during the age 
of the great reptiles - the Paleozoic age - this was an entirely different 
planet. Perhaps it harboured life forms now unim­aginable to us. Then it broke 
up, and new continents were formed, new climatic changes occurred, the physical 
environment itself may have changed. These changes could have brought about the 
sudden or gradual change of the life forms as they altered to adapt to the new 
conditions. Some of the puzzling erratics discussed in Chapter One could have 
been produced by a form of intelligent life now lost and forgotten. But a lot of 
other changes can occur in two hundred million years. It is doubtful if even the 
most advanced civilization could produce any quantity of monuments and artifacts 
which could withstand millions of years of erosion and geological change.
The Atlantophiles are not too happy with the continental drift theory because it 
virtually excludes the possibility that any large land mass could have existed 
between North America and Europe. It might not rule out Mu or Lemuria, however. 
Other stubborn cultists are already leaping on to the continental drift 
bandwagon and claiming one of those two land masses as their favoured lost 
con­tinent.
Our flimsy knowledge of the very ancient past is based entirely upon the 
discovery and interpretation of fossils found in the various lock layers of the 
Earth's crust. This inexact science called pale­ontology is only two hundred 
years old. We haven't dug deeply enough or studied things thoroughly enough to 
reach reliable con­clusions about the distant past So many of the facts commonly 
accepted today are only educated guesses.
4 See "Reversals of the Earth's Magnetic Field'. Allan ^px. Scientific American, 
February 1967.
If the Earth has suffered truly cataclysmic changes in the past two hundred 
million years, we must first know of and understand those changes completely 
before we can accurately assess the meanings of rock formations. It seems 
unlikely that we will ever be able to de­velop methods for collecting evidence 
that will give us conclusive truths about the Earth's past. Astronomers and 
mineralogists were astounded and upset by the rocks our astronauts scooped up 
ofi the surface of the moon, because they indicated that the moon was four 
billion years old or even older, and it may be even older than the Earth itself. 
Some astronomers had been pushing the theory that the moon was really just a 
chunk of the Earth that had been scooped out of the Pacific Ocean area and 
tossed into space somehow. That theory and many others went down the drain when 
our first space module dropped on to the Sea of Tranquillity.
Geologists and paleontologists have developed reasonable evi­dence that the 
Earth has passed through several glacial periods, or ice ages. These seem to be 
cyclic, with minor ice ages occurring every twelve thousand years or so and with 
major glacial periods taking place over longer periods. These ice ages suggest a 
really major catastrophe - a sudden shift of the Earth's entire axis.
If you lived on the planet Uranus, the seventh planet from the sun, you would be 
exposed to a pseudo-ice age every 21.5 (Earth) years. Our knowledge of Uranus is 
admittedly flimsy, and when and if we ever manage to visit it we may find that 
many of the currently accepted facts about the planet are erroneous, just as our 
moon landings disproved many of the previously accepted facts about our own 
satellite. In any case, the best astronomical information indi­cates that Uranus 
has a very wobbly axis and that it flips over about four times for each of its 
circuits around the sun. (A Uranus year is 84 Earth years.) A resident living on 
a fixed point on Uranus would find himself shifting drastically away from or 
towards the sun every 21.5 years. If the planet were closer to the sun, these 
shifts could produce dramatic changes of climate.
It is possible that the Earth's orbital mechanics include similar fluctuations 
of the axis over longer periods. Scientists have figured out that there are 
minor climatic changes on Earth every 170 years due to minor axis shifts. The 
magnetic polarity of our planet is quite unstable. The magnetic South ^ole is 
not a fixed point but moves steadily in a two-hundred-mile circle. As already 
noted, the poles reverse themselves every few million years. Studies of the rock 
levels of the last Ice Age have produced evidence that major shifts of the 
Earth's crust or the planet's entire axis occur every 12,000 years or
so. Such shifts would change the climate completely; frigid areas would suddenly 
be in the tropic zones, water would inundate land areas, and of course, all life 
would be affected. Sea shells and fossils have been found in the heart of the 
Sahara desert, indicating that it was once covered with water.
In a stimulating article in the Saturday Evening Post of January 16th, I960, 
zoologist Ivan T. Sanderson documented the amazing results of one of these 
planetary inversions. Prehistoric mammoths found preserved in the frozen muck of 
Siberia had mouthfuls of un-swaltowed plants, as though they had been quick 
frozen while munching happily on their feeding grounds. Sanderson pointed out 
that the only way these animals would have been so splendidly pre­served was to 
have been exposed to an incredible drop in tempera­ture. TMs could have occurred 
in several ways, he pointed out cautiously. The earth's crust could have shifted 
very suddenly, carrying the animals farther north very rapidly, the entire axis 
could have tocked over, or some cloud of frigid gases from space could have 
suddenly engulfed the entire planet. Whatever the case, the discovery of these 
animal carcasses is solid evidence that some unexplained calamity took place 
with fierce suddenness thousands of years ago.
Decades earlier an Austrian mining engineer named Hass Horbiger had developed a 
fanciful theory to explain the Earth's early history. He envisioned huge spheres 
of ice crashing into the planet and talked of captive moons, which predate our 
present moon, entering retrograde orbits, their gravity tearing up our seas and 
reshaping the Earth's surface. His eight-hundred page Glazial Rosmogonie, 
published in 1913, enraged the astronomers and scientists of Germany and 
Austria. The late Willy Ley, the German rocket authority and science writer 
summed it up when he said. To pick flaws in this theory is about as easy - and 
as pleasant - as gathering Japanese beetles from an infested flower bed.'
But Horbiger found a pow'erful ally, another Austrian named Adolf Hitler. In 
1925 Horbiger delivered this ultimatum to the scientific world:
The time has come for you to choose - whether to be with us or against us. While 
Hitler is cleaning up politics, Hans Horbiger will sweep out of the way the 
bogus sciences. The doctrine of eternal ice will be a sign of the regeneration 
of the German people. Bewarel Come over to our side before it is too late!
Powerful backers materialized, and Horbiger set up offices and
recruiting campaigns for his doctrine of eternal ice - Wei fWef-teislehre). His 
scientific critics were soon subjected to horrifying har-assmeat and cringed in 
terror as Wei took on all the dimensions and power of a poetical party. Every 
good Nazi had to declare, 1 swear that I believe in the doctrine of the eternal 
ice.'
With the disintegration of Nazi Germany Wei also seemed to melt away. But 
recently Horbiger's concepts were resurrected by Pauwels and Bergier in The Dawn 
of Magic. There have been four geological epochs," they state flatly, 'because 
there have been four moons.' The earlier epochs were influenced by gravitational 
changes and factors which produced giant animals and plants,'… and in a world 
peopled by monsters there appeared this first man of immense size bearing also 
no resemblance to us and possessed of a different kind of intelligence.' Cosmic 
rays became stronger in those days, they tell us, and produced a vulgar 
mutation. Survivors of this race of giants overlapped into the modern epoch and 
are mentioned in the folklore of many races, usually being described as evil and 
vio­lent characters.
One of Horbiger's disciples was Hans Bellamy, who sifted myth and legend to find 
farther proof for the doctrine of eternal ice. It is not unusual that the Wei 
believers turned to the Atlantis literature and found in it some of the evidence 
they sought. The Atlantophiles had also scoured folklore and uncovered 
innumerable references to earlier global disasters.
Although scientists sneer at the use of myths as evidence, it is obvious that 
all the isolated races of mankind managed to preserve the same kind of stories. 
Of all the bits and pieces assembled from these ancient tales, the most common 
is the universal account of a great flood which occurred simultaneously over the 
entire planet (if the assorted legends have been dated correctly). Many Indian 
tribes in the Americas have myths about arks and Noah-like personalities who 
survived the flood. If we take these things at their face value, we can assume 
that the Earth did experience a phenomenal rising of the waters in fairly recent 
times, that a large part of the land sur­faces were inundated, and that some 
human beings escaped because they had been warned in advance and had fled to 
high places or had constructed ships which were sufficiently seaworthy to 
withstand the torrents.
The flood legends form the cornerstone of the Atlantis myth. A colourful 
politician named Ignatius Donnelly was responsible for the revival of interest 
in AOanris in the late nineteenth century. He collected hundreds of fragments of 
archaeological erratics and wrote
a number of best selling books. He also managed to find time to serve as a U.S. 
congressman and state senator and even ran for vice-president on the Populist 
ticket in 1901. Donnelly's Atlantis: The Antediluvian World is still in print 
and makes some sense, even though it fails to prove the existence of Atlantis. 
It does prove that other civilizations existed before the present epoch. 
Donnelly also advocated a theory claiming that a visiting comet had upset the 
balance of the Earth in earlier times and produced catastrophic effects. 
Hdrbiger carried the theory several steps further.
Comets have always served as a kind of scientific catchall. Al­though we 
actually know very little about these celestial objects (since we've never 
managed to catch one), astronomers like to be­lieve that these fireballs are 
made of ice and that the huge chunks of ice that have crashed out of the sky for 
centuries were really from the tails of comets. In recent years many prominent 
scientists have seriously explained flying saucers as being the debris from 
comets* tails. During the UFO flap of 1966 the late Senator Robert F. Ken­nedy 
sent out form letters stating that, 'One explanation of this phenomenon connects 
the lights that are seen with the gaseous tails of comets.'
If a comet ever did strike the Earth, it might make life here rather 
uncomfortable. Scientists have estimated that if a solid meteorite only a mile 
in diameter should strike the planet intact, the impact and concussion could 
destroy a large part - or all - of life here. There are a number of large meteor 
craters, all very ancient, which prove that such collisions have taken place.
Ancient civilizations could have been destroyed by any one of these potential 
catastrophes as well as such things as enormous earthquakes and volcanic 
eruptions. Our planet is really unstable. Mountains are always blowing up. The 
crast is constantly shifting, generating earthquakes which take a frightening 
toll in lives and property every year. Rivers overflow and floods occur with 
appalling regularity. Enigmatic fireballs can sweep down oat of the sky 
sud­denly and unexpectedly and burn up whole cities like Chicago.
On top of all these hazards, we have the most dangerous factor -man himself. He 
has made war an economic and political necessity. The ruins of the Middle Hast 
and Europe stand as testimony to his ability to destroy whole civilizations by 
himself without any outside help.
Among the traditions of the Hopi Indians is the story of Kuskurza. the third 
world or epoch, which lay 'in the east' (Atlantis again!). They developed flying 
machines called patuwn>otast according to
Frank Waters in his Book of the Hopi: 'Some of them made a patu-wvota, and with 
their creative power made it fly though the air. On this many of the people flew 
to a big dty, attacked it, and returned so fast no one knew where they came 
from. Soon the people of many cities and countries were making patuwvotas and 
flying on them to attack one another. So corruption and war came to the Third 
World as it had to the other.*
With present day inflation, theories are the cheapest commodity around, costing 
less than a penny a gross. It is better to stick with the available facts. Those 
facts are that one or more civilizations preceded early man and left behind 
magnificent megaliths as proof of their artistic and engineering abilities. 
Something destroyed those civilizations, or perhaps they destroyed themselves. 
Great civi­lizations have risen and died within the past two thousand years 
alone. Our own civilization may be following the same unhappy route, and two 
thousand years from now the Earth may again flip over on its axis. Great sheets 
of ice may bury the rubble of our cities. Silt and stones will wash over our 
towers and fortresses. And some­where a handful of beings, reduced to savagery 
by necessity, will tell tales around their camp fires about us and how we even 
dared to reach for the moon. Thousands of years after that, a new breed of 
anthropologist will collect those tales and scoff, even though all the tribes 
from all parts of the planet will have the same tales to tell. It is plainly 
impossible, those scientists will say, that any super civi­lization could have 
existed in prehistoric times. And primitive man could hardly have flown to the 
moon. It is folly to even listen to such nonsense. It's far more fruitful to 
measure and study those giant faces carved into Mount Rushmore… faces that are 
obviously rep­licas of ancient gods. Probably they were carved by the same 
primi­tives who erected that great ring of stones in the British Isles, they 
will observe sagely.
Mankind is like a broken record repeating the same refrain over and over again.
CHAPTER SEVEN
SCIENTISTS IN COLLISION
In 1950 a new meteor raced across the horizon, spewing a long trail of crisp 
ideas that left the scientific establishment sputtering in rage. The meteor was 
a book dealing with history, astronomy, and archae. ology. It was written by a 
psychiatrist and published by a major Madison Avenue bouse. Science editors and 
book reviewers across the country greeted it with awe, comparing its author with 
Galileo, Newton, Darwin, and Einstein. The public responded by making the book a 
best seller. It was titled Worlds in Collision and written by Dr Immanuel 
Velikovsky.
Dr Velikovsky tore at the delicate underpinnings of modern science, applying 
excessive scholarship to the problems of how the planets were formed and what 
forces may have wrought changes in the Earth. Along the way he was obliged to 
invent new theories based upon the flimsy (by scientific standards) evidence of 
mytho­logy. He dared to throw out some of science's most coveted con­cepts, 
substituting Ms own cosmology.
The explosion followed almost immediately. The biggest names in astronomy and 
physics organized and fulminated. They set out to destroy this upstart by 
flooding his, publisher's office with vicious letters threatening to boycott the 
firm unless Velikovsky's book was withdrawn. Since the publisher also had a 
profitable sideline of text­books and was heavily dependent upon the academic 
community for support, this ugly campaign had some effect. An assistant editor 
who had first suggested publishing the book was fired, and pub­lication rights 
were turned over to another publisher who did not have a textbook business.
Leading scientists gave public lectures denouncing Velikovsky. The scientific 
journals were filled with critical anti-Velikovsky letters and articles. It was 
modern science's darkest hour. There was a response which for intensity and 
hostility was unequalled in twentieth cen­tury scientific history,' the Los 
Angeles Times later noted.
What triggered this emotional outburst? Velikovsky's main theme was that the 
planet Venus was really a comet hurled out of the planet Jupiter. It had brushed 
part the Earth, he said, on its way into
orbit around the sun and had been observed by all the existing races and 
recorded in theL mythology.
Immanuel Velikovsky was born June 10th, 1895, in Vitebsk, Russia. He studied 
medicine and law at same of Europe's best uni­versities (he couldn't go to a 
Russian college because he was a Jew), received his medical degree in 1921, and 
settled in Palestine in 1924. He knew.Freud personally and corresponded with the 
great man in the last years of his life. In 1939 Velikovsky and his family moved 
to New York, intending to stay only eight months. But he was already toying with 
his theories, and he spent the next nine years in libraries conducting the 
exhaustive research which finally resulted in WOrids in Collision. Today he 
lives quietly in Princeton, New Jersey, rarely appearing in public. He has been 
more fortunate than Wegener and his continental drift theory in that Velikovsky 
has Eved to see his critics silenced and many of his seemingly far-out concepts 
confirmed.
Ever since the invention of the printing press, publishers have been flourishing 
on best selling books covering the whole spectrum of pseudoscience. Volumes of 
profound nonsense, such as the works on pyramidology and Atlantis, have sold in 
amazing numbers gener­ation after generation. Nearly every major publisher has 
books of astrology and flying saucers on his lists. A large part of the endless 
stream of theses, papers, and learned studies by establishment scien­tists has 
in time proven invalid and more crackpot than even the cultist literature. It 
was incredible that Velikovsky's contemporaries singled out his work - a book 
that had taken nine years of careful study and research - for their venom. In 
retrospect many of the anti-Velikovsky critiques read like the work of deranged 
lunatics who had not even bothered to read the book they were attempting to 
criti­cize. They were against the book simply because it propounded ideas that 
were contrary to the accepted theories of the day. They re­sented the fact that 
a psychiatrist dared to speculate on astronomy and archaeology. He was an 
intruder. Above all they resented the fact that his book was very well written 
(most scientists are mis­erable writers).
'If I had not been psychoanalytically trained, I would have had some harsh words 
to say to my critics,' Dr Velikovsky said loftily in the early 1950s.
Orthodox scientists have always sneered at the works of Charles Fort, an 
American humorist who published four books of oddities and scientific anomalies, 
primarily because Fort delighted in attack­ing the scientific establishment. Now 
they tried to lump Velikovsky
together with Fort. Scientists and the untutored followers of sden-tism spent 
years denigrating Velikovsky and generating the legend that be was just another 
crackpot, The ageing psychiatrist just ignored them and went on writing books 
expanding Ms central thesis.1 In a rare attempt at self-defence2 he stated that 
he hoped that future generations of scientists would understand his work more 
dearly. He wrote off his contemporary critics, and this prompted Martin Gardner 
to observe in 1952 that:
Dr Velikovsky is an almost perfect textbook example of the pseudoscientist - 
self-taught in the subjects about which he does most of his speculation, working 
in total isolation from fellow scientists, motivated by a strong compulsion to 
defend dogmas held for other than scientific reasons, and with an unshakable 
conviction in the revolutionary value of his work and the blind­ness of his 
critics.
One of the favourite points of the anti-Velikovsky critics was that he relied 
upon ancient myths and traditions for his evidence. Actu­ally, in Worlds in 
Collision, he devoted many pages to this problem. Since he was trying to 
reassemble events which transpired in pre­historic times (before the advent of 
written records), he was obliged to perform a comparative study of early 
legends. He recognized that the problem of interpreting such material correctly 
was monu­mental.
'Traditions about upheavals and catastrophes, found among all peoples,* he 
wrote, 'are generally discredited because of the short­sighted belief that no 
forces could have shaped the world in the' past that are not at work also at the 
present time, a belief that is the very foundation of modern geology and of the 
theory of evolution.'
Those were fighting words to the scientific establishment. Vel­ikovsky 
compounded his felony by suggesting that numerous events and catastrophes long 
accepted in religious lore as miracles and acts of God were in reality 
observations of astronomical phenomena which could be explained. This was 
totally unpalatable to the scientific community and to many others as well.
In 1950 the staid American Journal of Stience ranted that Vel-Ikovsky's book was 
'best described as burlesque of both science and history'. Seventeen years later 
Yale Scientific Magazine devoted an entire issue to vindicating the good doctor.
1 Among these are: Earth in Upheaval, Ages in Chaos, and Oedipus and Akhnatnn.
2 Harper's. June 1951.
What had happened in those seventeen years? For one thing, the Old Guard had 
changed to a degree, and many bright young men had emerged, clutching their 
slide rules as they rode the tails of man-made comets to Venus and Mars. For 
another, the stupefying and stultifying atmosphere of the McCarthy Era of the 
early 1950s had ended. Professor Lloyd Motz of Columbia University scented the 
tide of change, and in a letter in Harper's in October 1963. he cau­tiously 
admitted, 'I do not support Velikovsky's theory, but I do support his right to 
present his ideas and to have those ideas con­sidered by responsible scholars 
and scientists as the creation of a serious and dedicated investigator and not 
the concoctions of a charlatan seeking notoriety…'
Scientists and professors live in the uncomfortable atmosphere of the academic 
rule, Publish or Perish. They grind out interminable re­search papers and 
studies, not because they have something to say, but because their livelihood 
often depends upon their ability to put their names into print. This unfortunate 
system has spawned an army of men whose academic credentials are sound enough 
but who indulge in quasi research. Some even manage to acquire a con­siderable 
reputation by publishing a steady stream of unread books. Professor Mote's 
remark about 'the concoctions of a charlatan seek­ing notoriety1 is revealing, 
because scientists are painfully aware of the many charlatans in their own midst 
who thrive on such notori­ety. Over and over again in the past, leaders of the 
scientific com­munity have proven mere charlatans or, at best, competent 
organizers and administrators, while their less notorious con­temporaries made 
the real contributions to their field. This spills over of course into other 
fields such as literary criticism, where a man will write a critical essay of a 
famous author, and then others will write critical essays of the original 
critique. Soon the little liter­ary magazines are actually feeding upon 
themselves, and the profes­sors are quarrelling about their interpretations of 
said famous author.
Velikovsky became the most prominent victim of this system. If he had written a 
book about psychiatry {his own field) or sex and sold a million copies, no one 
would have cared. But when he invaded the turf of others, presented unpopular 
ideas in a logical and successful manner, and got the book published… well, he 
had gone too far. To the scientists of the 1950s he had to be a 'charlatan 
seeking notori­ety", like Herr Horbiger of another era, they chanted, 'Ether you 
believe in us, or you must be treated as an enemy.*
A decade later the main dish served at many a scientist's table was crow.
Astronomers were dead certain in 1950 that both Jupiter and Venus were elderly 
planets, and after much peering through their telescopes, they had constructed 
some fanciful facts about both bodies. These facts were taught, as usual, to 
generations of school students as. the gospel. Assorted studies had "proven* 
that the sur­face temperature of Venus was somewhere between 25° C, and 30° C 
making it a relatively cool planet and possibly an inhabitable one. Dr 
Velikovsky's theory was that Venus was actually an ex-comet and had been in 
solar orbit for only thirty-four centuries. If he was right, the surface of 
Venus would have to be considerably hotter.
In 1961 Dr Frank Drake and other radio astronomers turned their equipment on 
Venus and discovered that its temperature based upon its radio emissions was at 
least 600° F, or 315° C. later the United States and the Soviet Union sent 
unmanned space probes to Venus and confirmed that it was a mighty hot place and 
that there might be some source of surface heat other than solar radiation. 
Venus is the second planet from the sun after Mercury. Even the side turned away 
from the sun radiates considerable heat. Another interesting discovery was that 
Venus rotates slowly in a retrograde - that is, clockwise - direction and has 
movements, which are in sharp con­trast to the other planets in the solar 
system.* 'Maybe Venus was created apart from the other planets,' scientists at 
the Goldstone Tracking Station muttered in 1962, 'perhaps as a secondary solar 
explosion or perhaps in a collision of planets.'
There were other factors, such as the heavy hydrocarbon atmos­phere of the 
planet, which seemed to confirm Dr Velikovsky's 1950 speculations. Venus is 
definitely an oddball among the planets, but the astronomers of 1950 didn't know 
any of this.
Turning to the ancient records for his evidence, Dr Velikovsky pointed out that 
early peoples had recorded Venus as an excep­tionally bright object trailing 
smoke. The Chinese, Mayas, Toltecs, and Aztecs also recorded its motion… and the 
early Venus appar­ently followed a mtich different orbit, or trajectory, than 
the dim­inished orb now visible in our skies.
The people of Mesopotamia did not even record Venus in their astronomical 
records. Later the Chaldeans described it as a 'bright torch of heaven' that 
'illuminates like the sun* and 'fills the entire heaven*. Other far-flung 
cultures preserved similar comments, all of which suggest that Venus began as a 
comet which roared very close
* See 'Radat Observations of the Planets', Invin I. Shapiro, Scientific 
American. July 1968.
to the earth at one point - close enough perhaps to cause tidal waves and spew 
burring fragments on to the earth's surface.
Another part of Dr Velikovsky's evidence consisted of the stories of the 'rain 
of fire' which encompassed the earth, and he quoted from Mexican texts as well 
as the records of the Assyrians. If he was right then some of the oil deposits 
on earth were a result of that celestial shower. But geologists have always 
assumed that oil is cre­ated by a process which takes millions of years. Since 
Worlds in Collision was written, deposits of liquid hydrocarbons have been found 
and dated in the Gulf of Mexico and elsewhere, giving every indication they are 
only a few thousand years oldl
The ancient texts described the comet Venus as coming from the fifth planet, 
Jupiter. Was this possible? This was the flimsiest part of the Velikovsky 
theory, and the most widely attacked. Ironically, the very men who advocate the 
theory that tektites are the result of meteor impacts on the moon (Chapter Four) 
are the same ones who deny that a Jovian comet could come into being, perhaps by 
the same process. Velikovsky proposed a collision of planets as a possible 
source. The asteroid belt between Mars and Jupiter could be made up of surviving 
fragments from that awesome event Our ideas about Jupiter itself have been 
revised considerably since 1950. We used to think of it as a gigantic planetary 
body composed of gases and liquids, but in recent years powerful radio waves 
have been detected coming from it. Apparently, there are great electrical storms 
on the surface, and some of these storms affect earthly radio waves as much, or 
more so, than sunspots, Studies of all this have led to a new theory, now quite 
popular among astronomers, that Jupiter may not be a planet at all. It may be a 
cold star! Maybe one planet could not give birth to another, but a star, even a 
cold star, could.
Jupiter's diameter is approximately eleven times the diameter of the earth - 
about eighty-six thousand miles. As nearly as we can determine, it revolves very 
rapidly on its axis; a Jovian day is less than ten Earth hours long. Through the 
telescope it appears to be ringed with cloud-like bands, the most interesting 
feature of which is the famous red spot. This is an elliptical spot some forty 
thousand kilometers long and thirteen thousand kilometers wide - roughly equal 
in area to the entire surface of the Earth. This spot was first observed by 
Robert Hooke in 1664. Astronomers have been watching it ever since. It also 
rotates with the planet but at different speeds. And it always remains in 
approximately the same latitude, wander­ing only slightly.
Morris K Jessup and other ufologists have advanced the notion
that the ted spot is actually a great spaceship, a monumental Ark from outer 
space, which transported the survivors of some dying world into our solar 
system. Some modern flying saucer contactees even claim that the spacemen have 
taken them to Jupiter and shown them this Ark. Other contactees have been told 
stories about the ark by the spacemen. It is waiting for the day when the Earth 
will be evacuated by the kindly space people. Then we will all fly to the stars 
aboard it. Well, not all of us. Just those lucky humans who have been chosen by 
the space people. Several dry runs have already been held in recent years with 
the chosen contactees closing down their homes and businesses to sit on a hill 
or raountaintop and wait for the evacuation to begin. A number of these dry runs 
are docu­mented in the author's book, UFOs - Operation Trojati Horse. Ju­piter's 
Ark is an integral part of modern flying saucer lore.
Stanley Kubrick's epic motion picture, 2001, added to this lore by having 
astronauts head for Jupiter after a mysterious monolith was discovered on the 
moon. The monolith, a faceless grey slab, is used throughout the film as the 
symbol of some extraterrestrial force guiding man's destiny. In the dosing 
scenes of 2001, scenes which have thoroughly baffled many moviegoers, an 
astronaut arrives on , Jupiter only to enter into a new phase of evolution: a 
kind af rebirth. Shorn of its cinematic mysticism, the film is a restatement of 
what many cultists have been saying all along.
The flying saucer buffs have been misled by astronomical termin­ology. Although 
the red spot is usually termed an 'object', it could be almost anything. Bernard 
M. Peek, an amateur astronomer, called it a raft and suggested it could be some 
form of water floating like an iceberg in the Jovian atmosphere. Professor 
Raymond Hide, of the British Meteorological Office, proposed in Scientific 
American in Feb­ruary, 1968 that it could be the visible part of a phenomenon 
known as a Taylor column - a stagnant cylinder of liquid centred above some 
depression or topographical feature on the planet below. The late Frank Edwards, 
a radio news commentator and author of UFO books, poetically equated it with a 
giant eye always turned towards (he earth. Some followers of Velikovsky have 
asserted that the red spot is really the hole left behind when Venus was 
catapulted out into space.
In order for a body the size of Venus, which is only slightly smaller than the 
earth, to be successfully hurtled out of Jupiter, it would have to attain an 
incredible escape velocity to overcome the great mass and gravity of the planet. 
Achieving this velocity would require a tremendous amount of energy, or as 
Professor Motz put it3'… to
eject a planet like Venus, Jupiter would have had to release in a manner of 
seconds or minutes as much energy as the Sun emits in more than a year. Jupiter 
would therefore have appeared as bright as a nova [an exploding star], which is 
about a million times as luminous as the sun…'
Dr Velikovsky attempted to explain this by theorizing that a large mass on a 
near collision course with Saturn and Jupiter may have set the cosmic machinery 
in motion.
Whatever may have happened, Velikovsky's main premise is that Venus is a young 
planet. He predicted in 1950 that Venus would prove to be hot and that it would 
display orbital eccentricities. The claims have now been verified. He claimed 
that the ancient records stand as proof that Venus was not even present in the 
skies until fairly recent times, that it first appeared as a comet hauling a 
tail and followed a course somewhat different from its present one. Its passage 
through our solar system caused massive disturbances on earth and probably 
wholesale destruction. There are written records of those disturbances and 
archaeological and geological evidence of that destruction.
In relatively recent times Venus posed a new mystery. Today's astronomers agree 
that our sister planet has no moons. But a sat­ellite was observed orbiting 
Venus in 1672 by a prominent astrono­mer named CasdnL He saw it again in 1686. 
Other well known astronomers, using primitive but adequate instruments, sighted 
it in 1740, 1759, 1764, and 1791. They all noted that it seemed to be about one 
fourth the size of Venus itself (giving it a diameter of two thousand miles) and 
that it was very bright, almost luminous. It's very hard to lose something two 
thousand miles across… even in space. But no astronomer has seen this object 
since 1791. Hying saucer cultists have taken Venus* vanishing satellite to their 
bosom, claiming naturally that it was really a gigantic spacecraft But the 
object's extreme luminosity could mean that it was a fragment of the Venus comet 
itself, following a retrograde orbit which eventually sent it into the planet's 
surface.
We have followed a long and bizarre trail from the ancient rumours of massive 
catastrophes to the Atlantis-bound theories of Donnelly to the Ice Age notions 
of Horbiger's Wei and finally to the carefully researched and thought-out 
conclusions of Dr Immanuel Velikovsky and his still controversial concept of 
colliding worlds, These men and their many followers were probably mostly wrong… 
but there is always a chance that they might also be partially right. While 
their peers and colleagues have fumed, fussed^ fought.
ridiculed, and attacked their body syntheses, a new generation of scientists has 
steadily uncovered substantial scientific evidence which seems to support them. 
New theorists will undoubtedly seize upon this new evidence and construct 
concepts which will make them seem pikers.
We are beginning to realize that the Earth's crust is in constant motion, that 
the continents are adrift. The whole planet may flip-flop on its axis every few 
thousand years, causing water to bury land areas, bringing new land areas to the 
surface, and thrusting tem­perate zones into the Arctic cold to be smothered by 
ice. And if we can accept Velikovsky, our little mudball is running the constant 
hazard of encountering objects and forces in space which can wreak unbelievable 
havoc in hours or days. The moon could even fall on us one day, or the sun could 
suddenly explode. Our whole technological civilization could be wiped out in a 
flash.
It would not be too surprising, therefore.if other great civilizations might 
have flourished on this planet many thousands of years ago. Other great races, 
not necessarily linked to us biologically, could have existed here. The 
supergiants of Pauwels and Bergier could have been real. All that has survived 
of that ancient race are the puzzling stone monoliths and the great mounds and 
ridges. It was a logical step for a super-civilization to move from the 
construction of mounds and earth-works to the building of the more permanent 
pyramids of Egypt, China, and South America. Their culture, or rem­nants of it, 
survived and were imitated by early man. For thousands of years superb 
stonemasons laboured all over this planet, erecting pyramids, then temples, then 
great cities. Our sciences have timidly attempted to reconstruct the history of 
the past three or four thou­sand years, never daring to look beyond. And woe to 
anyone - such as Velikovsky - who does dare.
PART TWO
If the religious projections of man correspond to a reality that is 
sapecfaoitoan and supernatural, tfeen ft seems logical to look fcr
CHAPTER EIGHT
MIMICS OF MAN
The animal world is filled with incongruous redundancies. There are insects that 
resemble twigs and sticks, fish that look like harmless underwater plants, 
animals that appear to be rocks and ferns. Some non-poisonous snakes imitate the 
colouring and appearance ol their deadlier cousins. Numerous tasty insects 
discourage their enemies by imitating poisonous centipedes and scorpions. The 
animal and insect world is thronging with fakers and imitators and cunning 
masters of camouflage. One insect is so cleverly disguised that it can march 
along with formations of fierce army ants unnoticed. It even imitates the scent 
of the anny ants.
Man, the most vicious and wanton killer of the animal world and the natural 
enemy of all wild things, has his imitators, too. Overt contacts between man and 
paraman have numbered in the millions throughout history. Legend and lore are 
rich with such incidents of contact. Our great religions are founded upon 
encounters with angels and demons. The annals of psychic phenomena are filled 
with accounts of seemingly chance meetings with these ultraterrestrials. Some of 
them seem dull and inconsequential and even easily explain­able; others are 
witnessed by groups of reliable people and produce testimony that would have 
been written by a drunken science fiction author.
'Living among us undetected may be creatures (not necessarily alien) with all 
the outward appearances of human beings,' urologist Alex Saunders wrote in Quest 
magazine. October 1969. The mimic would of necessity be a "lone wolf", likely 
living in a large, bustling city where the eccentric and the odd may flourish 
unhindered. For it is a curious fart of nature that that which is in plain view 
is often best hidden.*
Another famous ufologist, Ainte Michel, has also commented on these mysterious 
mimics. "Certain cases have been checked and found to be perfectly authentic. 
But they are so absurd (because they are mimetic) that folk donot dare to talk 
about them. Nouseful research can ever be done so long as absurdity produces 
complexes in us.'1
1 The Humatwüs. Neville Spearman.
Early man was very aware of the existence of these mimics and tended to separate 
them into two groups - gods and demons. All religions have always warned their 
followers to be cautious of false angels and demigods. The Bible repeatedly 
discusses these entities and their influence upon man, always describing them as 
humanlike beings usually travelling in threes and possessing remarkable 
super­human powers.
"Be not forgetful to entertain strangers, for thereby some have entertained 
angels unawares,' we are warned in Hebrews 13:2.
Three men, usually of Oriental countenance and dressed in sombre black clothing, 
play important roles in both flying saucer and re­ligious lore. For years the 
(lying saucer researchers who encountered these Men In Black (MIB) believed they 
were secret agents of the CIA seat to harass them. These MIB have been seen most 
often riding about in large black automobiles, usually Cadillacs, and they have 
engaged in frightening tactics, harassing amateur UFO sleuths. There are 
hundreds of reports from all over the world in which these mysterious gentlemen 
have approached UFO witnesses and inves­tigators, warning, even threatening, 
them to be silent about what they had seen. Since these entities and their big 
black automobiles have an uncanny talent for disappearing into thin air, 
investigators examining the stories of their victims have tended to dismiss such 
accounts as lies and hallucinations. Then, as has happened in so many cases, 
when these sceptical investigators had MIB encounters of their own, they have 
panicked in confusion. There has been an appalling number of sudden deaths, 
suicides, and nervous break­downs among UFO investigators in the past twenty 
years.
On the religious level these same MIB, answering the same de­scriptions of the 
UFO harassers, have always been regarded as1 agents of the devil - or the devil 
himself. The antics of these characters have kept the devil myth ah' ve into 
modern times, and there are still numerous religious cults hopelessly engaged in 
battling and trying to outwit them… but they alwaysmanage tostayone jump ahead 
of their pursuers. Most of their deeds and manipulations appear to be nothing 
more than mischievous games.
The activities of these parahumans are largely confined to specific areas of 
this planet, where they appear and reappear century after century. The angels 
keep their ancient places," poet Francis Thomp­son wrote. Thus there are many 
'haunted' places all over the world, shunned by andent man or made sacred by 
him. These are precise geographical locations, and anyone digging into the 
history and lore of such locations will find thousands of accounts of ghosts.
demons, monsters, and flying saucers pinpointed within a few square miles and 
covering a thousand years or more of time. To UFO cultists such places are 
Windows: entry points for spaceships front some distant planet. Occultists teach 
that these are Gateways: weak spots in the Earth's etheric envelope through 
which beings from other space-time continuums seep through into our reality. • 
Sussex County in England is one Gateway, as are the Mississippi Valley, the Ohio 
Valley, and parts of our western states, such as the area around Frescott, 
Arizona. There are literally thousands of these weak spots all over our planet. 
Paranormal and supernatural activi­ties in these areas seem to be controlled by 
complicated cyclic factors. Periodically, all hell breaks loose in all these 
places simul­taneously, and then we have a flap, or wave, of UFO sightings, 
ap­paritions, poltergeists, sudden inexplicable disappearances of animals and 
human beings, mysterious fires, and even a form of mass madness.
Researchers are only now beginning to untangle the cycles in­volved. For some 
unknown reason a high proportion of all these activities seems to occur on 
Wednesday and on the twenty-fourth of the month. This has been a stable factor 
throughout history. The biblical prophet Zachariah reported (Zachariah 1:7) an 
angelic visitation Upon the four and twentieth day of the eleventh month', circa 
520 b.c. The most famous flying saucer sighting of modern times, that of private 
pilot Kenneth Arnold near Mount Ranier in Washington, occurred on June 24, 1947. 
Note that many of the events discussed throughout this book took place on the 
twenty-fourth of the month.
Paranormal events also seem to duster around the tenth of the month- Early 
peoples were aware of these factors and linked them with the phases of the moon. 
They thought the full moon influenced human behaviour and produced lunacy. 
Appearances of DFOs and assorted apparitions do seem to increase during specific 
periods of the lunar cycle, and as noted in Chapter Two, the human mind does 
seem to be involved. Many of these things have been carelessly dis­missed as 
hallucinations because only certain people can see these things at certain 
times. However, a great many factors are involved. Recent studies indicate that 
persons of high psychic potential, who experience prophetic dreams and flashes 
of extrasensory perception (ESP), are more prone to see these things than people 
with little or no psychic ability. Polls and tests conducted over the past 
century by assorted scientists indicate that about one third of the population 
possesses active or latent psychic abilities, They constitute our main
body of TOO witnesses. The other two thirds have never had any personal 
experiences of tins sort and so. naturally enough, dismiss afl of this as utter 
rubbish.
Two independent statistical studies of available UFO reports were conducted in 
1970 and confirmed that the highest number of UFO sightings took place on 
Wednesdays. An amateur group, the Am­erican Flying Saucer Investigating 
Committee of Columbus, Ohio, ran a study of 929 UFO reports from the year 1968 
and found that Wednesdays produced the greatest number - 152. A more elaborate 
professional computer study of 7,025 sightings from tie years 1921 to 1969 was 
carried out by Dr. David Saunders of Colorado University. He too found that the 
greatest number of sightings (1,077) occurred on Wednesdays. The lowest number 
in the Ohio study was 117 for Sundays; the lowest number in the Saunder's study 
was 903 for Saturdays. Although these are only pilot studies and much more work 
along this line will be necessary before any definite conclusions can be 
reached, it is obvious that these things are not random and sporadic but are 
governed by a definite time cycle of some sort. Factors of coincidence, innocent 
errors, misinterpretations of ordi­nary aircraft and mundane natural phenomenon, 
weather balloons, and so on must be filtered out.
Another computer study of twelve hundred anomalies and unusual occurrences, 
sifted from the works of Charles Fort, was recently carried out by C. L Mallows 
of the Bell Telephone Laboratories. Here it was found that a broader cycle of 
9.6 years was seemingly involved. The conclusion is inescapable that these 
cycles of activity, which pass through our world like radio waves of enormous 
length, must have a common cause,' Damon Knight explained in his book, Charles 
Fort: Prophet of the Unexplained. The cause of the cycles, the controlling force 
that keeps them in synchrony, must lie outside the earth.'
The Bell study includes such diversified phenomena as sky falls (odd objects 
dropping out of the sky) unusual storms (rains of frogs, etc.), things observed 
in space, and things seen in the sky. All of these phenomena tended to duster - 
to occur simultaneously in specific months and specific years. The waves or 
cycles of these events were repeated approximately every 9.6 years. The study 
dealt largely with data from the nineteenth century.
Ancient magicians and seers were quite familiar with these cyclic factors. The 
earnest religious and occult lore discusses rays which periodically sweep our 
planet from some extraterrestrial source and cause everything from miracles to 
sadness and catastrophes.
Strangely, the Australian Aborigines, the South American Indians, and the tribes 
of Africa, as well as the ancient Babylonians and other early cultures, all 
pinpointed the Pleiades (a cluster of seven stars), and the constellation of 
Orion as that source of these rays. Rays from outer space are an integral part: 
of all human folklore.
In time all of these intangibles will be puttied down by courageous scientific 
investigators (studies of this kind are still very unpopular among scientists). 
Already we know (or have relearned) that all paranormal manifestations have a 
tendency to occur in the same places year after year; that they follow specific 
patterns within our own time scale; that only specific people can witness or 
become involved in these events. The logical jumping off place for any future 
investigation is to study the witnesses in depth and to explore these Gateways 
carefully and methodically. Small groups of psychiatrists, para-psychologist, 
geologists, and physicists are now engaged in studies of this type.
One significant factor, which is hardly a secret to the occultists, is that the 
Window areas tend to be places where peculiar magnetic faults exist. Our haunted 
planet is covered with magnetic faults, and interestingly enough, many of them 
are grouped around the ancient mounds, temple sites, and spots where flying 
saucers are seen most frequently. Psychically oriented people living in these 
regions tend to have extraordinary experiences with elementaJs, angels, MIB, and 
spacemen (numerous examples will be given further on).
A leading authority on mythology and mysticism, poet Robert Graves, recently 
stated: There are some sacred places made so by the radiation created by 
magnetic ores. My village, for example, is a kind of natural amphitheatre 
enclosed by mountains containing iron ore, which makes a magnetic field. Most 
holy places in the world -holy not by some accident, like a hero dying or being 
born there -are o£ this sort. Delphi was a heavily charged holy place.*
Back in the Middle Ages the Vatican pointedly ordered that new churches should 
be constructed on the sites of old temples whenever possible. The tradition of 
sacred places runs deep and seems to be largely based upon the continuous 
observations of paranormal mani­festations. The entities who allegedly 
approached human beings in miraculous events frequently ordered a church or 
temple to be built on^Jie spot. But we didn't need an order to erect tie great 
churches at Lourdes and Fatima after the entities appeared there. Remember the 
legendary nineteen-year cycle of Stonehenge, when the god was supposed to 
appear? Multiply the Fortean cycle of 9.6 years by 2.
A magnetic survey of the United States was carried out by the
government in the 1950s. Maps detailing magnetic variations in nearly every 
state can be obtained from the Office of Geological Survey in Washington. 
Comparisons of the concentrations of para­normal manifestations with these maps 
show unique clusters around the magnetic aberrations. Could it be that periodic 
sweeps of those rays from outer space set up some kind of physical or psychic 
reac­tions in these fault areas? This is a question that could be answered 
scientifically, if only someone would put up the money, equipment, and personnel 
to make a study.
We are only reobserving the things which awed early man and inspired his 
superstitions and beliefs. Electro-magnetic energy plays a key role in these 
manifestations. We are still learning about it. Our planet may be constantly 
interchanging energy with some outside force. This exchange of energy is an 
important part of occult belief. It occurs we are told, on every level. Chinese 
philosophers of long ago contended that man was moon food (i.e., the energy of 
indi­vidual souls was drained off and absorbed by some extraterrestrial force 
which needed such energy to replenish itself). Later, theo­logians extended this 
to form the classic explanation that we were the subjects of a war between God 
and the Devil… a war to win the souls of man and thereby control the planet. 
Thus, the demons and MIB who appeared in earlier times were supposed to have 
been after souls. They made lavish promises, according to the records, and 
offered fanciful philosophies and cosmologies, but as Sweden-borg figured out, 
they always proved to be nothing but splendid liars.
Early investigators and thinkers soon realized they were dealing with magical 
beings who could imitate man and his works. Instead of being solid physically 
stable assemblages of cells and matter, these entities were apparently temporary 
manipulations of energy. So the word 'transmogrification' was used to describe 
them. These transmogrifications, according to the lore, could assume any form… 
from a wolf or a cat to a house, ship or iridescent god of awe­some proportions. 
They could appear clothed in rags or in gold crowns and expensive velvet robes. 
Worst of all, they had a penchant for playing all kinds of games with us, 
manipulating our fears and beliefs and even conning us into going to war against 
each other.
One alarming facet of their countless messages to percipients and contactees is 
their preoccupation with spreading racist propaganda. The messages recorded 
throughout history are filled with such propaganda. If the percipient was an 
Indian, the propaganda was aimed at a nearby tribe. If he was Hindu, it was 
directed at the
Moslems. The elementals are purveyors of bate, and perhaps much of the racial 
prejudice blighting the human race was originally the product of their 
teachings.
Even those wonderful space people and Brothers from other planets manage to play 
this game. Long John Nebel, a New York radio personality, has spent thousands of 
hours interviewing con-tactees and UFO burls on the air over WNBC and in his 
book. Way Out World, he offers this comment:
A bit that has always bugged me is the racist propaganda which keeps cropping up 
from one group to another. In this area, regrettably, I'm unable to name names 
and cite occasions, since the allusions are always so carefully phrased so that 
the offenders could easily deny the intentions of their remarks. But the meaning 
is there, never doubt it. As is usually the case, the unfavoured parties 
racially speaking are the Jews and Negroes, and the themes of both Fascism and 
Communism seem to echo from behind the scenes on more than a few occasions. But 
it's all part of the action.
Some contactees who claimed to have visited Mars blandly point out that the 
planet is divided into zones with the Negro and Jewish Martians carefully 
segregated from the others.
Even contactees of liberal persuasions repeat with some dismay the nastily 
racist remarks of the Venusians. The Jews are a favourite target of this outer 
space propaganda, as if they haven't got enough trouble already.
Until the past five or six years racial prejudice was actually a basic part of 
all the Western religions. After digging down to the source of these racist 
beliefs, there are always the ancient teachings of dubious messengers. They have 
kept the human race stirred up and at each other's throats for thousands of 
years. Now finally the Catholics are beginning to soften their traditional 
anti-Semitism, and the Mormons are beginning to face the fact that Negroes ate 
also human beings.
Aside from their inveterate racism, the mimics are also fond of exploiting tense 
political situations. A band of phantom Indians plagued the settlers of 
Gloucester. Massachusetts, back in 1692. They appeared night after night, 
skirmishing with the English and firing bulletless guns. Although the Indians 
never killed or scalped anyone, the colonists were understandably upset and 
heavily fortified their positions, the English became convinced that they
were not real Indians,* Sir Walter Scott reported, 'but that the devil and his 
agents had assumed such an appearance.'
The North American Indians have innumerable legends about an entity they called 
the Trickster because he would turn up occasion­ally and play wild and vicious 
pranks.
Earth's phantom inhabitants play many other roles, especially in the widely 
accepted sphere of psychic phenomena. Telly Savalas, the famous character actor, 
told Hollywood reporter Dick Kleiner a weird story involving a black Cadillac. 
It happened when Savalas was young and flat broke. His car ran out of gas on 
Long Island, and after he started walking, a black Cadillac 'seemed to appear 
from nowhere', and the driver offered him a lift. The driver was dressed 
entirely in white - a refreshing switch - and said very little. But at one point 
he offered Savalas a dollar to buy some gas. The actor insisted that the nun 
write down his name and address on a slip of paper so he could be repaid. They 
found a gas station, and the driver waited while Savalas bought a can of 
gasoline. Then they drove back to his own car in silence.
1 know Harry Agannis,' the driver said suddenly. Savalas asked who Harry Agannis 
was. 'He's a utility infielder on the Boston Red Sox,' the man answered. That 
was the end of the conversation.
The man waited while Savalas poured the gasoline into the car, gave him a push 
to get him started, and then drove off with a wave. The next day Savalas was 
shaken by newspaper headlines announc­ing the sudden death of Harry Agannis. He 
decided to call the phone number on the slip of paper given to him by the man in 
the white suit. It was in Massachusetts, and a woman answered. Savalas told her 
he wanted to speak to Bill, the name on the paper, There was a pause, and 
another woman came on the lire.
1 fust met Bill last night,' Savalas began, "and something hap­pened, and I 
wanted—'
"You met him last night?* she interrupted, choking on sudden tears. Then she 
told him that her husband Bill had been dead for three years. Later she met with 
Savalas in New York and told him that her husband had been buried in a white 
suit. She showed him the last letter her husband had written, and ha was 
startled to see that the handwriting exactly matched the handwriting on the slip 
of paper given him by the Cadillac driver.
The whole fabric of psychic belief is woven from such stories, which number in 
the many thousands and are accepted by millions as proof of survival after 
death. But investigators informed in the antics of the ultraterrestrial mimics 
are obliged to look deeper.
These entities labour to cultivate belief in various frames of refer­ence, and 
then they deliberately create new manifestations which support those beliefs. 
Savalas rode in a physically real Cadillac and spoke with a seemingly real man. 
If the incident was only a joke of some land, it was a very complicated and 
pointless one.
Phantom campers, vehicles with built-on trailers, have been widely reported in 
the western states in recent years. And we have reports of phantom airplanes and 
helicopters by the hundreds. In the 1930s thousands of people in northern Europe 
saw formations of mysterious aeroplanes over Norway, Sweden and Finland. Despite 
extensive searches by the military forces of several countries, the source of 
these ghost fliers, as they were called, was never deter­mined.* During World 
War n military intelligence groups collected a number of phantom aeroplane 
sightings from pilots returning from missions. Crews of several bombers from the 
Ninety-Second Group reported the following over Germany:
Four P-47s, thought to be friendly American aircraft flown by the enemy, were 
observed on the approach to the initial Point at 22,000 feet, heading 120° 
magnetic. These aircraft flew out to the side and parallel with the combat wing 
formation in the manner of fighter escort. They suddenly executed a 90° turn in 
towards the head of the combat wing formation. These aircraft were orig­inally 
at 800 yards on port beam. They approached to 300 yards, when they nosed up and 
away, showing a full-plan view of them­selves. Positive identification is 
claimed. The aircraft had brown fuselages, and the wings were a very dark 
colour, almost black. No white cowling and no white tail markings were observed. 
No insignia was observed, and the aircraft did not open fire. Several B-17s 
fired on them. The last P-47 escort had long since departed, and the enemy 
aircraft had been attacking for some time at this point.
The opening theory expressed in this intelligence report - "Four P-47s, thought 
to be friendly American aircraft flown by the enemy' -was proven invalid. The 
mystery planes did not fire at the American bombers, but were fired on instead. 
If the Germans had attempted such a ploy with captured aircraft, they certainly 
would have painted appropriate insignia on the planes. And after having 
suc­ceeded in getting within 300 yards of the bombers (which is very 2 For a 
full account of this interesting sequence of events see John A. Keel, 
VFOs-Operatitm Trojan Horse.
dose), the pilots, if they were German, would certainly have opened fire. 
Instead, they scooted away, never to be seen again.
Low-flying mystery aeroplanes reported in 1969-70 were most often described as 
resembling P-38s, the twin-engined, dual-fuselage fighters used in the Pacific 
in World War II. They were fast, noisy aircraft, but our mystery planes move 
very slowly and in complete silence. They execute impossible manoeuvres, such as 
sudden right angle turns, and disappear as mysteriously as they had come. Only 3 
handful of P-38s are still operational, and they were not the culprits in these 
cases. like the ghost fliers of 1934, they are a dull grey and violate all 
regulations by failing to show any licence numbers or insignia.
Could these phantom aircraft be part and parcel of the same phenomena which 
produce phantom automobiles and campers? Could they also be apparitions and 
transmogrifications of energy that can be properly categorized with the 
disappearing Indians of Gloucester? The evidence suggests that this could very 
well be the case.
In other ages flying ships were sometimes reported. Flying Saucer Review, 
May-June 1970, reprinted a fascinating story from 1743. A farmer near Peibio, 
Wales, claimed he had seen a flying sailboat that year. He estimated that it was 
about 1,500 feet in the air and could have been about ninety tons. The keel of 
the ship was plainly seen (thus ruling out mirages of ships far out to sea). 
Similar phenomena had been reported in the same area about ten years previous.
Fairy lore is also filled with alleged sightings of fairy ships com­plete with 
billowing sails.
Our problem is compounded by these amazing, confusing, and alas, scientifically 
inadmissible subjective observations. The UFO cults have solved this dilemma by 
simply throwing out this Idnd of material and concentrating only on those 
reports which describe circular of cigar-shaped objects. We must, however, 
consider all the forms reported with equal care if we are to arrive at any valid 
conclusions.
There is no way to investigate a flying saucer after it has flown. But it is 
possible to study the people who saw it and the terrain over which it appeared. 
If we are dealing with clever mimics and trans­mogrifications of energy and if 
man has been observing these things throughout his history, then the real clues 
may be found in the thousands of volumes in all languages describing those 
observation.; and encounters.
One basic fact should be obvious from the foregoing: these enti-
tics and things are not necessarily from some other planet. They are actually 
closely tied to the human race, are a part of out Immediate environment in some 
unfathomable fashion, and to a very large extent are primarily concerned with 
misleading us, misinforming us, and playing games with us. These mysterious 
members of the Well' sian Wings Over the World are oat benefactors and our 
enemies. They educate us and they torment us. They have given us hope, guided 
our religions and philosophies, and watched us crawl out of the cares and build 
rockets to the moon.
They may have watched other civilizations come and go. They may have sincerely 
helped us to preserve the memories of those lost ages and those past mistakes. 
Or it all may be rubbish, and we may be nothing more than the pawns with which 
they play their mis* chievous games. Theologians and philosophers have always 
been troubled by the nearly impossible task of sorting the real from the unreal, 
the truth from the false. Perhaps the only workable criterion is the ancient one 
of judging them by their works.
CHAPTER NINE
MEN-IN-BLACK LORE AND THE CIA
There is no truth to the rumours that the flying saucers are from Spain, or that 
they are piloted by Spaniards,' Gen. Carl Spaatz, Air Force Chief of Staff, told 
a press conference in 1948. This was an astonishing statement since a review of 
all the UFO literature and the fan magazines of the period has failed to uncover 
such a rumour. It suggests that .people must have been reporting slight, 
dark-com­plexioned pilots to the Air Force back in 1948, long before the UFO 
buffs started taking flying saucer occupant sightings seriously.
In his detailed report on the Maury Island UFO 'hoax' of 1947, Kenneth Arnold 
also describes meeting a small, dark foreign-looking man who was tinkering with 
the motor on a beat-up boat in Tacoma harbour. Ray Palmer, editor of Amazing 
Stories in Chicago, had commissioned Arnold to investigate the puzzling Maury 
Island affair, which began when a 'doughnut-shaped object' had rained 'slag' on 
to a boat near Maury Island. Pieces of that slag had killed a dog aboard the 
boat and slightly injured a boy, the son of Harold Dahl, who was piloting it. 
Early the next morning, according to DaH's story, a 1947 Bulck drove up to his 
home and a black-suited man of medium height visited him. This man, Dahl said, 
recited in detail everything that had happened the day before as if he had been 
there. Then he warned Dahl not to discuss his sighting with anyone, hinting that 
if he did there might be unpleasant repercussions which would affect him and his 
family. Since Dahl and the others had not yet told anyone of their sighting, and 
since UFOs were still publicly unknown {Arnold's sighting over Mount Rainer and 
the attendant publicity did not occur until three days later), 
Dahlwasnaturallynon-plussed by his strange visitor. This was the first modern 
MIB report.
Dahl's boss, Fred L. Crisman (he also owned the boat), became a central figure 
in the mystery. Dahl himself vanished soon after his interview with Arnold, and 
efforts by later investigators {such as Harold Wilkins, a British author) have 
failed to locate him. Crisman had been a flier in World War II, and he was 
suddenly recalkd into the service in 1947, flown to Alaska, and later stationed 
in Green­land, In recent years the amateur sleuths engaged in investigating
the alleged conspiracy to assassinate President John F. Kennedy have tried to 
implicate Crisman. District Attorney James Garrison of New Orleans subpoenaed 
one Fred Lee Crisman of Tracoma, Wash­ington, to testify before the Grand Jury 
listening to Garrison's evi­dence against Clay Shaw, according to wire service 
stories in November, 1963. Crisman was identified as a radio announcer, but 
Garrison's investigators implied that he was either a member of the CIA or had 
been 'engaged in undercover activity for a part of the industrial warfare 
complex'. He allegedly operated under a cover as a preacher and was 'engaged in 
work to help Gypsies'. These stories caused a chain reaction in UFO circles, 
since UFO believers have long accused the CIA of being somehow connected with 
the flying saucer mystery. Of course, the CIA was in its infancy in 1947 at the 
time of the Maury Island case and was then largely staffed by naval personnel 
from World War n intelligence units.
Clay Shaw was tried early in 1969, accused by Garrison of having conspired to 
murder President Kennedy. He was found innocent and freed. The exact nature of 
Crisman's testimony before the Grand Jury is not known. He did not testify at 
the actual trial.
When Ray Palmer, one of the best-informed urologists extant, summarized his own 
theories about the Maury Island mystery in the book he coauthored with Arnold, 
The Coming of the Saucers, he asked pointedly, "Was the Tacoma affair a hoax? 
Whose?*
In recent years many seemingly solid flying saucer cases have dis­solved in 
confusion under close investigation. Often they appear to be outrageous hoaxes 
perpetrated by some mysterious third party, although the general tendency is to 
blame the innocent witnesses. These bizarre hoaxes are often identical to the 
mischievous fairy hoaxes and games of an earlier epoch.
The Maury Island case fell apart in Arnold's hands. The slag samples given to 
him by Dahl and Crisman were switched by some­one; two investigating Air Force 
officers, Brown and Davidson, were killed when their plane crashed shortly after 
leaving Tacoma; Dahl vanished; Crisraan was literally exiled to Greenland for 
two years; Tacoma newsman Paul Lance, who helped Arnold in his inves­tigation, 
died suddenly a short time later. Palmer claims that a cigar box filled with 
original slag samples was stolen from his Chicago office soon afterwards.
At one point Ted Morello of the United Press took Arnold aside and told him:
You're involved in something that is beyond our power here to
find out anything about. *. We tried to find out information at McChord Field 
[the Tacoma Air Force base] and drew a Wade, and we have informants there who 
practically smell the runways for news… We've exhausted every avenue attempting 
to piece what has happened together so it makes some sense… I'm just going to 
give you some sound advice. Get out of this town until what> ever it is blows 
over.
Arnold &#9632;got into his private plane and headed for home. He stopped in Pendleton, 
Oregon, to refuel, and shortly after he took off again, Tüs engine stopped cold. 
Only quick thinking and expert flying saved him from a serious crash.
Despite the statements of General Spaatz and Kenneth Arnold in 1947-8, slight, 
dark-skinned men did not really begin to appear in published UFO reports until 
around 1954. (There were, however, descriptions of dark - or heavily suntanned - 
UFO occupants as far back as 1897.) The Men in Black phenomenon did not really 
grip the UFO field until the early 1950s.
A pioneer ufologist, Albert K. Bender of Bridgeport, Connecticut, gave the MIB 
mystery new impetus when he suddenly closed down his International Flying Saucer 
Bureau in 1953, vaguely hinting that three men in black suits had terrorized him 
into abandoning his research^ Other UFO researchers studied his guarded remarks 
and concluded that he had been pressured out of business by sinister agents of 
the government. Three years later Gray Barker, a UFO investigator in West 
Virginia, published They Knew Too Much about Flying Saucers, a book which dealt 
with numerous MIB stories from as far away as Mew Zealand. The Bender case was 
the cornerstone of Barker's theory that the MIB either represented some 
governmental authority employing 'questionable methods' to 'silence' UFO 
re­searchers, or that a more "fantastic sponsorship is responsible far their 
deeds'. Many of these dark-skinned. Oriental-featured gentle­men visited UFO 
witnesses wearing Air Force uniforms. This fact and tHe vast quantity of 
reported visits quickly led the UFO buffs to believe that their enemy was indeed 
the U.S. Air Force. Soon the UFO believers and their organizations were devoting 
most of their time, energy, and money to investigating the Air Force and, as the 
paranoia mounted, to investigating each other. The popular books of Donald E. 
Keyhoe, a retired Marine Corps pilot, were largely con­cerned with the alleged 
Air Force and governmental conspiracy to hide the truth about flying saucers 
from the public. Other UFO writers of the late 1950s followed Keyhoe's example, 
and this monu-
mental conspiracy became one of the main 'facts* of nfology.
Ten years after he suddenly withdrew from UFO research, Albeit K. Bender 
released his full story. Flying Saucers and the Three Men, which was privately 
published by Gray Barker. It proved to be far more unbelievable than any of the 
speculations. He claimed that he had been visited by dark-skinned gentlemen with 
glowing eyes, who materialized and demateriaUzed in his apartment. On one 
occasion, he said, he had been transported to a secret UFO base in Antarctica, 
where he had been told the secret. The UFOs were here to collect a rare and 
valuable element from the Earth's oceans. The project would be completed in the 
early 1960s, he was told, and then the flying saucers would leave our planet, 
and he would be tree to write about his experiences.
Bender's revelations made no sense to the UFO coterie, since few; of them were 
acquainted with demonology and the fairy myths of the Middle Ages. They did not 
realize that his purported experiences followed classic patterns. In addition to 
Ms interest in flying saucers. Bender had also been involved in a study of black 
magic, and black magic, as we shall soon see. has always been a major method for 
conjuring up elementals. He had been plagued by odours of sulphur and strange 
poltergeistic manifestations during the period of the visitations. He also 
suffered certain medical effects, such as chronic headaches and lapses of 
memory, which are common symptoms of the contactee syndrome. The UFO buffs 
quickly branded Bender a nut who was trying get rich from flying saucers 
(actually, his book sold only a few thousand copies to the UFO hardcore and made 
him the subject of considerable criticism and ridicule).
Countless MIB-type stories have now been collected and published by UFO 
investigators all over the world. Even the stuffy anti-UFO report of Colorado 
University, a study which had been com­missioned by the Air Force in 1967, 
discussed a few cases. Case Number 52 of the report occupies eighteen pages and 
discusses in detail the strange experiences of a Santa Ana, California highway 
inspector named Rex Heflin who took a series of Polaroid photo­graphs of a 
circular object near a Marine Corps air field on August 3rd, 1965. He had copies 
made of these pictures, fortunately, and turned over the originals to two men 
who claimed to represent the North American Air Defence Command (NORAD). Later 
NORAD officials emphatically denied that any of their personnel had visited 
Heflin, and the original photos have never been located.
Two years later, soon after scientists front Colorado University began their 
investigation of the Heflin case, he received another
group of strange visitors. They appeared at his home at dusk on Wednesday, 
October 11th, 1967, dressed in Air Force uniforms. Because of his earlier 
experience, Heflin inspected their credentials carefully and wrote dowa their 
names and other information. They questioned him about the photos and asked him 
if he knew anything about the Bermuda Triangle (an area where many planes and 
ships have vanished). 'During the questioning, the witness says he noted a car 
parked in the street with indistinct lettering on the front door,' the Colorado 
report states. 'In the back seat could be seen a figure and violet (not blue) 
glow, which the witness attributed to instru­ment dials. He believed he was 
being photographed or recorded In the meantime his FM multiples radio was 
playing in the living room and during the questioning it made several loud 
audible pops.*
Dr James E. McDonald, a meterologist from the University of Arizona, and other 
investigators later tried to check out the identity of these visitors. Again, 
they drew a complete blank. Despite their credentials and uniforms, these men 
were apparently imposters. Nu­merous other witness have also reported visits 
from men in big black cars, usually Cadillacs, with peculiar purplish glows 
lighting their interiors. There are even a number of witnesses who claim to have 
been temporarily kidnapped in such automobiles. They have de­scribed strange 
psychedelic lights on the dashboards which caused them to fall into hypnotic 
trances.
Some of these phantom vehicles have a special insignia printed on their doors - 
a triangle with a bolt of lightning passing through it. In other cases witnesses 
said the symbol was the classic triangle with an eye - the ancient symbol for 
the deity — and the MIB identified themselves as 'agents for the Nation of the 
Third Eye." Such stories are rarely given wide circulation and are almost never 
published. So it is quite interesting that so many far-flung witnesses manage to 
come up with the same identical details.
One of the first clues that a UFO flap was about to break on Long Island in the 
spring of 1967 was a series of random reports de­scribing strange Oriental or 
Gipsy-like entities parading across people's lawns in the middle of the night. 
One man living on an isolated farm near Melville, New York, said he saw a 
metallic disk hovering a few feet above one of his fields in broad daylight. A 
ladder was hanging down from it, he said, and as he watched, it was retraced 
into the object, and the whole thing flew off sound­lessly. A few days later he 
answered a knock on his door and was surprised to see a Gipsy lady standing 
there. She was dressed in a long grey gown and wore sandals. Her skin was a deep 
olivej and
her eyes had an Oriental cast. She was about 5 feet 4 Inches tall, and her hair 
was long and 'so black that it looked dyed*.
'I have travelled a long way,' she said in a low, accented voice. 'May I have a 
glass of water? I must take a pill.'
He gave her the water, and she took a round green pill, thanked him, and left. 
He was puzzled that there was no car in sight. He lived on an isolated back 
road, and visitors, especially visitors travelling by foot, are very rare.
'I have travelled a long way' is an old Masonic pass phrase and is frequently 
used in these contacts. Sometimes the simple phrase, "What time is it?" or "What 
is your time?" is substituted. The pill-taking ploy is also a common procedure. 
When a most peculiar being visited a family on Cape May, New Jersey, early in 
1967, be also took a pill. He too had 'travelled a long way*, and after 
conducting an inane interview with the family, he stepped into the night, got 
into a black Cadillac, and drove off with the lights out. A full summary of this 
case was published in Flying Saucer Review's second special issue.
A woman living in an old house on the summit of a high hill in the Melville, New 
York area had a visit from a strange quartet around the same time that the Gipsy 
lady dropped in on the farmer. Four Indians appeared on her doorstep after a 
heavy seasonal rainfall. Three of them were stately, dark-skinned, with pointed 
faces and Oriental features. They were dressed in expensively cut grey suits. 
The fourth man looked different, more normal, she said, and was poorly dressed 
in a frayed black jacket. They told her that their tribe had originally owned 
her property, and they were going to try to get it back.
What frightened the woman most - and she was frightened she admitted later - was 
that there was no mud on their neatly shined shoes, and they had no car in 
sight. The road and her lawn were soupy with mud at the time. After they left, 
she realized they had left no footprints on her lawn.
In case after case amateur UFO investigators have rejected the testimony of 
sincere witnesses who claimed to have seen UFOs land and entities dismount, 
because no footprints could be found on the site afterwards.
At 1.30 a.m. on Wednesday. March 1st, 1967, a man named Dewitt Baldwin was 
hunting near Eden, New York when, according to his story, he heard a funny noise 
and saw a circular gold-coloured object land.
"I was scared. I didn't know what to do,' Baldwin said. "While I was watching 
it, a door opened - like a sliding elevator door - and a
man walked out and down the incline of the machine. He was dressed in a sort of 
black tight-fitting suit like a flier and had on some sort of helmet and 
goggles.
'He asked me what I was doing. He wasn't white, and he wasn't a Negro. He talked 
very plainly with no accent. I told him I was hunt­ing. He asked me if I was 
born here, and I said no, that I was bora in Georgia. He took my gun, looked at 
it, and handed it back to me. He told me he would be back, walked up the saucer, 
got in, and seconds later zipped out of sight."
Mr Baldwin found a crack in the muzzle of Ms shotgun after the man had examined 
it. Neither the object nor the pilot left any marks in the fresh snow. Local UFO 
investigatorsregarded this as proof that Mr Baldwin bad fabricated his story and 
was merely seeking notorü ety, i
An Iowa college professor who writes popular books under the pseudonym of Brad 
Steiger has been investigating Men in Black cases in the Midwest for several 
years. In his book, Flying Saucer Invasion, he disclosed another common MIB 
tactic which i j being widely employed these days to discredit investigators. 
Steiger wrote:
*In the summer of 1968 Brad Steiger received a long distance telephone call from 
a journalist friend who was covering a UFO flap for his local newspaper* 
[Steiger wrote in the third person.] "Blast Brad Steiger and Joan Whritenour [a 
Florida researcher who col­laborated with Steiger] and down with John Keell" he 
thundered.
'Steiger, recognizing his friend's voice, asked him what the trouble was.
' "I'm trying to cover this flap over here - my lordl Everyone has seen these 
UFOsl - but everytime I try to dig deep, the eyewitness clams up and says. 'I 
won't say more. Brad Steiger says awful things will happen to me if I tell too 
much!' One lady said that John Keel had told her that she would be carried off 
by the saucer people if she talked to anyone about her sighting."
'Steiger knew that neither he nor Keel were in that particular area at that time 
and that neither he nor Keel would say such things in even a jesting manner if 
they had been in the locale, so he pressed his friend for details.
' "Well, damn near everywhere I go the witness has been given a copy of one of 
the Steiger-Whritenour books or a magazine with an article in it by you or 
Keell"
"
"And the books and articles are supposed to frighten them?** Steiger questioned. 
"Whoever is delivering these things must be
adding their own interpretation. * > Who are the deEvery boys? Have you seen 
themf"
1 "Not until this afternoon," the newsman answered, "I guess I arrived at this 
farmhouse just a few minutes after they did. Damn unfriendly little monkeys . *. 
I was trying to talk to the farmer's wife, while they were chattering at the 
fanner and waving a copy of this magazine in their hands and telling the man how 
Brad Steiger was.warning all UFO sighters not to talk."
* "Could you describe them? "
' "They were short men in dark suits. All three of them had deep suntans… I 
can't recall even seeing their eyes. Come to think of it, they all wore dark 
glasses."'
Small wonder there's so much paranoia in the UFO field. These mystery men have 
posed as Air Force officers, well-known inves­tigators, and members of the 
amateur UFO organizations, delib­erately sowing confusion and fear in their 
wake. There are even reliable reports describing entities who resembled exactly 
the men they were imitating (doppelgangers). On several occasions these 
doppelgangers have visited witnesses who had been previously interviewed by the 
author, creating considerable confusion. The Col­orado University study tried to 
shrug off the Heflin photos because of the 'internal inconsistencies* in his 
story: his visits from nonex­istent military officers. Similar episodes have led 
to extended feuds between amateur investigators and groups, each believing that 
the other has been warning witnesses not to talk to them*
In many of these episodes the MIB appear on the scene immediately after the 
sightings, before the witness has had a chance to report it to anyone. They 
often flourish an identification card and announce they are from Washington or 
the CIA (any real CIA agent who went around openly identifying himself as such 
would soon be standing in an unemployment line). When they use the Air Force 
ploy, they have the uncanny ability to use the name of an existing officer, but 
they change their rank. Thus a Colonel Higgins may turn up in a flap area where 
an actual sergeant named Higgins is stationed nearby.
Adding to the nonsense and confusion, we have the dreary face that ufology has 
alway attracted eccentric personalities, and a few (very few) of these 
situations have proven to be their doing. One quasi-scientific UFO group 
maintains an office in Washington, D.C., and some of their members are fond of 
waving their membership cards about authoritatively, giving the false impression 
that they represent a government agency.
The whole mess began in Tacoma in 1947. Since then the MIB manifestations have 
created a body of myth and lore fingering the federal government as the sinister 
silencer of UFO witnesses and censor of UFO news in the press. (There is no UFO 
censorship, as the publication of this hook attests.) The hardcore UFO buffs 
maintain these myths, however. They ignore the massive evidence found in the 
other frames of reference which points to the puzzling existence of the 
parahuman mimics of man who have always been engaged in mischievous - and 
sometimes malicious - shenanigans.
Mrs. Coral Lorenzen, who has been running the Aerial Phenomena Research 
Organization (APRO) since 1952, devoted a chapter of her book VFOs over the 
Americas to the CIA's purportedly sinister interest in the subject. Her evidence 
was a combination of hearsay, speculation, coincidences, classic MIB 
manipulations, and the uneasy feeling that APRO was being watched. It is cot 
surprising, of course, that some of the UFO organizations have occasionally been 
moni­tored by the FBI and other agencies, since the leading proponents of UFO 
beliefs have made a habit of publicly attacking the government and the military 
establishment on radio and television. Some UFO publications do border on the 
subversive. In the 1950s a strong Com­munist influence was visible, and some 
major groups collapsed when they turned more political than ufological. In the 
1960s ufology swung in the other direction as members of the extreme right wing 
embraced the flying saucer cause. In 1969 the long-suffering Air Force got out 
of the UFO business by closing down Project Blue Book, its halfhearted flying 
saucer agency, thus eliminating the favourite target of the UFO cultists* wrath.
Another group of CIA-baiting researchers is now overlapping into ufology. They 
are the comparatively small teams of amateur sleuths dedicated to investigating 
the assassination of President Kennedy. Here the black Cadillacs and the slight, 
dark men in black suits are viewed as Cubans and CIA agents. Paranoia runs high 
because now over fifty witnesses, reporters, and assassination investigators 
have met with sudden death, some under the most suspicious circum­stances. The 
full story of Kennedy's murder in Dallas in 1963 is filled with incredible 
details, many of them similar to things found in the most mysterious of the UFO 
incidents. Photos and physical evidence have vanished or been tampered with just 
as in so many UFO cases. A wide assortment of mystery men have been involved; 
including doppelgangers of the late Lee Harvey Oswald,1 This other Oswald even 
turned up at a public rifle range before the assassination,
1 See Richard PopMn, The Second Oswald;,
making a nuisance of himself (so the witnesses would be sure to remember him?} 
as he fired an unusual gun which spat out balls of fire at the target. He also 
visited an automobile showroom and went for a demonstration ride in a new car. 
The real Oswald could not drive. His whereabouts at the time of these incidents 
are known. &#9632; .-and he was nowhere near the rifle range and auto agency.
The huge Warren Report contains numerous pieces oi sworn tes­timony describing 
MIB-type men in the vicinity of Dealer Plaza and the School Book Depository 
building immediately before and after the assassination. Long-haired men were 
seen. This may not sound extraordinary, but remember that long hair was most 
unusual in 1963. The Beatles did not begin to make an impression until 1964, and 
the long-hair fad did not get underway until 1965-6.
Elemental hair styles have always been on the longish side, as we have already 
noted. The UFO lore is filled with accounts of pilots with angular faces and 
long, shoulder-length hair, usually blond, just as the gods, demons, and angels 
of earlier times sported long hair, Another interesting consistency is the 
unnatural colour of their hair, „. so unnatural that witnesses often comment on 
it. The late Mrs Mary Hyre, a newspaper reporter in Point Pleasant, West 
Vir­ginia, received visits from strange personages soon after she began to write 
about local UFO sightings. Two of these strangers had long, silver hair, she 
said; They were young men, and I couldn't under-! stand why they had dyed their 
hair such a funny colour.'
Mrs Hyre also claimed encounters with darkly tanned, soberly dressed gentlemen 
who rode up to her office in black Cadillacs. One of them askofl her what she 
would do if someone ordered her to stop publishing UFO reports,
I'd tell them to go to hell," was her reply- v
Jerome Clark, one of America's leading ufologists, has his own theory about the 
present trend towards long hair. 'For a long time . contactees and their 
followers talked freely of the New Age, while the rest of us . *, merely 
sneered,' Clark wrote in Flying Saucer Review, September-October, 1970< 'Now 
there is considerable talk, even a popular song, about the coming of the 
Aquarian Age. One of the features of the New Age, as contactees predicted years 
ago, is the revival of interest in the occult: astrology, the Tarot, palmistry, 
telepathy, spiritualism, magic, witchcraft, the ouija board, and so «n. Also 
involved, of course, are such obvious features as changes in clothing and hair 
styles… On,basic strategic grounds it is easier now for "them" to walk in our 
midst unnoticed (a long-haired blond malej for example, would now attract little 
if any attention in the
streets of most good-sized Western cities, nor would "strange" be­haviour 
patterns be any particular cause for alarm in a culture born of nonconformity). 
-
There are millions of people today who do believe that Venusians, Martians, 
angels, and demons are walking among us unnoticed, their long hair and peculiar 
dress and manners no longer attracting atten­tion. Strange men in black 
turtleneck sweaters and wrap-around sun glasses (a favourite garb of our MIB) 
are being reported everywhere The black Cadillacs are on the prowl.
Have we been invaded by beings from outer space or from some other space-time 
continuum as so many now believe, or is it that we are just beginning to notice 
the funny folk who have been in our midst all along?
In any case it is understandable that so many researchers and investigators 
double bolt their doors at night and spend their days peering fearfully over 
their shoulders.
CHAPTER TEN
RENDEZVOUS WITH THE DAMNED
Sometime around the year a.d. 421 a group of artisans from a now lost 
civilization painstakingly engraved a series of gold leaves or plates with 
cryptic symbols and buried them in a stone box on the west side of a hill near 
what is now the village of Manchester. New York. They remained there, unknown 
and untouched for fourteen hundred years. Then on Friday, September 21st, 1821, 
an eighteen-year-old farm boy named Joseph Smith awoke to a vision in his 
bedroom near Palmyra, New York, A personage appeared, he said later, '… standing 
in the air, for his feet did not touch the floor1. This being was dressed in a 
long robe 'of most exquisite whiteness', was surrounded by light, and 'his 
countenance was truly like light ring'. He identified himself as Moroni, a 
'messenger sent from the presence of God", called the youth by name, and 
announced that he had been chosen for a special task. In subsequent appearances 
Moroni gave Joseph Smith the exact location of the box and told him that he was 
to dig it up when instructed to do so.
Six years passed before Smith received word to unearth the tablets The date was 
September 22nd, 1827. That night the skies were aflame with a spectacular 
display of meteors, falling stars, and lu­minous spheres. One of the many 
witnesses was another young man who lived in northern New York but was 
unacquainted with Joseph Smith. His name was Brigham Young.
Smith dug into the hillside, found the box exactly as Moroni had said, pried ofi 
the Ed, and discovered the gold plates along with crystalline devices which 
became known as the Urim and Tkammim. He spent the next three years translating 
the strange writing - al­though he had little formal education - purportedly 
with the aid of the lens-like objects. Eleven of his friends and neighbours 
signed formal affidavits swearing they had viewed the plates. But once they had 
been translated, the gold plates vanished. *The messenger called for them,' 
Smith explained.
In March 1830 the translation was published by a local printer. It was the Book 
of Mormon, a history of ancient North America. The following month the Mormon 
Church was officially organized with
six members in Fayette, New York. Today it has over 2.5 million followers,
Joseph Smith was murdered by a hostile mob in Carthage, Illinois, in June 1844. 
Brigham Young became the leader of the harassed' band of Mormons who worked 
their way across the country until they arrived at the rather inhospitable 
wasteland around the 'Great Salt Lake in Utah. In 1848, many of the Mormons were 
dismayed by Young's choice for the site of their future city. But a year later 
the California Gold Rush began and the gold-mad hordes charging west­ward all 
paused at Salt Lake Oty for supplies. Within a short time the city was 
prospering, and many of the Mormons became rich overnight.
This is essentially the history - and the legend - o£ the Mormons. The 
controversy which raged around the authenticity of the Book of Mormon and its 
teachings is too complicated to discuss here. The point is this: there is enough 
evidence to believe that a spectre, a vision, or an angel visited Joseph Smith, 
or else he ascertained the location of those plates by some psychic ability - or 
by pure acci­dent. And wouldn't it be interesting if the story were entirely 
true? If the elementals, ultraterrestri^ls, or some other force did select 
Joseph Smith, passed along the information about the platesj and engineered the 
formation of the Mormon religion?
All of our great religions were founded in almost the same way. Muhammad (a.d. 
570-632) was just an Arab tradesman until at the age of forty he began to have 
visions and conversations with mess* engers, which led him to organize the 
Muslim religion and write the Koran. More recent religions, such as the Seventh 
Day Adventists and Jehovah's Witnesses, were established by men who claimed 
com­munication with supernatural beings and often issued amazing prophecies 
which came true. Throughout history common men have had uncommon experiences 
which have changed them instantly and in many cases even changed the whole 
fabric of the period in which they lived. A Jewish tentmaker named Saul was once 
on the road to Damascus to help suppress the rise of Christianity when, 
according to tradition, a blinding light appeared in the sky, and a voice 
con­verted him on the spot. He became St Paul.
Two groups or forces have always been involved in this cosmic charade. Early man 
quickly learned to separate them into the good (prehuman) and evil (antihuman) 
and gave each new god and demon a name. In the interests of clarity, we shall 
label the good guys the Alpha Group and the bad guys the Omega Group. The Alpha 
Group gave man a set of ethics and moral principles, while the
Omega Group fostered racism, greed, and violence. As time passed, the two groups 
began imitating each other's tactics, and the task of discriminating between 
them became impossibly difficult. In his con­fusion man soon began to associate 
everything that happened around him to one of the groups. Natural catastrophes 
and acci­dents were automatically blamed on the Omega Group. This led to the 
development of pure superstition and the awesome, irrational fear of all 
ultraterresrrials. Things reached a peak in the Middle Ages. Then every new and 
radical invention was regarded as an invention of the Devil, and men such as 
Galileo, who came up with new scientific discoveries running contrary to the 
accepted cos-mological view, were jailed or burned at the stake.
The Omega Group delighted in spreading false interpretations of the universe and 
false religious teachings. For every Buddha and Muhammad there were ten thousand 
CyrusTeeds.
Who was Cyrus Teed? He believed that the universe was a sphere and that the 
earth was hollow and that we live on the inside of it. Born in 1839, Teed took 
up the study of alchemy in IMca, New York, and at the age of thirty he received 
his first visit from a beautiful female entity who materialized in his 
laboratory. Following the pat­tern of such contacts, she first informed him of 
his past incarnations, He had been mighty kings and great men in past lives, 
naturally. (No one ever approached by these entities has ever been identified as 
of lesser station.) Then she proceeded togive him a detailed history of the 
cosmos, complete with her own special terminology which, of course, he adopted. 
He began to write pamphlets and books on this new Cellular Cosmogony, became a 
powerful public speaker, and gradually built a following for his profitable 
Koreshan cult (he used the pseudonym Koresh). He settled finally in Fort Myers, 
Florida, where he established his New Jerusalem with about two hundred 
followers. He died in 1908 of injuries resulting from an altercation with the 
local sheriff.
Teed had promised that he would rise again after death. He was buried in a 
concrete tomb on the island of Estero, and a violent hurricane carried his tomb 
off in 1921. His body was never recov­ered. This event gave the Koreshan cult 
new impetus, and it survived into the 1940s.
Teed-Iike ideas permeate the thousands of books written in every language by 
percipients and contactees. He proposed, for example, the existence of a 
supersun which served as the ultimate source of the universe. Albert K. Bender 
claimed that the space people -.described this central body to him also. Many 
variations of this
concept exist in the literature. Long before Albert Einstein published his 
famous theory of relatively in 1905. Einsteinian ideas were being expounded by 
the ultraterrestrials and published by enthused per-dpients. The Big Bang Theory 
currently in favour with leading as­tronomers is that the universe began when 
all matter condensed into a single enormous body, which then exploded. The 
fragments of that explosion, including our own solar system, are now hurtling 
outwards from the centre at tremendous velocity, but eventually they will follow 
the curvature of space as envisioned by Einstein and return to reform a new 
central body. Then the whole cycle will start over again. Teed and his ilk have 
been talking about this same thing in their own peculiar way for centuries.
Scientists and doctors who have examined people claiming visions and visits with 
ultraterrestrials have been puzzled by their apparent normality. In many cases 
the percipients have seemed too unintel­ligent, unimaginative, uneducated, and 
too sincere to have simply invented the complicated, profusely detailed stories 
they relate. The contactee syndrome is not a form of insanity, but insanity - 
par­ticularly paranoid schizophrenia - frequently develops after the con­tacts 
begin. Investigators, however, are still debating which came first in some cases 
- insanity or contact.
The first complete psychological study of a percipient took place in the 1890s, 
when Theodore Flournoy, a professor of psychology at the University of Geneva, 
investigated the strange phenomena sur­rounding a girl known as Helene Smith. 
Beginning in March 1892, Miss Smith started to receive messages through 
automatic writing {a process in which the percipient merely holds the pen, and 
some other force moves it). Soon she was going into trances and speaking in a 
man's voice with an Italian accent. He identified himself as Leopold and proved 
to be something of a rascal, prefacing his com­munications with phrases such as, 
'I am here. I wish to be master of this sitting.* Then all kinds of 
poltergeisttc activity would begin. Later, however, Victor Hugo, the deceased 
author, came through the medium and offered advice on how to handle the evil 
Leopold.
The clash between Leopold and Victor Hugo escalated into a classic 
ultraterrestrial game, just as the modern UFO contactees are caught up in the 
games waged between the spacemen and the evil Men in Black. Then at 3.15 ajn. on 
the morning of September 5th, 1896, Helene woke up and had a strange vision. She 
viewed, she said, a foreign landscape with a 'beautiful blue-pink lake* whose 
shores were, joined by a transparent bridge. A crowd of 'peculiar people' 
approached the bridge. A man 'of dark complexion, carrying an in-
strument somewhat resembling a carriage lantern in appearance, which, being 
pressed, emitted flames and which seemed to be a flying machine* stood on the 
centre of the bridge. Using this instrument, he flew off the bridge, touched the 
water, and flew bade again.
By the end of that September the dark compksioned man had become a part of 
Helene's life. He appeared and disappeared sud­denly when she was alone and 
fully conscious. Often he spoke to her in a strange unknown tongue. His name was 
Astane, and he was from Mars, he told her soberly. He looked more Wee an 
Oriental or last Indian. On a number of occasions he guided her to Ms home on 
Mars (at least in her visions and hallucinations). Usually he was dressed in 
beautifully embroidered robes. Miss Smith described at length the vehicles on 
Mars, stating they had neither wheels nor horses, and people seemed to fly about 
in them.
Helene quickly learned to speak the strange Martian language. Her automatic 
writing also developed a new twist. She began writ­ing in unknown symbols but 
was able to decipher them and translate Martian into French. These symbols had 
the Oriental characteristics which have been so often described by modem flying 
saucer con-tactees who claim to have been aboard the craft. In later periods 
Helene would sometimes lapse into this language in the course of normal 
conversation without realizing she was doing so. It was not, Hournoy noted, the 
kind of gibberish that children make up when they are playing at being Chinese 
ot Indian. It was an actual - language which could be broken down and studied.
Other Martians turned up answering to the names of Ramie and Esenale. Soon 
Helene's world was peopled with strange beings with long hair and long fingers 
(both common characteristics of the UFO entities described by contactees) who 
led her off on spiritual trips to other planets.
On November 2nd, 1898, Helene reported rising at 6.15 am and feeling an 
invisible arm clasp itself about her waist. *I then saw myself surrounded by a 
rose-coloured light which generally shows itself when a Martian vision is 
coming,' she said. She found herself suddenly in 'a section of country people by 
men altogether different from those who inhabit our globe. The tallest of all 
were three feet high, and the majority were an inch or two shorter. Their hands 
were immense, about ten inches long by eight inches broad; they were ornamented 
with very long black nails, Their feet were also of great size."
These little men of 1898 resided in simple houses 'all low, long, without 
windows or doors; and each house had a little tunnel about
ten feet long running from it into the earth. The roofs were flat, supplied with 
chimneys or tubes.*
All of the things described in Flouraoy's 447-page study, From India to the 
Planet Mars, published in 1900, have been repeated endlessly in the occult and 
UFO literature in other cases. The little men have since earned a special place 
in flying saucer lore. Flournoy speculated that Leopold and Astane could have 
been the same entity in different guises. Perhaps he was aware of Swedenborg's 
warning centuries earlier that the ultra-terrestrials could assume any 
ident­ity, and more interestingly, if the percipient accepted their identity, 
they would eventually believe themselves that they were Moses, Napoleon, or 
Astane. Joseph Smith and his friends were treated with visits not only from 
Moroni but also from entities claiming to be John the Baptist and the apostles 
Peter, James, and John.
Our ultraterrestrials are ham actors who delight in assuming roles and adopting 
names from ancient mythology. Early theologians were kept busy recording the 
endless names of angels and demons. Numbers are also flourished indiscriminately 
in both religious and contactee literature. The Bible contains long chapters 
giving elabor­ate but seemingly meaningless measurements. In Oahspe, a book 
produced by automatic writing in 1880, we learn that Egypt had a population of 
thirteen million at the tune of Moses birth; four milhon of these were enslaved 
Hebrews. (Today Egypt's population is about forty million - not much of an 
increase in two thousand years.) Page after page in Oahspe lists the total 
number of spirits and angels and druks (the Oahspe word for the Oraega Group). 
This numbers game has been extended to the modern UFO phenomena. 'On August 
7,1965, three prominent men in Venezuela were present at a UFO landing and had a 
conversation with two tall (seven to eight feet) beings with long yellow hair, 
large penetrating eyes, and one piece metallic coverall-type garments. The 
witnesses, who in­cluded a well-known Venezuelan doctor, claimed they 
communicated through telepathy, and among the questions they asked was. 'Are 
there any beings like you living among us?*
*Yes,' came the reply. Two million, four hundred and seventeen thousand, eight 
hundred and five.'
That's a very predse answer. But many other contactees have thought to ask the 
same question, and the answers are wildly vari­able… from seventy-five to ten 
thousand (in the city of Los Angeles alone) to up in the millions. Our 
long-haired friends also indulge in nonsensical prophecy on a grand scale. Asked 
when the world is going to end, they are apt to give a precise date in the near 
future,
Some people have actually started building arks on their say-so. One group in 
Denmark erected a hasty atom bomb shelter in 1967 and settled down to await 
Armageddon that December. Who is going to be elected President in the next 
election? The elemental announce with grave authority that Frank Sinatra or Mae 
West is in line for the job.
The study of glossolalia has had a small group of scholarly fol­lowers for 
years. This is the attempted translation of the mysterious languagc(s) spoken by 
the ultraterrestrials, mediums, and church groups who indulge in speaking in 
tongues. It seems to be a con­glomerate of many languages, both ancient and 
modern, and Flour-noy wasn't the first to try to unravel it. There are books 
filled with symbols and translations similar to, but never exactly like, Helene 
Smith's Martian language. Dozens of these phoney alphabets have been published 
in dead seriousness* A retired teacher named John W. Dean collected the 
testimony of flying saucer contactees and the elaborate information passed along 
by the space people for his book, Flying Saucers Close Up. The project must have 
taken years. He devotes many pages to listing unknown planets far out in the 
cosmos {as described by the ultra terrestrials), and giving encyclopedic data 
about each one. Here's a sample from one of his tables:
Planet Colonized,
Name Indigenous, Population Day Length Diameter Year
Uninhabited in Billions in Hours in Miles Length
Wamovaldam Un. — "36.6 9,810 0.95
Tarmandre Col. 1.2 23.7 10,480 1.88
Ophianche lad. 3.62 28.0 7,188 3,21
Salumandran Lid. ' 4.23 24.1 9,170 5.66
Dean lists hundreds of unknown planets in this fashion. The group in this 
particular table happen to be from the star system of Alpha Tauri, 53.6 light 
years away. But anyone with) a basic knowledge of orbital mechanics and a slide 
rule can check the mass of figures and discover that many of these alleged 
planetary systems are quite im­possible. The cosmos of the ultraterrestrials 
must be filled with col­liding planets weaving and spinning in defiance of all 
the known laws of motion.
In Flying Saucers Close Up Mr Dean also presents a complete vocabulary and the 
written language of the folks from the planet called Korendor. Some of the 
symbols bear a striking resemblance to runic ciphers. His book is only a minor 
example of the privately
published material circulated to about two thousand hardcore flying saucer 
believers. Over the past twenty years the ultraterrestrials have constructed a 
whole fantasy world through the contactees - a cosmos which includes great 
Intergalactic Councils (as soon as we grow up, we may be permitted to join).
On other levels, in different frames of reference believers speak in terms of 
other planes. The most common belief shared by every culture on this planet is 
that there are seven distinct worlds or realities. We Hve on the lowest rung of 
the ladder. If there is a hell, we must be living in it
Numerous religious sects are concerned with Holy Ghost appar­itions and the 
speaking in tongues phenomenon, which they accept as verification of their 
beliefs. The United Pentecostal Church, for example, finds great meaning in such 
manifestations… and they occur constantly within the church. Church bulletins 
and pub­lications are filled with accounts of these events. The newsletter, 
Global Witness, June-July 1970, described the following, as reported by a group 
in Peru:
On April 28th as they were praying, the ten-year-old daughter suddenly went into 
what they thought was a "fit of convulsions*. She began to jerk and shake all 
over. Her terrified mother rushed to her side to attempt to help her daughter, 
but an unseen hand restrained her, and a voice urged her to leave the girl 
alone. In just a few moments this little girl, who did not know what the Holy 
Ghost was, began to speak in a strange but lovely new language. The following 
Tuesday night the oldest boy was mar­vellously filled with the Holy Ghost. He 
rejoiced in the Spirit and spoke with tongues for over an hour^
Convulsive seizures are common to all the frames of reference. Many UFO 
contactees suffer chronic headaches, muscular soreness, and other symptoms of 
such seizures after their experiences. These fits could be caused by some 
disorder of the frontal lobe. Primitive peoples usually regarded such fits as 
demonic possessions.
One of the world's foremost psychologists, the late Dr Carl G. Jung, examined 
the sodoreligious aspects of the UFO rumours and published a shrewd analysis. 
Flying Saucers: A Modern Myth of Things Seen in the Sky in 1959. He correlated 
the UFO reports with psychic manifestations and suggested that the phenomena 
were pro­ducts of the collective consciousness of mankind. The psychic aspect 
plays so great a role that it cannot be left out of account,' Dr Jung
stated. 1he discussion of it leads to psychological problems which involve just 
as fantastic possibilities or impossibilities as the ap­proach from the physical 
side.*
Another scientist, Dr Jacques Vallee, an astronomer and computer specialist, 
spent several years sifting UFO accounts and comparing them with the earlier 
fairy lore of Europe. He felt that the two phenomena shared a single cause. In 
Passport to Magonia1, Vallee offered a catalogue of 923 flying saucer landings 
from 1868 to 1968, many of which included the classic characteristics of the 
ntore uni­versal psychic manifestations. Is it reasonable to draw a parallel 
between religious apparitions, the fairy faith, the reports of dwarf-like beings 
with supernatural powers, the airship tales in the United States in the last 
century, and the present stories of UFO landings?" he asks. 'I would strongly 
argue that it is - for one simple reason: the mechanisms that have generated 
these various beliefs are ident­ical.'
The crux of the problem is to reach beyond the endless reports of varied 
manifestations and seek out the source: the physical, psychic, of psychological 
mechanism which has inspired these beliefs. All of these incidents ar* 
subjective; that is, we have only the testimony of the witnesses that these 
peculiar events occurred. Although millions of people have claimed encounters 
with the ultraterrestrials in the past two thousand years, many millions of 
others have not had such experiences. Astronomers and physicists are neither 
trained nor equipped to deal with a purely subjective phenomenon*
Only a few examples have been given, but it is apparent that Joseph Smith, Cyrus 
Teed, Helene Smith, and even John Dean were all confronted by the same basic 
phenomenon. Each approached it in a different, individualized way, and each 
received information structured to support Ms own beliefs. Albert K. Bender and 
Teed both explored black magic and alchemy. Both claimed they received complex 
cosmic theories from parahuman entities. Dean asked for and received elaborate 
facts and figures about extraterrestrial beings and the planets they supposedly 
inhabited. like Swedenborg and the biblical prophet Enoch, Helene Smith was 
shown other worlds and led to believe that she was visiting other planets. 
Reinhold Schmidt was transported to the centre of the pyramid; Bender was taken 
to underground bases in Antarctica; others have visited the under­ground palaces 
of the fairies and the subterranean cities of the Deros. It is not likely that 
any of these places exist in reality. It is more likely that these people made 
hallucinogenic excursions, or
1 Published by Neville Spearman.
mind trips, guided by some force which is capable of manipulating the electrical 
circuits of the brain.
The only, alternative explanation is that all these people were liars, hoaxsters 
or lunatics. None of the scientists, psychiatrists, and theologians who have 
investigated these matters have been able to accept such a simple explanation.
A remarkable man named Aleister Crowley, born in 1875, became known as the 
wickedest man in the world through his work in black 'magick'. He too claimed to 
receive visits from an angel, and he was the centre of a large cult around the 
turn of the century. He was noted for sexually liberating Ms female followers, 
and he published a number of books expounding on his personal cosmology. Those 
books are currently enjoying a revival of popularity among the youth subculture.
In 1939 a young rocket fuel scientist, John Whiteside Parsons, joined the 
Crowley cult and burrowed into the dark world of 'magick* and the occult. 
Another practitioner of the mysteries crossed Parsons' path in 1946, and the two 
became close friends, combining their efforts to conjure up demons and 
elementals. The newcomer, Lafayette Ronald Hubbard, claimed he had a personal 
angel, a beautiful red-haired entity whom he called the Empress. The two men 
donned robes and engaged in secret mystical rites. Accord­ing to Parsons, they 
had some success. On the night of January 14th, 1946, the electric power failed 
as they were mumbling incantations, and Hubbard was struck by something on the 
right shoulder, knock­ing a candle from his hand, *He called me,* Parsons wrote, 
'and we observed a brownish-yellow light about seven-feet high. I brandished a 
magical sword, and it disappeared. Ron's right arm was paralysed for the rest of 
the night.*
During one of their rites, Parsons was given this prophecy: "Bab-alon [the whore 
of Babylon] is incarnate upon the earth today, awaiting the proper hour of her 
manifestation. And in that day my work will be accomplished, and I shall be 
blown away upon the breath of the father…'
A rocket fuel explosion at a laboratory in Pasadena in 1952 did blow away the 
ill-fated Parsons.
Lafayette Ronald Hubbard went on to bigger and better things. Born in Tilden, 
Nebraska in 1911, he served in the Marines, studied engineering, and became a 
prolific science fiction writer. Sometime around 1948 he began to develop a form 
of pseudopsychiatry which he labelled Dianetics. John Campbell, Jr., editor of 
Astounding Science Fiction, served as one of his first patients and was so imi
pressed by Hubbard's concept that he persuaded him to write an article about it 
for Ms magazine. The article caused such a stir among the science fiction fans 
that Hubbard quickly churned out a full-length book, Dianetics: The Modern 
Science of Mental Healing. It became an instant bestseller, and a new movement 
was born.
Teed's neologisms (such as 'planets are spheres of substance aggregated through 
the impact of afferent and efferent fluxions of essence*) were nothing compared 
to Hubbard's new vision oi the human mind and soul. All our troubles, he 
decided, were caused by 'engrams': traumas stored in the unconscious or reactive 
mind. Patients were guided by auditors - people who have already under­gone the 
process, unearthed their own engrains, and reached the exalted state of 'clear'.
The American Medical Association, the U.S. Food and Drug Ad­ministration and 
other authorities took a dim view of Dianetics, and Hubbard's career had many 
ups and downs throughout the 1950s. At one point he publicly claimed that he had 
even visited Venus, Apparently the friendly Venusians were 100 per cent behind 
Dia­netics. But even with their support, Mr Hubbard suffered many set­backs and 
his movement went into limbo for a, few years, reappearing in the late 1950s as 
the Church of Scientology.
Inside newsletters and publications distributed to the operators of the 
Scientology offices or "org" (short for organization) are written in Hubbaid's 
own unique jargon with emphasis on the magic word sell. In 1962, the Food and 
Drug Administration raided the Founding Church of Scientology in Washington, 
D.C., and seized literature and a number of E-meters. The E-meters are a simple 
electrical device similar to a lie detector and are used by auditors in 
counselling sessions. On August 30th, 1971, Federal District Court Judge 
Ger­hard A. Gesell in Washington ruled in favour of Scientology and ordered the 
return of the confiscated materials because the FDA failed to prove that the 
E-meters were being sold as healing devices.
In the 1960s Hubbard's movement spread throughout the world despite the 
opposition of medical societies and legal authorities from Great Britain to 
Greece. Hubbard now spends most of his time cruis­ing outside the twelve-mile 
limit aboard his magnificently appointed yacht. The Church of Scientology is now 
a franchise operation with Hubbard receiving a small percentage of the take. He 
has come a long way since those days when he and Parsons were drawing circles on 
the floor and praying to unseen demons.
The games of the ultraterrestriat never end.
The latest entry is an outfit called Koscot Interplanetary, Inc. of Orlando. 
Florida, who have 'had difficulties with law enforcement agencies in several 
states', according to the Better Business Bureau. Koscot has been pushing *Dare 
To Be Great', a motivational course consisting of a series of four tapes which 
will tell you how to get rich. The four tapes cost only seventy-seven hundred 
dollars, but the investment can be quickly recouped by selling the course to 
others. The whole scheme is based upon a pyramid plan with each student peddling 
the course to new seekers of truth. Unfortunately, {he population of a state can 
not support an indefinite selling plan that depends upon recruiting other 
sellers and students, and the Better Business Bureau has labelled the whole 
enterprise 'doubtful and un­realistic'. The tapes deal largely with the same 
philosophy and cos­mology found in all the occult lore.
CHAPTER ELEVEN
Not one of them who took up in his youth with this opinion that there are no 
gods ever continued until old age faithful to his con­viction.
Plato
A New Jersey sign painter named Howard Menger experienced a most revealing 
flying saucer vision in August 1956, when he came face-to-face with a godlike 
being. But according to his book From Outer Space to You. Menger's story began 
years earlier. As a boy he had encountered a beautiful female entity in a wood 
and was told that he would one day serve the illustrious space people. As a 
young man in,' the Army he was again contacted, this time in Juarez. Mexico, by 
a man with long blond hair and suntanned skin, riding in a taxicab. Then in the 
mid-1950s, Menger's real adventures began. Strange aerial objects haunted the 
area around his home near High Bridge. New Jersey, frhere were innumerable 
witnesses, including lawyers, physicists, and reporters.) The space people began 
to drop in on him for coffee and friendly chats about the state of the 
uni­verse. They asked him to buy dark sunglasses with red lenses, and on several 
occasions they even pressed him into service as a barber, inviting him to chop 
off their long blond tresses so they would look even more human. He was rewarded 
with a flight to the moon (he brought back some strange rocks which were, he 
said, moon po­tatoes). Finally, in August 1956, he met the boss spaceman.
A saucer landed in a field near Menger's home, and two men stepped out of it. 
Then a magnificent sight appeared in the door­way,' Menger wrote. 'A tali, 
handsome man with long blond hair over his shoulders stood towering at the 
entrance… Then he came toward me. But he seemed to float or glide rather than 
walk." This being was dressed in 'a radiant white ski-type uniform… the sleeves 
were full and loose; the neckline was high, similar to that of a turtleneck 
sweater.' He wore a light blue, fluorescentlike cape fastened to his shoulder 
with a gold pin in the shape of a wheel. His skin was white, and his eyes 'were 
the colour of goldenrod when it is ripe.' His fingers were long and tapering.
This superbeing gave Menger a message of love and truth in the
grand tradition of the elemental's, then returned to his flying saucer, and Sew 
oil to the stars.
When Howard Menger courageously published his story (it was privately printed in 
1959), he was roundly cheered by one group of cultists for having solved the UFO 
mystery and roundly condemned by the equally fanatical scientific ufologists who 
believed in the exist­ence of extraterrestrial spaceships but could not believe 
that anyone had ever been close to one. His business collapsed as he gained a 
reputation for being a crack-pot, and his family fell apart.
If Howard Menger had lived in another age, he might have been looked upon as 
great prophet and visionary - one of those privileged individuals who consorted 
with the gods. Sculptors would have been commissioned to carve mighty replicas 
of the superbeing. Poems and songs would have been written about his experience 
and handed down from one generation to the next.
Unfortunately, Menger lived in 1956. He was laughed out of business. His book 
earned a few hundred dollars from sales to the hardcore cultists and was then 
forgotten. But it is a revealing record of the mechanism of belief which is at 
work in these cases. If such things could happen in 1956, then they may also 
have happened in 1056 and 556 B.C. There are in fact extensive legends 
suggesting that this sort of thing has been happening to men since the beginning 
of history. The long-haired, long-fingered ultraterrestrials have been walking 
among us forever*
Before we can understand this tangled maze, we must attempt to understand 
something of the origins and complexities of human his­tory. We must try to 
ascertain how it all began, how the ultra-terrestrials have influenced our 
course, and where it is all leading us.
Our scientists can only guess at how the universe itsejf came into being. The 
two most popular theories are the Big Bang concept, already discussed, and the 
Steady State theory that matter is con­stantly replenishing itself and that the 
cosmos really has no beginning or end. The beginning of the solar system and the 
birth of the planets are a little easier to deal with. The commonly accepted 
theory is that the planets are cooling masses of material ejaculated from the 
sun.
Two independent scientists, Dr C. J. Hyman and C. William Kins­man, have 
developed a new Geocosmic theory based upon the new discoveries outlined in 
earlier chapters, coupled with Velikovsky-like evidence and speculations. They 
suggest that Earth once pursued the orbit now occupied by Venus and that Mars 
was in the present
Earth oibit. This would explain the legends of early man, which claimed that 
Earth days and years were once shorter than they are now and that the human 
life-span was once considerably longer. Ancient calendars carved in stone also 
indicate important differences in the early Earth years. If the Earth began as a 
lump of matter cast off by the sun, it may have first passed along the orbit of 
Mercury before spiralling outward and settling into the orbit of Venus. This 
could have happened five billion years ago.
The cooling planet Earth could have reached the life support stage hundreds of 
millions of years ago. and it could have been inhabited while it was in the 
Venus orbit. If Mars was then in the Earth orbit, it too could have supported 
life. But as it was pushed further into space by the approach of Earth, the 
Martians either died out or were forced to make radical biological adjustments 
to their new environ­ment.
In a recent letter Kinsman also proposes that there was some efforts to 
crossbreed Martians with earthlings. He states:
If Mars was 'pushed' out there in our Permian times to make way for Earth in our 
present orbits, its environmental change in climate in this some three hundred 
million years would surely modify its humanoids, because of the scarcity of air, 
water, and warmth, into presumably a more scrawny physique no longer adapted to 
normal life on Earth… Presumably for millions of years they have been trying to 
hybridize their fauna and flora with ours and to develop some sort of humanoid 
to whom they could bequeath the advances which their dying civilization had long 
since acquired. Success in this seems to have finally come with the sudden 
hybrid appearance of Cro-Magnon man some fifty thousand years ago. They may have 
visited us frequently and openly for such time as they could stand it, until a 
few millennia ago (when men were still few and fearful).
If the Earth did begin in another orbit and did undergo the changes postulated 
by these scientists, it may have been even more unstable than it is now and 
cataclysmic occurrences would have been logical. Velikovsky pointed out that 
human folklore has re­corded many such cataclysms, including a period when the 
entire earth was bathed in total darkness for three or more days. The Earth may 
have followed an elliptical orbit which carried it so far away from the sun that 
it was plunged into darkness. Then it looped back and fell into the present 
orbit.
Elemeatals have constantly tt>Id occultists and UFO contactees that mankind 
began on Ventis and that orbital changes have taken place in the past and will 
recur in the future. On April 24th, 1964, a farmer named Gary Wilcox allegedly 
had a two-hour conversation with a pair of faceless little men from a flying 
saucer in a field near Newark Valley. New York. Among other things, he said, 
they told him that the Earth would soon be where Mars is now.1
Many flying saucer books have followed the premise that the Earth was originally 
seeded by beings from outer space. Man has always assumed that the frequently 
observed parahumaus had to originate from beyond our planet or even from beyond 
our solar system or space-time continuum.
Science writer Otto Binder's Flying Saucers Are Watching Vs dealt at length with 
the theories of an engineer named Max H. Flindt. Flindt proposed 'that man is a 
hybrid from the union of ancient spacemen and some earthly species of man-ape 
who existed, accord­ing to recent anthropological finds, as long as two million 
years ago.
More orthodox scientists have struggled for the past hundred years to find a 
provable system of evolution to account for man's appearance. The commonly 
accepted view is that man was a mere animal for thousands of years, and he 
somehow suddenly developed intelligence and consciousness and quickly evolved 
from a low hairy animal to his present exalted status of low hairless animal. 
The mythical missing link of the Sunday supplements is supposed to be the animal 
that bridged the two orders of life. Is the movie, 2001, Arthur C. Clarke solved 
the problem by having a sudden outside influence - the slab-like monolith - 
appear in the midst of a group of apes. It led them to discover tools, namely 
clubs, and they began bashing in each other's heads.
There are really only three primary theories for the origin of man:
1. The religious theory: man was created by some greater intelli­gence through 
the manipulation of physical matter and energy.
2. The cultist theory: man migrated to Earth from some other planet, or he was 
seeded here by some other race, or he was pro­duced when some other race 
crossbred with earthly animals and produced the present strain of Homo sapiens.
3. The theory of evolution: a series of random chemical and bio-1 See Dr. 
Berthold SchwarzTs psychiatric study of Mr. Wilcwt in UFO
Percipients.
logical accidents took place over a period of millions of years, and man slowly 
evolved from lower life forms.
Billions of people have believed and still believe in supernatural creation. A 
few million accept Darwin's theory of evolution, and only a few thousand are 
even willing to consider the seeded idea. The real truth may be a combination of 
all three, Of the three, evolution is actually the weakest and the most 
difficult to support. Evolution adequately explains the development of living 
species, the process of natural selection, and the other things, but it fails to 
provide a rational and provable explanation for the process of creation itself. 
Scientists shrug this off with limp statements about how bolts of lightning 
struck puddles of chemicals and induced life. But if such a lightning process 
were true, it should be still continuing, and it should be easy to duplicate in 
our laboratories. The fact that it is not a discernible continuing process (new 
species are not constantly ap­pearing) and that we have not managed to duplicate 
it weakens the concept…
The Japanese have myths and legends which claim that their islands were first 
settled by beings who descended from the sky. These stories are a part of the 
Japanese culture. The Eskimos believe they were somehow flown to die Arctic 
circle in andent times. The natives of the Sahara desert have folklore about 
blue-skinned people from the sky who had such impact that certain tribes still 
dye their skins blue in emulation of these andent cosmic beings; Deep in the 
Bayan-Kara-Ula Mountains of China there is a tribe of diminutive people about 
four feet high. Hieroglyphs have been found in that region (on the border of 
China and Tibet) by Russian archaeologists. When translated, these records 
describe how members of the Dropa tribe came to Earth in some kind of flying 
machine. The stone disks bearing these inscriptions have been dated at about 
twelve thousand years. Ancient graves have also been found there contain­ing 
small human bodies with huge craniums and underdeveloped skeletons.
There is, in fact, a staggering amount of historical and archae­ological 
evidence to support the seeded notion, while the evolution­ists are obliged to 
fall back on a few fragments of fossils and a mountain of conjecture.
The concept of supernatural creation is wholly dependent upon the religious 
texts and the testimony of the ultra terrestrials. The story of Adam and Eve can 
be found in the ancient writings of the Greeks, Syrians, Egyptians, Abyssinians, 
Hebrews, and many other
ancient peoples. like the tales of the deluge and the Ark, the Garden oE Eden is 
a universal myth. Unlike the deluge stories, it seems to be largely allegorical. 
Archaeologists digging in the Middle East have found artifacts which indicate 
that Neanderthal, Cro-Magnon, and modern men all existed during the same period. 
This not only shoots down the theory of evolution, but it suggests that modern 
man - a creature with a conscience and a consciousness - was separate and 
distinct from primitive man.
If we ever manage to assemble a more accurate history of Earth, we may find that 
modern man is the descendant of the survivors of some earlier civilization which 
existed thousands, even millions, of years ago, and that he has no direct 
biological linkage with the lower animals at all. We must not ignore the 
possibility that the Earth was originally colonized by beings from some other 
point in space. Historians and archaeologists are troubled by the fact that 
mankind seems to have appeared quite suddenly on this planet Ether we were 
placed here, even stranded here, at some point be­tween thirty and seventy 
thousand years ago. or we were created in some fashion millions of years after 
the Earth itself had been created and had passed through many ages during which 
it supported different kinds of non-human life.
The process of creation is explained somewhat in the religious and occult texts. 
We are told that the first man, Adam, was an androgynous being directly linked 
with the supermind of the universe. He was a temporary transmogrification of 
energy -an ultra-terrestrial who became locked into a physical form. Once this 
descent occurred^ he was given a mate so that he could reproduce,
The Earth was already inhabited by two distinct life forms. There were primitive 
animals, which might have included cavemen as well as lower beasts. Perhaps the 
cavemen were an earlier experiment which was failing. There were also thousands, 
if not millions, of nonphysical beings from the world of higher frequencies, who 
occu­pied the Earth by sharing the same space with the planet. These beings may 
have been free from the greater intelligence (fallen angels), or they may have 
been under the control of a lesser intelli­gence. In any cases, the Earth was 
their personal playground. They owned it.
Now suddenly, a group (or several groups) of ultraterrestrials from a higher 
plane descended to Earth. They were forbidden to do certain things. We can't 
even guess what those things were. In the scriptures Adam and Eve were forbidden 
to eat the fruit of the Tree
of the Knowledge of Good and Evil. This was probably more sym­bolism, and the 
true meaning is lose.
A British scholar, Brinsley Le Poer Trench, has studied the ancient scriptures 
carefully and produced two important books, The Sky-People and Men Among 
Mankind.2 to explain his thories. He de­scribes and defines the people of the 
Serpent. These people may have been the fallen angels or devils who later 
plagued Adam and Eve. If they felt they were owners of the Earth, they may have 
greatly resented this hew flock of ultraterrestrials, and they may have 
con­spired to lead the Adam and Eve group to destruction by getting them to 
violate the orders of their overlord.
A battle now takes shape. A lesser group of ultraterrestrials (UTs) is in 
possession of the Earth. A bunch of newcomers invades the planet, and perhaps 
their ruling intelligence has a plan - a very long range plan - to wrest the 
earth from the owners. Masses of energy can not fight with bombs, bullets, and 
arrows. They need a physical battlefield and physical armies. The whole thing 
must be played out like some gigantic chess game.
The first step is to create the necessary physical army. Tactics must be 
invented so that the physical army can overthrow the non-physical owners. The 
game becomes incredibly complex.
If several different superinteUigences were involved, then one group of 
ultraterrestrials would descend or be materialized in Japan and China, bearing 
the specific racial characteristics imposed upon them by their overlord. Another 
overlord would plant his soldiers in Africa; another would create Indians in 
North and South America; and so on.
In the beginning one superintelligence may have tried to utilize the Neanderthal 
men as his physical army. Ultraterrestrials were sent down the frequency scale 
to help guide the cavemen. To facilitate communication between the UTs and the 
Neanderthal men, the tall, blond, normally sexless UTs were made to more closely 
resemble their primitive contacts. They were given sexes but were forbidden to 
^rarticipate in the pleasurable rites of sex… the Tree of the Know­ledge.
The Serpent People were sometimes able to control groups of cavemen and managed 
to trick some of the TITs into breaking their chastity. The UTs engaged in 
sexual intercourse with the cave-women.3 This produced strange responses in 
their materialized
2 Both published by Neville Spearman.
* This crossbreeding between Adam (ultraterrestrial) types and lower animals is 
suggested in Genesis 25:19-34, and relates a miraculous birth,
nervous system. Emotions were born. Frequencies were changed. The direct control 
of the superintelligence was driven from their bodies. They were trapped on 
Earth, unable to ascend the electro-magnetic scale and re-enter their etheric 
world. With the loss of control they became animals, albeit highly intelligent 
animals.
Since the UTs memories were part of the greater intelligence.-the loss of 
contact meant also the complete loss of their former identity. They were locked 
on this planet, leaderless, in a totally strange and hostile environment.
The first UTs to be thus trapped became the first real men. They had to learn to 
hunt and kill, to build fires and huts. They were lost: the victims of the first 
battle between the Serpent People and the ultimate intelligence.
Now the Serpent People or Omega Group, attacked man in various ways, trying to 
rid the planet of him. But the supers intelligence was still able to look over 
man, and new, more tightly controlled UTs were sent to offer advice and 
assistance. Earliest man was told in carefully simplified ways of his origin and 
purpose. The superintelligence became God and early man worshipped Him. x. in 
many ways and under many names. God worked out new ways of communication and 
control^ always in conflict with the Serpent People.
Much is made of the fact that Adam and Eve were terrified fay the first night, 
indicating that they were unused to a world without light. Perhaps as 
ultraterrestrials they were accustomed to total vision or perception of all the 
frequencies; life on those higher planes would be bathed in continuous 
radiation, and there would be no night or day. No time. Now Adam and Eve were 
not only trapped on this miserable little planet, but they were also caught up 
in a world that moved in a single direction through the field of time. This 
would take some getting used to, even if they couldn't remember their previous 
existence as UTs.
Through intercourse with the existing cave people, the fallen UTs produced the 
new races of man. They were the missing link. And in
Isaac's barren wife Rfebekah suddenly conceived, and the Lord said to her. Two 
nations are in thy womb, and two manner of people shall be separated from thy 
bowels; and the one people shall be stronger than the other people; and the 
elder shall serve the younger.1 Eebekah gave birth to twins and one, Esau, 'came 
out red all ovet like an baity garment^ Later Esau sold his birthright to Jacob.
many ways all three of our hypotheses for the origin of man became correct. 
Evolution is involved. Extraterrestrial descent is involved. Creation is 
involved.
In some parts of the world the Serpent People successfully posed as gods and 
imitated the techniques of the super-intelligence. This led to the formation of 
pagan religions centred around human sacrifices. The conflicts, so far as man 
himself was concerned, became one of religions and races. Whole civilizations 
based upon the worship of these false gods rose and fell in Asia, Africa, and 
South America. The battleground had been chosen, and the mode of conflict had 
been decided upon.
The human race would supply the pawns. The mode of control was complicated as 
usual. Human beings were largely free of direct control. Each individual had to 
consciously commit himself to one of the opposing forces. After that commitment 
was made voluntarily, the chosen force could possess the individual to some 
degree, The UTs very carefully explained this process to the early priests who 
interpreted it and tried to pass it on to their followers. The rites of baptism 
were born.
The main battle was for what was to become known as the human soul.
Once an individual had committed himself, he opened a door so that an 
indefinable something (probably an undetectable mass of intelligent energy) 
could actually enter his body and exercise some control over his subconscious 
mind. This soul was directly linked with the superinteHigence and with all 
similar souls, thus making possible mental telepathy, prophetic dreams, and 
other wonders. In those thousands of cases in which this subconscious force 
lapsed over into the conscious mind, we find destructive fanaticism and 
obsession. If the controlling intelligence was Omega (antihuman), the stricken 
individual suffers from insanity or commits criminal actions, social disorders, 
and so on.
If this soul abandons the living body, total disorientation could conceivably 
result. The body might enter a mindless catatonic trance. Persons with an 
advanced soul could consciously eject it frotn their bodies for short periods 
and indulge in astral projection. The body would appear to be dead, or almost 
dead, during this period of desertion. In astral projection literature we are 
told about a silver cord which seems to connect the free flying soul with the 
sleeping body. If that cord is cut or broken, the soul can*t re-enter the body, 
and it dies or is possessed by an evil force. Astral pro­jectionists claim that 
sometimes when they return to their body,
they find a dark elemental engulfing it, trying to possess it during their 
absence, and they have to fight the evil thing off.
The validity of astral projection is debatable, of course. But let's suppose for 
a moment that it is a genuine phenomenon. If some people can project themselves 
consciously and remember the experi­ence, then it is also possible that many 
others project their souls while asleep. They're never aware that they're doing 
it. The liberated souls fly about, perhaps rendezvousing with other souls to 
receive orders or some programming process. If the soul is some kind of 
ultxahigh frequency energy, then it could be visible to some sensitive people as 
a blob of faint light in the night sky. In other words, some UFOs could be 
astral travellers!
Flying saucer contactees usually end up talking about souls and reincarnation 
(Karma): The UFO entities try to convey the truth about reincarnation to the 
people they approach. Not many of these people are able to properly interpret 
what they have been told. Sev­eral major religions, particularly in the Orient, 
are based upon the principles of reincarnation. In Tibet when a Dalai Lama dies, 
the priests go out and scour the mountains searching for a small child who 
possesses specific birthmarks and other things which identify him as the 
reincarnated High Lama. Sometimes the search goes on for years. When a likely 
prospect is finally found, several religious and personal articles are spread 
before him. If the child goes un­erringly for those items which had been owned 
by the dead Dalai Lama, he is declared the new ruler. This system works and has 
been in use for centuries.
There are hundreds of carefully investigated and authenticated cases of 
reincarnation. As might be expected, a majority of these occur in India and 
other countries where belief in Karma runs high. Usually, small children are 
involved. Such children recall completely their previous life in a distant 
village, and when investigators take them to that village, they recognize 
everything and everyone, have a tearful reunion with their former family, and 
are even able to de­scribe in detail how they died.
Actually, true reincarnation is impossible. Memory is stored by an electrical 
system in the brain, and when the brain dies, all memories are also cancelled 
out. Our personalities, egos, emotional structure, and memories are all part of 
the brain's complex circuitry. The brain dies very quickly - as soon as the 
oxygen supply is cut off. All of this circuitry dies with it, like a radio being 
turned oS. If the soul is merely a mass of high frequency energy, then it would 
not retain either memory or personality. When the body, or host dies, this mass
of energy would be liberated either to rejoin the main intelligence of which it 
is always a part or to find and possess a new host. It would not carry along any 
memory of its previous body or life. However, the computerlike superintelligence 
would have a complete memory o£ that other life stored within it. It could feed 
that information to another brain by channelling it through any soul at random. 
A person recalling a past life under hypnosis (there are thousands of cases of 
this) might actually just be tuning his subconscious into the central computer. 
There may be some subtle need on the intelli­gence's part to bring about 
interest and investigation into a specific past life. So the hypnotized person 
is fed the information.
In Oahspe we are told that all cases of reincarnation are the work of 
mischievous spirits known as engrafters. An engrafter swoops down on an 
uncommitted soul and possesses it, feeding a complete memory of a past life into 
the brain.
The main information passed along to contactees is simply that the human body 
provides a host for a fragment of this undefinable soul energy. The major 
religions have been telling us this for thou­sands of years, pointing out that 
the human race supplies the shells for souls. Man's ego has demanded that he 
embellish this truth by adding the belief that his pitiful personality is worthy 
of preser­vation and that his memories and personality go along with the soul. 
The Omega Group has made a game of this belief at millions of seances, happily 
posing as myriad souls of the dear departed.
Two or more intelligences are playing a game with us, vying for complete control 
of our bodies and souls, according to all occult and religious interpretations. 
It's a seesaw battle, and every possible kind of deception and deceit is being 
employed by both sides. They caa make us believe anything they want us to 
believe, thanks to our swollen egos and flimsy brains. They can make us see 
anything they want us to see, thanks to our narrow field of vision (we can only 
see a. .fragment of the electromagnetic spectrum) and their apparent ability to 
manipulate energy and physical matter.
The parahuman Serpent People of the past are still among us. They were probably 
worshipped by the builders of Stonehenge and the forgotten ridge-making cultures 
of South America. They directed us to multiply and seed the earth. Their 
manifestations and manipu­lations have generated thousands of cults, religions, 
and frames of reference.
In recent years hundreds of UFO contactees have been warned by the long-haired 
Venusians that our atomic experiments will lead to disaster* Could it be, as 
some have said, that atomic bombs not only
KII cities, but that they alsokill or disintegrate souk? lithe soul ia a 
fragment of energy Bilked to some greatei massof totsffigerrt energy, Then this 
anti-atomic-bomb posture of the ultraterrestnak could be defensive. The bomb at 
Hiroshima may have blown a hole in some other world beyond out space-time 
continuum… and a lot of moon food may have been lost in tie baraain.
CHAPTER TWELVE
THE DEMISE OF THE GODS
'If flying saucers are real,' the sceptics say, "why don't they contact us?"
The startling truth, as carefully recorded by the ancient histor­ians, is that 
the ultraterrestrials have always been in direct contact with millions of 
individuals and that they actually ruled directly over mankind for many years. 
In recent centuries their influence has become more subtle, but it is always 
there.
According to the traditions of many isolated peoples, the first great emperors 
in Asia were god-kings who came down from the sky, displayed amazing superhuman 
abilities, and took over. There was a veritable world-wide epidemic of these 
god-kings between 5000 and 1000 b.c. The mighty Osiris and Isis walked into the 
Egyptian valley out of nowhere and assumed command. The myths and legends of 
Greece, India, and South America describe their rule. They were taller and more 
imposing than the men of the time, with long blond hair, marble-like white skin, 
and remarkable powers which enabled them to perform miracles. They displayed 
brilliant judgement and wisdom and exercised remarkable organizational 
abilities. In most cases they chose to reside on the highest mountains and hills 
avail­able, commanding balls of fire and bolts of lightning and travelling about 
the skies in wonderful chariots.
In southern Europe Zeus and his court of phantom cohorts held forth for 
centuries. In India a multitude of gods and demons ap­peared and reappeared 
generation after generation. Others arrived on the scene and made lasting 
contributions to folklore from Iceland to Scandinavia. In Central America the 
legendary Quetzalcoatl ap­peared among the Toltecs. Me was a white man dressed 
in a long white robe covered with tiny red crosses. He wore a great beard and 
according to Toltec tradition introduced science and learning to the natives. 
After many years of benign rule he simply vanished, promis­ing to return again 
one day. When Cortes, the Spanish conquistador, landed in Mexico a thousand 
years later, the Indians greeted him with delight, believing that he was 
Quetzalcoatl. He took advantage of their superstition and sacked the Aztec 
empire.
Deep in the wasteland of western Australia the Aborigines still cling to the 
andent myths of the WonAjina and regard as sacred the petroglyphs carved into 
rocks depicting tall, robed figures. The Vfon-djina are supposedly a parahuman 
group who resided in Australia thousands of years ago.
Berosus, an ancient Babylonian priest, recorded the fascinating legend of 
Cannes, a remarkable creature who came up out of the waters of the Persian Gulf 
to educate early man. This legend "more nearly fulfils some of our criteria for 
a genuine contact myth', Dr Carl Sagan states in his Intelligent Life in the 
Universe. Berosus presumably 'had access to cuneiform and pictographic records 
dating back several thousand years before his time'. His work was translated 
into Greek and Latin and found its way into English in 1876. He quoted from 
Apollodorus, describing Oannes as a fishlike animal capable of speaking to men. 
The account explains:
This being in the daytime used to converse with men but took no food at that 
season; and he gave them an insight into letters and sciences and every kind of 
art. He taught them to consctruct houses, to found temples, to compile laws, and 
explained to them the principles of geometrical knowledge. He made them 
dis­tinguish the seeds of the earth and showed them how to collect fruits».. 
When the sun set, it was the custom of this Being to plunge again into the sea 
and abide all night in the deep; for he was amphibious.
Moses, of course, had another kind of encounter when he climbed to the summit of 
Mount Sinai and received orders and taws from the entity who settled there in a 
glowing cloud.
A central legend of the Hopi Indians concerns the Kachina Clan: a group of 
beings who were not people but 'spirits sent to give help and guidance, taking 
the forms of ordinary people*, according to Indian historian Frank Waters. The 
Hopi believe they came orig­inally from a Red City in the south and that their 
tribe was guided into what is now the southwestern United States by the Kachina 
Clan. These spirit beings taught the Hopis occult wisdom very simi­lar to the 
occult beliefs of the Europeans and Africans. Finally they departed, saying,
The time for us to go to our far-off planets and stars has not come yet. But it 
is time for us to leave you. We will go by our powers to a certain high 
mountain, which you will know, where we will await your messages of need… We are 
a spirit people,
and we will not be seen again by you or your people. But you must remember us by 
wearing our masks and our costumes at the proper ceremonial times. Those who do 
so must be only those persons who have acquired the knowledge and the wisdom we 
have taught you…
The indigenous natives of the Americas, Africa, and the Pacific all adopted 
ceremonial dress patterned after the garb of the ultra-terrestrials, Just as the 
robes and trappings of the early churches o£ the white man were patterned after 
the dress of the angels and gods who allegedly visited them. Traditionally, only 
the witch doctors and students of the arcane wisdom of the elementals were 
permitted to wear these garments and masks. The carefully laid out procedures 
for the ceremonies and rites of these early peoples were all dictated by these 
parahuman spirits. For thousands of years they quite literally had the entire 
human race dancing to their tunes. The impact of these beings upon the human 
race is indisputable. All human art began as part of our urge to pay tribute to 
them. The arts of painting and sculpture, the arts of drama and dance, and of 
course, the art of storytelling, were all products of that urge.
It has been impossible to adequately summarize even a fragment of this land of 
material here. Perhaps someday some scholar will systematically assemble all of 
these records and establish some order out of the chaos. The evidence is not as 
flimsy as this kind of sum­mary might make it seem.
Statues of strange. Oriental looking figures bearing a striking similarity to 
the appearance of our contemporary Men in Black have been found in the ruins of 
the Olmec civilization in Mexico. We really don't know very much about the 
Olmecs. The first traces of their'Iost culture were uncovered in 1939, when 
archaeologist Mat­thew Stirling found five gigantic basalt heads on the island 
of La Venta. These heads weigh from twenty to thirty tons each and are up to 
nine feet high. Each is wearing what looks like a football helmet. Since then, 
cities and irrigation systems dating back to at least 1200 b.c. have been 
discovered. An Olmec calendar carved into the stomach of an eight-inch jade 
statue begins with the year 3113 b.c. 'It is a masterpiece of mathematical and 
astronomical knowl­edge, and it was the Olmecs, not the Maya, who developed it," 
Jeanne Reinart noted in Science Digest in September 1967.
Archaeologists have come up with an interesting theory for the sexless 
Oriental-Eke statues. They suggest that the Olmecs worshipped deformed children 
and that the statues represent
Mongolian idiots. But would a people capable of creating a master­piece of a 
calendar worship abnortnal babies? The statues also fea­ture a distinctive cleft 
in their foreheads, and this falls in line with the third eye lore of European 
occultism, Tibetan beliefs, and even the mysticism of the Hop! Indians. The 
third eye is supposedly the part of the brain which is linked to ESP and cosmic 
consciousness -or direct communication with God.
The third eye symbol, an eye inside a triangle, is an ancient symbol for the 
deity found in many cultures from Egypt to Micron­esia. It appears on the Great 
Seal of the United States atop the pyramid (found on every dollar bill). The 
Kachina Clan taught the Hopis that an opening in the head existed so they could 
talk with God. At one time trcphination (cutting a hole in the skull was a 
common practice throughout the world, perhaps as part of some religious rite. 
Hundreds of trephinated skulls have been found in Europe, Asia, Africa, the 
Americas, and the Pacific islands. Many of them date back to 3000 b.c. Some show 
signs of healing, indicating that the patient must have survived what is even 
today an extremely delicate operation. Three hundred and seventy such skulls 
have been found in Europe, but the finest examples come from Peru. The very 
thought of thousands - or even millions - of early humans voluntary submitting 
to having holes bored in their skulls with primitive flint instruments is enough 
to make anyone's flesh crawl.
Some anthropologists speculate that trephination was used as a treatment to get 
rid of possessing spirits. But the universality of this very sophisticated 
operation makes this unlikely.
Were all those people seeking to open the door in their heads so they could 
communicate with the supernatural? If so, who or what taught the entire human 
race this process? And why?
In legend after legend from every part of the world we are told that early man 
was primitive and stagnant until the appearance of the god-kings. These 
mysterious beings introduced writing, laws, agriculture, and perhaps even the 
rudiments of stone building and medicine. The early peoples were so impressed 
and so grateful that they dedicated much of their time and effort to preserving 
images of the god-kings in great statues, temples, and monuments. In fact, many 
cultures left nothing behind except religious artifacts and carvings lovingly 
detailing their encounters wi£h the gods.
Identical beliefs appeared simultaneously in all parts of the world. Identical 
forms of writing suddenly came into practice among cul­tures completely isolated 
from each other. The Egyptians were not
the only ones who believed that the human body would one day be resurrected 
whole and that therefore all earthly possessions should be buried with it. 
Ancient tombs in China, Siberia, and South Am­erica were also filled with relics 
for a future life. How did this rela­tively complex concept spread to the four 
corners of the Earth?
Even the earliest of men were not so stupid that they could sustain a belief 
century after century without some kind of evidence to support it. Nor would 
they be so stupid as to expend their en­ergies, materials, and talents building 
great monuments to those beliefs without such evidence. Yet the reasonably 
sophisticated peoples of India and Greece believed wholeheartedly in their gods 
for thousands of years. Their records demonstrated that these gods ap­peared 
frequently before mortal men. taught them, tricked them, offered them hope and 
faith, and cultivated their religions and beliefs. Temples were erected on the 
spots where the gods had stood from Stonehenge to Delphi. Often the percipients 
were instructed to build a temple on this spot. Gold (atomic number - 79) has 
always • played an important role in all religions, and most religious 
build­ings are roofed with gold leaf from Buddhist temples to Muslim mosques and 
Christian cathedrals. Could it be that the mysterious rays of the ancients are 
somehow able to adjust more easily to the frequency of gold? On holy days a 
great part of the world's popu­lation gathers under these golden roofs to pray 
and meditate and perhaps to have their minds probed by some invisible 
concentration of energy,
The modern cults and sciences have seized upon the god-king legends to support 
their own beliefs and conclusions. Atlantologists prefer to thirik that 
Quetzalcoatl and his kin were really from At­lantis. The ufologists have churned 
out scores of books based on the premise that spacemen visited Earth and gave 
mankind a helping hand in those distant days. It is quite true that the Kachtea 
Clan and most of the other parahumans claimed some relationship to other worlds 
and far-off stars, particularly the Pleiades*
In all these legends there is another persistent theme: that the god-kings mated 
with mortal women, impregnated them and thus started a royal lineage. Tradition 
claims that the bluebloods of roy­alty actually had blue blood in their veins in 
early history, perhaps as a result of this crossbreeding. Even today some royal 
families suffer from haemophilia. The blood lacks the ability to coagulate and 
even a small cut becomes a serious wound.
The mating of ordinary women with supernatural beings is an integral part of all 
religious lore. It is emphasized in the Bible.
Some modern rulers such as the Emperor of Japan, still claim their family can be 
traced all the way back to a god-like ancestor. The phaiaoh system in Egypt 
could have begun in this fashion with the parahuman leader of the early 
Egyptians turning his rule over to a human offspring. By 1000 b.c. most of the 
god-kings had withdrawn, presumably going off to their legendary mountain 
hideways. Their followers assumed, however, that their human descendants were 
equally wise and possessed of magical powers. Being human, these fallible kings 
often exploited the fears and beliefs of their people. The later pharaohs 
successfully masqueraded as gods for centuries. The earth had been divided up by 
the god-kings, each ruling, even owning, a specific area. This ownership was 
passed on to the human heirs, and for thousands of years a few dozen families 
literally owned the entire planet. They intermarried and managed to keep the 
system going until modern times. Although the king system de­generated slowly, 
it did not really collapse until 1848.
The god-kings did not put alt their eggs in one basket. They estab­lished 
parallel systems of communication and control by establishing priesthoods and 
strange secret cults and societies whose main purpose was to perpetuate their 
esoteric teachings. But again the flaws in man's basic character eventually 
surfaced. Greed and the lust for power caused some of these groups to exploit 
the popu­laces. There were periods in history when some of these priesthoods and 
societies even gained political control in Egypt and elsewhere. It is probable 
that this happened in the burgeoning South American cultures and may even have 
led to the downfall of some of them.
A key claim of the early priesthoods was their purported ability to consult with 
the ultraterrestrials through the use of special plates, amulets, and crystals 
handed down to them. These artifacts were usually worn about the head and heart 
during religious ceremonies. In the apocryphal Protevangelion we are told that 
Joachim, father of the Virgin Mary, visited a priest and said,' "If the Lord be 
propitious to me, let the plate which is on the priest's forehead make it 
mani­fest." And he consulted the plate the priest wore and saw it and behold, 
sin was not found in him.' Such a plate is described In Exodus 28:36.
Early kings and dictators purportedly consulted with angels and supernatural 
beings who appeared frequently to advise them. His­torical records assert that 
everyone from Julius Caesar to Napoleon had meetings with mysterious parahumans 
who materialized and dematerialized mysteriously. The Sacred Crown of St Stephen 
is sup-
posed to have been delivered by an angel to a pope who permitted Stephen I to be 
crowned King of Hungary with it in 1001.
The mysterious Gipsies sometimes claim their amulets and crystal bails were 
given to them by ultraterrestrials. Numerous modern flying saucer contactees 
display tektites and pieces of quartz which they say were given to them by 
Vencsians, Mr Ralph Lael, a businessman in North Carolina who once ran for 
Congress, visited a cavern deep in Brown Mountain under the auspices of the 
space people, he says, and was later flown to Venus. He was given some chunks of 
crystal as proof of his claims.
When Joseph Smith dictated the Book of Mormon to his wife, he sat behind a 
screen with the gold plates, apparently translating them with the crystalline 
devices he had found in the stone box.
Modern UFO contactee writings are filled with enigmatic state­ments about 
crystals and how they hold some key to the mysteries of the universe. There are 
many interpretations of such statements, but no one has managed to crack their 
true meaning. In the past twenty years, however, crystals have suddenly assumed 
great im­portance to our technology. We call them transistors.
Although Fauwels and Bergier shrug off the UFO mystery in their The Dawn of 
Magic, they seem to subscribe to the cultlst belief that spacemen representing a 
superior technology once visited the Earth. They ofier their charming Cargo Cult 
Theory, speculating that early man's religious rites were actually based upon 
their observations of the strange behaviour of the god-kings. A god-king 
manipulated a radio and talked into a stick (microphone). Prestol A fleet of 
aerial vehicles soon arrived with supplies. After the departure of the 
god-kings, men tried to imitate them by chanting into sticks too, and so prayer 
was born.
This brings us full circle. The ultraterrestrials imitated the ap­pearance of 
man, and eventually man began to imitate them in his rites and ceremonies. We 
made masks and costumes duplicating their strange appearance. We hauled enormous 
rocks hundreds of miles and carved replicas of their features for our temples 
and cities. WhcJe civilizations of stone builders apparently committed 
them­selves entirely to the service of the god-kings and willingly sacrificed 
thousands of their own people in bloody ceremonies on the sacred hilltops in 
tribute to these beings. For many centuries human sacrifices played an important 
role in the religion of all the people of the Earth. In the Bible animal 
sacrifices are described. Even Ab­raham led his son to a mountain and prepared 
to kill him in sacrifice to the Etohim (the original biblical word, which is 
plural and means
gods; it has been given singular translation in the modem Bible).
The early priesthoods wielded considerable power. Oracles and mediums resided in 
the great temples, issuing accurate prophecies (and many inaccurate ones). It 
was a time of miracles and magic. The priests were the only educated men and as 
usual some were unscrupulous enough to turn a neat profit from the beliefs of 
the people. But gradually the old tried-and-true methods for com­municating with 
the ultraterrestrials began to fail. According to legend, there was great 
rivalry among the gods. False messengers betrayed the believers and caused all 
kinds of mischief. And around 500 B.C. a new force began to make its presence 
felt among men.
In India a wealthy young man named Siddhartha Gautama fell asleep under a tree, 
so the story goes, and when he awoke, he was filled with a great new philosophy 
- a new view of man's relation­ship to the cosmos. He renounced all his worldly 
goods and set forth to preach under the name of Buddha.
Around that same time a Persian named Zoroaster underwent a similar experience 
and founded a great religion. While in far-off China the great philosopher 
Lao-tse created Taoism and reshaped the thinking of the Orient along with 
another contemporary, Con­fucius. In the Middle East several of the biblical 
prophets, including Zachariah and Daniel, were conversing with supernatural 
entities and undergoing illuminating experiences. None of these men knew that 
the others even existed. Many centuries would pass before their independent 
ideas and teachings would spread and overlap. Yet in time these men, all 
contemporaries between 600 and 500 b.c, changed the philosophical and 
theological structure of the civilized world. Because of them that century 
stands as a landmark in the history of our planet.
So the old priesthoods deteriorated, some were slaughtered out­right, and new 
beliefs were born. These beliefs centred around the awareness that there was 
some force beyond the ultraterrestrials; that mankind was only part of a larger 
pattern; and that individuals were merely an extension of some distant, unknown 
intelligence. The stage was being set for a new conflict, a battle royal between 
the old gods and this Cosmic Consciousness. Muhammad appeared a thou­sand years 
later to lead the Arab people away from the old gods, rallying his people with 
the chant, There is but one God, and that God is Allah.*
Instead of simply disappearing under the wave of monotheism, the old priesthoods 
went underground, becoming secret societies de­voted to preserving the teachings 
of the clementals and the secrets
of communication. There was already a tangled maze of such so­cieties, such as 
the Druids mentioned earlier, so the ultraterrestrials had plenty of followers 
even into the newly enlightened age.
The Romans were still worshipping their gods on Mount Olympus, and the Hebrews 
were firm in their belief of Jehovah. Then one day three expensively robed 
gentlemen with Oriental features strode into the court of King Herod and 
informed him that a most remarkable child was about to be born somewhere in 
Judea. Meanwhile the angel Gabriel visited Mary and told her she was to bear 
this child. The three Orientals made their way to Bethlehem, accompanied by a 
brilliant glowing object in the sky.
Joseph left Mary in a cave, according to the Protevangelion while he went to 
seek a midwife to help with the birth. Then time stood still! Chapter Eight of 
the Protevangelion relates:
&#9632;But as I was going, [said Joseph] I looked up into the air, and I saw the 
clouds astonished, and the fowls of the air stopping in the. midst of the 
flight. And I looked towards the earth and saw a table spread and working people 
sitting around it, but theit hands were upon the table, and they did not move to 
eat. They who had meat in their mouths did not eat. And they who lifted them up 
to their mouths did not put anything in; but all their faces were fixed upwards. 
And I beheld sheep dispersed, and yet the sheep stood stilt. And the shepherd 
lifted up his hand to smite them, and his hand continued up. And I looked unto a 
river and saw the kids with their mouths close to the water and touching it, but 
they did not drink.'
Unbelievable though it may be, this paralysis of time is common in UFO and 
psychic lore. It is almost as if the world is frozen like a frame of a movie 
film projected on a screen. Time continues to flow only for the percipient.
When Joseph returned to the cave with a midwife, they found it filled with 
blinding light. The Christ child was born.
The birth, hie, and death of Christ had been prophesied centuries earlier. 
Brethren of the Qumran priesthood even established a regu­lar nightwatch, 
scanning the skies of Judea in expectation of some sign of the heavens. Although 
the exact birthdate of Christ remains a controversy, most theologians and 
scholars believe that it was sometime in the year 4 b.c. That year, according to 
the astrological records of the Qumran priests, 'a comet produced a heavenly 
spec­tacle,' and there was a fiery conjunction of several planets in the
zodiacal sign of Pisces. Pragmatists naturally assume that the Star of Bethlehem 
was that comet, and to followers of Velikovsky, it might have been the comet 
Venus.
Jesus1 appointed role seems to have been to try to lure the Hebrews ayvay from 
Jehovah to worship the supennind of the cosmos, the God of the Oriental 
Illumined Ones. In this he failed. The Jew$ had had considerable experience with 
miracles and false angels, and they viewed Christ with great suspicion. The 
Romans who occu­pied Judea were still worshipping their assortment of 
long-haired deities, so they also frowned upon the activities of this strangely 
persuasive man. However, the sequence of events surrounding the death of Christ 
provided proof enough to sway many into Christian beliefs and lay the foundation 
for the great Christian religions.
An eclipse of the sun threw the land into darkness as Christ hung suspended on 
the cross, A violent earthquake which claimed many lives followed. Pontius 
Pilate, the Roman governor of Judea, later collected the witnesses of these 
events and had them dictate to scribes what they had seen. This record was sent 
on to Rome. Pilate eventually committed suicide.
The body of Christ was placed in a cave, according to the histori­cal records, 
and a huge stone was rolled in place to seal the en­trance. Roman guards were 
stationed there to keep watch, They testified later:
There was a great voice in the heavens, and they saw the heavens open, and two 
men descend from thence with great light and approach the tomb. And that stone 
which was put at the door rolled of itself and made way in part; and the tomb 
was opened, and both young men entered in. When therefore those soldiers saw it, 
they awakened the centurion and the elders; for they too were hard by keeping 
guard. And as they had seen, again they see three men come forth from the tomb, 
and two of them were supporting one and a cross following them.
In other texts these two young men were described as wear­ing brilliantly white 
costumes, and the soldiers were reportedly paralysed 'like dead men", unable to 
move a muscle while the body of Christ was being removed. Later 'the heavens 
again were seen to open2 and a certain man to descend and enter the sepulchre*.
This certain man remained behind, for when the soldiers and fol­lowers of Christ 
approached the tomb, this being told them not to be
frightened and advised them that Christ had been taken or had risen.1
Here we have an extraordinary sequence of events and co­incidences. Natural 
catastrophes struck die exact area where Christ died, A group of witnesses heard 
a sound in the sky. saw a brilliant light, and were rendered immobile as two 
beings descended, entered the tomb, and removed the body. One entity remained 
behind to make sure that everyone knew what had happened. Later the ghost of 
Christ appeared before his disciples to further explain the concept of 
resurrection. A concept which, as has already been pointed out, can be traced 
back to the early Egyptian civilization.
Christ's ministry was brief, spanning only a few years. He travelled only a few 
hundred miles and spoke to only a few thousand people. Nevertheless, his impact 
upon human history is undeniable and immeasurable. Buddha and Lao-tse changed, 
the whole texture of life in the Orient, and then five hundred years later 
Christ wrought a similar change in the West.
A series of minor miracles, visitations, and supernatural mani­festations 
reforced the beliefs of the early Christians, and they wil­lingly died in Roman 
circuses for those beliefs. Then gradually the pure Christian concepts were 
absorbed into the established god-king system. A succession of religious wars 
swept the West, claiming the lives of millions. Opportunists and exploiters 
moved in as the Roman Empire collapsed (about a.d. 476), and the Dark Ages 
began. The biblical records were suppressed, censored, and distorted. Various 
churches openly controlled the kings of Europe and manipulated political 
affairs. By this time mankind had been misled so often by false prophets and 
mischievous ultraterrestrials that new en­counters on any level were harshly 
dealt with. When Joan of Arc [1412-31] rallied the French people under the 
guidance of super­natural voices during the Hundred Years' War, she was accused 
of sorcery and burned at the stake.
Radical developments in science and philosophy which ran con­trary to the 
accepted cosmologies of the time were regarded as the work of the devil. Galileo 
was imprisoned for daring to suggest that the Earth revolved around the sun.
1 Sources include: The Gospel of Nicodexnus: X; The lost Gospel According to 
Peter: Verses 9—13, Upton Clary Ewing, TJte Prophet of the Dead Sea Scrolls; The 
Report of Pontius Pilate, Governor of Judea. to Tiberius Caesar in Rome and Dr. 
Hugh Schonfield, The Passover Plot. The same story, very abridged, is found in 
the BiWe: St. Matthew 28; St Mark 16; St, Luke i4; and St Job;i 20.
European conquerors and missionaries went off to Africa, Asia, and the Americas, 
wanton]? destroying whole civilizations (such as the Incas) and deliberately 
disposing of their ancient records. Great nations were plundered for gold. Great 
and noble cultures were ob­literated. A large part of man's past was forever 
wiped away. It was humanity's darkest hour.
But despite the tenor of the Inquisitions and the vicious op­pression by the 
monarchies, the secret cults and societies survived, and fragments of the 
ancient teachings and beliefs were preserved. The day of the alchemist was at 
hand It finally came with stunning velocity in the nineteenth century,
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
THE SECRET OF THE AGES
Does your next-door neighbour make strange noises behind drawn shades late at 
night? Have you ever seen him wandering across a darkened cemetery dressed in a 
long robe, carrying a candle? Maybe he is just plain crazy. Then again, maybe he 
is a member of one of the thousands of secret societies and cults which still 
flourish every­where on this haunted planet. If these cults were not a permanent 
part of the human condition it is highly unlikely that Neil Arm­strong and Buzz 
Aldrin would have left their footprints on the moon. And it is equally unlikely 
that we would have been able to watch the event on a screen painted with moving 
electrons in our living rooms.
Many of the true secret cults, are founded upon rites designed to conjure up 
unearthly entities. Over the centuries various fugitives and defectors from 
these hidden organizations have published frag­ments of these rites and beliefs. 
There are hundreds of fascinating books available which spell out these strange 
truths. In addition, there is a wealth of so-catled inspired literature 
purportedly dictated by the entities themselves or produced through automatic 
writing. The previously mentioned Oahspe is one such book and was typed by a New 
York dentist, Dr John Ballou Newbrough, in 1880. It is an enormous work, 
offering a history of the human race plus a com­plicated cosmology which 
amazingly has proven to be at least par­tially valid. It describes, for example, 
the Van Allen Belt, a belt of radiation encircling the Earth which was not 
discovered until the advent of man-made satellites. It also contains long 
chapters de­scribing prehistoric secret societies.
There are isolated groups of rather paranoid researchers who make a hobby of 
investigating secret societies. Foremost of these are the superbuffs who believe 
that a super-secret government runs the entire world. The death rate of these 
researchers is unreasonably high, so their paranoia is understandable. Factions 
of the superbuffery overlap into ufology, the John Birch Society, and the 
assassination investigators. All fringe groups seem to overlap, even though they 
tend to ignore, and are even opposed to, each other.
Each secret society has its own vocabulary and explanations. Each has developed 
a system of lessons and degrees to educate its members slowly and lead them 
upwards to their own particular cosmic truth. Some of these organizations are 
dedicated to the devil and his work. Others are theologically oriented and aim 
at acquiring a closer relationship with God. The Orient is filled with such 
groups, ranging from the esoteric cultists in the Himalayas to the secret 
assassins of Persia and India. Advanced members of some of these groups 
allegedly possess powers of telepathy and astral projection. The lamas of Tibet 
are supposed to be able to whip up thought forms and elemental at will through 
sheer force of mind.
The Gipsies have a secretive habit of congregating on isolated hilltops to meet 
and converse with materializations. The Voodoo rites of Africa and Haiti also 
call upon such entities. In Voodoo demonic possession seems to be commonplace, 
and the zombie myths may have a solid basis in fact. Evil entities are 
supposedly called forth by the feared Voodoo priests to perform sinister deeds. 
Papa Doc Duvalier, the late President of Haiti, maintained power by fostering 
the belief that he directly controlled the Voodoo ele-mentals. Witch doctors of 
Africa and Juju practitioners in South America are also credited with the 
ability to summon up ultra-terrestrials and put them to work.
But the process works in reverse too, with the entities controlling their 
masters. The literature on secret societies describes many materializations of 
fearsome demons who frequently gave out orders, directing the cultists to commit 
acts of murder and political subversion. To disobey meant death, either at the 
hands of fellow members or the entity itself. Thus the ultraterrestrials are 
pre­sumably able to guide and control human events through evil men lusting for 
power.
A young Jordanian in California, Sirhan Sirhan, studied the Ro-sicrucian 
doctrines of inspired treatments of mysticism. He practised self-hypnosis and 
automatic writing, perhaps hoping to find a way to power and prestige. In any 
case, he ended up in a hotel kitchen with a smoking pistol in Ms hand and 
Senator Robert F. Kennedy stretched out at his feet. At his trial Sirhan claimed 
he had no memory of that fateful night after he entered the hotel. Witnesses 
said they had seen him talking briefly with a swarthy man who may have been a 
Mexican or an Oriental. While sitting in the courtroom, Sirhan spoke quietly of 
seeing celestial beings.
Fire usually plays an important role in secret rites. Rosicrucians practice 
staring at a candle flame, trying to make the flame obey
their will. In the rites of witchcraft the devil is said to materialize in a 
bonfire, stepping forward to have sexual intercourse with the witches. His 
penis, it is said, is always ice cold.
Sex is heavily intermixed with cuMst rites and beliefs, particularly in black 
magic and witchcraft. Moon Children are supposed to be produced when the devil 
or assorted demons have intercourse with human females. Apparently John Parsons 
and L. Ron Hubbard tried to produce a Moon Child in 1946. Aleister Crowley fired 
off an angry letter to the head of the American Magidc cult, saying, "Parsons or 
Hubbard or somebody is producing a Moon Child. I get fairly frantic when I 
contemplate the idiocy of these louts…' According to legend, Moon Children grow 
into exceptionally evil adults with extraordinary powers. This does not apply of 
course to astrological Moon Children born under the sign of Cancer (June 22-July 
22).
In ufology lore there exist several reports from different parts of the world 
describing how young men were taken aboard flying saucers and invited to have 
sexual intercourse with blonde space-women with long fingers and Oriental 
features. This appears to be a variation of the Moon Children and succubus 
phenomenon so well known in religious and occult lore.
The reverse of this is the equally well-known incubus, or demon lover, who 
forces his attentions on sleeping females. There are UFO cases of this also. A 
California schoolteacher, Cordelia Donovan, claims that in 1966 she met a man in 
a long white robe who kid­napped her in a black Cadillac and gassed her. When 
she awoke, she was aboard a flying saucer, where she was raped by a well-endowed 
spaceman.1 There are innumerable rumours of space babies being born in England, 
Australia, South America, Mexico, and the United States. Such stories have had 
great impact on some UFO cultists who fear that the flying saucer fiends are 
engaged in a massive biological experiment - creating a hybrid race which will 
eventually take over the earth.
Theologians and psychiatrists have been trying to cope with the incubus-succubus 
phenomena for years, but no reasonable medical or psychological explanation has 
been developed. Many cases can be found in the psychiatric and occult 
literature, and author Brad Stei-ger cites dozens in his two books. Sex and the 
Supernatural and Haunted Lovers.
The long-fingered, blond elementals have intruded into every aspect of human 
existence, even including sex. Male and female
* The full details of her incredible story are related by Jan Hudson, tho$e Se*y 
Saucer People.
cultists have apparently been submitting their persons to these lascivious 
spirits for millennia. They came to us first with the flutter of angels* wings. 
Now they rape us aboard flying saucers. The game remains the same, only the 
outward trappings have changes.
Rites to rouse the elemental^ have endured century after century. If they didn't 
work, they would have eventually been abandoned. Apparently they do work for 
somebody… and those who have results write more forbidden books to perpetuate 
the practices.
There is Black Magic and White Magic. The Black Magicians sup­posedly control, 
or are controlled by, evil entities. The White Ma­gicians summon up angels and 
good guys. Tradition has it that the two groups have been in continual conflict 
throughout history, con­stantly waging magical war upon one another.
One of the standard rites for materializing an angel requires the services of a 
child aged six to eight. An altar is set up, candles are lighted, the child 
kneels, and the magician chants certain prayers meant to call up the invisible 
forces around us. The ceremony is repeated for three days near an open window. 
The elemental is said to appear at the window in a blaze of light, and magicians 
are warned not to get too close, lest they come down with nausea, actinic burns, 
and other ailments identical to those reported by low level UFO witnesses.
The descriptions of the gods of the ancient world often included similar 
warnings. It was supposed to be dangerous, if not fatal, to look directly at a 
god. Perhaps because some of these material­izations are composed of pure 
electromagnetic energy and radiate massive doses of X-rays, gamma rays, and 
ultraviolet rays. Such rays would produce the above medical effects. 
Conjunctivitis, an inflammation of the eyes, is a commonly observed effect among 
UFO witnesses.
Both the literature of the secret societies and the more readily available 
general occult literature warn about the hazards of these practices. Poorly 
informed, emotionally unstable practitioners can be overwhelmed by the forces 
they unleash. The blundering amateur wizard can become possessed or driven 
insane or experience elabor­ate hallucinations for extended periods. All kinds 
of weird mani­festations can descend on him, ranging from poltergeists to 
violent physical attacks by invisible hands. These classic psychic attacks are 
very similar to the problems suffered by some innocent UFO wit­nesses and 
contactees after their sightings begin. The two phenom­ena seem to be inexorably 
linked *
Modern science, with its obsession about the physical universe
and the physical laws which run it, is only about three hundred years old. 80 
per cent of all the scientists who ever lived are living at this moment, 
although in truth, most of them are technologists and engineers rather then pure 
scientists. But that's a point too minor to debate. Science was successfully 
suppressed throughout the Dark Ages and even into the seventeenth century 
(remember Galileo). But another kind of science did exist.
The science of magic.
Ironically, magical beliefs of the past five thousand years are based upon the 
same principles which rule modern scientific thought: the study of atomic 
structure and electromagnetic energy. Astrology, the forerunner of astronomy, 
was a highly advanced science thousands of years ago. Some of the ancient 
calendars and , records are so accurate and so detailed that there has been 
specu­lation that the ancient astrologers may have had telescopes and ether 
sophisticated instruments. If they didn't, then they must have received some 
help and guidance from someone who understood the structure of the universe. The 
early astrologers were, of course, priests and magicians. They systematically 
catalogued the visible objects in the heavens, naming them, and interpreting 
their influence on man and human events. Astrology became the first mathematical 
science.
While the astrologers were putting mathematics to work, other men were delving 
into the mysteries of the physical planet Earth, cataloguing metals, elements, 
and chemicals, and learning how to combine them into new forms. They were the 
alchemists: the sor­cerers" apprentices. They dreamed of finding some way of 
turning' lead into gold. During some periods in history the alchemists were 
supported by kings, while in other periods they were the victims of 
superstitious purges which forced them underground. Their secret societies 
preserved and circulated hundreds of manuscripts which were half science and 
half mysticism. Many alchemists first entered the field after encounters with 
ultraterrestrials and became the proud, if furtive, predecessors of men like 
Cyrus Teed.
Men who were students of astrology, alchemy, and magic all at once served as the 
educated elite during long periods of history, acting as priests, scientists, 
and educators. Some of them also be­longed to another elite group, the master 
stonemasons, and they Were able to put their polyglot knowledge to work by 
designing the jpreat stone monuments and engineering the methods by which they 
were built. In time these master stonemasons formed a fraternity to preserve 
their occult secrets and to assist one another as they
wandered from place to place seeking work. This was the beginning of the Masonic 
Order. As the centuries passed, the Order expanded to include businessmen, 
educators, and leaders.
Although the modern Masonic movement is looked upon with some suspicion by the 
various buff groups, the ufologists delight in pointing out that most of the men 
who signed the Declaration of Independence were Masons, as was Joseph Smith, 
founder of the Mormon religion, Masonic lore has found its way into many of our 
governmental symbols and institutions, including the Great Seal of The United 
States which bears the slogan. Novas Ordo Sectorum, *A New Order for the Ages*. 
The design for the Great Seal is supposed to have been handed to Thomas 
Jefferson in his garden one night by a mysterious stranger dressed in a cape 
with a hood over his head.
The superbuffs have scuffled through history books to try to pin­point the 
origin and location of the fabled super-government and the identities of its 
members. One group believes they are key indus­trialists (particularly munitions 
makers) and bankers. Others have produced dozens of books advocating 
anti-Semitism and claiming that a secret inner circle of Jews has been working 
for generations on a plan to take over the world. One of the most vicious and 
most successful racist books ever written came out of Russia in the last century 
and is called The Protocols of the Elders of Zion. This obvious hoax purports to 
be the Jewish master plan for gaining control of the world's gold and the press. 
Oddly enough, Adolf Hitler seems to have used Protocols as a guidebook in his 
bid for power. Jewish cultists have fought back with their claim that a Catholic 
conspiracy exists. Jesuit priests are a favourite target of this group. It is a 
fact that the Jesuits (the Society of Jesus) engaged in so many political 
conspiracies in the eighteenth century that the Vatican was compelled to 
dissolve the order in 1773. It was reestablished in 1814. Today the order is 
largely confined to running schools such as Georgetown University in Washington 
D.C.
Following World War II, men like J. Edgar Hoover and the late Senator Joseph 
McCarthy gave impetus to the public paranoia over the Communist Conspiracy. This 
was partly based upon the spread of left wing beliefs during the social unrest 
of the 1930s, when intel­lectuals and working men embraced, temporarily, the 
Communist ideology. It was based partly upon Joseph Stalin's mad machinations in 
the early days of the Cold War, The gradual thaw that followed Stalin's death 
and the public revelations of his outrageous purges ultimately broke the 
Communist Party in the United States. The numerous organizations and buff groups 
that had been dedicated to
combating the partly real and partly illusory Communist threat began to flounder 
and look around for a new cause.
They found it when in his final speech as President, Dwight Eisenhower issued a 
guarded warning about the growth of what he termed 'the military-industrial 
complex.* The assorted buff groups scurried back to the earlier literature on 
the super-government. They extended Ike's warning to include rehgion and came up 
with the religious-military-industrial conspiracy - a plot against humanity 
which supposedly included the churches - (notably the Catholic church), the 
Pentagon, and the huge* industries which were churn­ing out weapons that have 
never been used.
By the end of the 1960s our social and political problems had generated a whole 
maze of new supposed conspiracies. The extreme right and left wings found 
themselves in the absurd position of ad­vocating the same beliefs and fears. 
Everything from sex education to the fluoridation of water became an issue 
within the context of their beliefs. As they stumbled about searching for a new 
explana­tion behind the universal madness, many of these groups, ranging from 
the John Birch Society to our youth subculture - the Hippie movement - 
rediscovered the ffiuminati. The Communist Conspiracy was nearly forgotten as 
everyone went after the Illuminati.
Do the Illuminati even exist? It is very unlikely. The buff groups have confused 
some of the earlier secret societies with the process of mystical illumination. 
Illumined individuals, like water, tend to seek their own level and associate 
with their own kind. Often they with­draw from society altogether, the ascetics 
of India being one example.
There is another form of pseudo-Illumination, however, which is actually a form 
of demonic possession and frequently produces re­ligious fanatics. A majority of 
all the political assassinations in his­tory were committed by victims of this. 
John Wilkes Booth and his nine fellow conspirators are a prime example, as were 
Leon Czolgosz, who gunned down President McKinley in 1901; the young student who 
assassinated Archduke Franz Ferdinand of Austria in 1914, thus launching World 
War I; and most recently Benjamin Mendoza y Amor, the Bolivian artist who 
attacked Pope Paul with a knife on November 26,1970. Witnesses said that the 
latter would-be assassin 'looked like he was having an epileptic fit' - one of 
the classic symp­toms of possession.
Some buff groups regard these maniacal killers as tools of the sinister 
Illuminati who have been pressed into service by hypnosis or some other 
brainwashing technique. They are quick to point out
- that Jack Ruby pulled his gun and shot down Lee Harvey Oswald after being 
triggered by an auto horn which suddenly beeped in the basement of the Dallas 
police station. (No one has ever determined who blew that horn or why.) Ruby 
claimed to Ms dying day that he had no memory of entering the police station or 
firing the shot.
like many major myths, the Illuminati legend began in.the Orient. Around 275 
B.C., Asoka, the Emperor of India, is supposed to have founded the supersecret 
society of the Nine Unknown Men. This group was founded to collect, study, and 
protect the secrets of the occult, science, alchemy, astrology, and psychology. 
As late as 1927 Talbot Mundy, a specialist in Oriental lore, was writing about 
the mysterious Nine, implying that the society still existed and was still 
running things from far behind the scenes.
In the tenth century young men were enticed into Persia's cult of the assassins 
by drugs and beautiful young ladies. Pounded by Sabah, the old man of the 
mountains who was purportedly one of the mystic Nine, the cult conducted a reign 
of terror which con­tinued into this century. It may in fact still exist. They 
had tremen­dous political influence during various periods of history. The 
brainwashed, dragged members of the cult carried out their orders blindly, even 
when those orders were suicidal.
A similar cult appeared in Afghanistan in the sixteenth century. This was known 
as the Roshaniya - the Illuminated Ones. like the Hashishim assassin cult of 
Persia, the Roshaniya appears to have been inspired by a. prophet in 
communication with the ultra-terrestrials. It began as a mystical order which 
quickly degenerated into a band of blind, drugged, mentally controlled 
murderers. They raised a lot of hell in Afghanistan for several generations, and 
their secret teachings spread into Europe. The Alumbrados - the Illumi­nated 
Ones of Spain - appeared around 1600, In France the Gueri-nets, another branch 
of the IHuminati, caused some excitement in 1654. A professor of canon law at 
Ingolstadt University in Bavaria, Adam Weishauptj founded the German Illuminati 
in the seventeeth century.
One of the stated purposes of the Illuminati was to take over the world and 
establish a New Order that was basically anti-religious. They wanted to get rid 
of the archaic god-king system and all the tyranny that went along with it. This 
was naturally a very un­popular concept with the established authorities, and 
great efforts were made to track down and execute the members of the cult. By 
the late 1700s the movement had been effectively crushed.
And the persistent legend of the Illuminati was born.
They had tried at one point to infiltrate and take over the Free­masons, and 
this gave rise to the still prevalent belief (in some quar­ters) that the Masons 
are actually a wing of the Ilhiminati. Following the American Revolution a vast 
amount of literature ap­peared claiming that the United States was actually part 
of the Illuminati Plot and had been founded by secret members of the cult. The 
Bill of Rights was in fact a very radical document for the period with its 
insistence that all men are created equal, that there should be freedom of 
religion, and that the affairs of man should be governed by men elected to 
office. The Illuminati Conspiracy at­tracted the same kind of attention in the 
early ISOOs as the Commu­nist conspiracy did in the 1950s.
A French book, La Secte des Illumines, published in the 1790s presented a 
description of the Illuminati initiation rites:
On the day of his initiation, the candidate was conducted through a long, dark 
passage into an immense hall draped with black . ^. Ghostly forms moved through 
the hall, leaving behind them a foul odor… His clothes were .removed and laid 
upon a funeral pyre. Then his pudenda [genitals] were tied with string… Now five 
horrid and frightening figures, bloodstained and mum­bling, approached him and 
threw themselves down in prayer. After an hour sounds of weeping were heard, the 
funeral pyre started to burn, and his clothes were consumed. From the flames of 
this fire* a huge and almost transparent form arose, while the five prostrate 
figures went into terrible convulsions. Now came the voice of an invisible 
hierophant [priest], booming from somewhere below…
This was of course a typical magical rite - the rousing of an elemental. Most of 
the secret cults of ancient and modern times are centred around such rites. Most 
of them have preserved the same truths throughout history with numerous 
variations. These same troths were accepted by all the assorted priesthoods and 
religious orders also, and all the early kings were trained to understand and • 
accept them. They also formed the basis for the sciences of astrol­ogy, alchemy, 
witchcraft, and Black Magic. Terminology difiered from group to group; each had 
a different label for the various aspects, but they all believed - and still 
believe - in these basic supernatural facts.
The first and most important secret that has beea carefully guarded and withheld 
from the public at large is that two or mere
worlds exist, composed of different forms of matter but occupying the same 
space. Fait of the teachings of all cults includes elaborate definitions of 
these different forms of matter. When the nonsensical terms are translated into 
modern terminology, it is apparent that these teachings are concerned with 
advanced physics, nuclear energy, atomic structure, and things which have only 
recently been discovered by modern science. Electrical energy is also discussed 
at great length in terms of vibrations, and this material can be easily 
translated into contemporary terms of wave lengths and frequencies. Ancient man 
knew that smashing the atom yields pure energy. He knew that human eyes could 
only see a tiny portion of the electro­magnetic spectrum (visible light), and he 
believed that other worlds or realities existed beyond the limitations of his 
sight.
Spectre, the ancient word for ghostly apparition, sprang from spectrum. Early 
peoples observed that these objects or entities were able to reflect or cast off 
light wavelengths from the entire visible spectrum from violet at one end to red 
at the other. They knew they were seeing transmogrifications of electrical 
energy. Countless modern UFO reports describe these same colour changes. UFOs 
often appear first as a purplish blob and then descend the visible scale until 
they turn red, at which point they sometimes solidify into seemingly material 
objects. This process is fully explored in the an­cient literature.
Dualism, particularly stressed in the Orient, separates the world of the mind 
from the world of the physical. It is believed that the human mind and 
consciousness are merely a part of a larger univer­sal mind and that with proper 
training and study we can learn to tap that universal mind. On the simplest 
level the masses try to do this with prayer. On the more esoteric level of the 
cults it is taught that the mind can be made powerful enough to manipulate 
atomic energy and thus control the material world. One of the great secrets is 
that if a man can learn to visualize, say a chair, and can form every atom of 
that chair in his imagination, he can actually cause a physical chair to 
materialize. Or working in reverse, he can de-materialize a physical object. 
Such thought forms even include ani­mated entities. So the rites of magic are 
aimed at concentrating the energy of human minds on a specific point in space 
and literally wishing a being to appear. In tieory the minds would be forcing 
electrical energy to assume visible, physical form.
The infringement of the other worlds beyond the visible is the cornerstone of 
occult belief. The inhabitants of those other dim­ensions can supposedly 
manipulate energy much more easily than we
can. They can enter our dimension or reality and assume temporary physical farm. 
Same can do this on their own. Others require the assistance of human minds 
before they can materialize. The secret cults have happily supplied this service 
for thousands of years. Today there is a worldwide revival of witchcraft. Some 
American high schools and colleges are even conducting courses in witchcraft. 
The ultraterrestrials must be having a field day 1
Early man was quite convinced that these invisible worlds existed. This led him 
to the secret of the ages: the belief that mankind was actually controlled by 
the inhabitants of these other planes or dim­ensions. The modes of control 
became the chief concern of the cul-tists, magicians, and priesthoods. Political 
and religious structures were set up to facilitate that control, as 'tye have 
already pointed out.
Dr Gordon Allen, an aerospace scientist, summarized a lifetime of study into 
these matters in his book. Enigma Fantastique:
The purpose today is identical to the purpose in the times of the 
magician-scientists of ancient times, the purpose of the con­trolling priesthood 
of the Egyptians, the Caesars, the Roman Catholic church, the Inquisition. The 
ecclesiastic control of tie various ruling families had for its purpose the rule 
of the people in their material bodies on this earth-plane.
A nation is said by Eastern philosophers to lie under certain occult (or secret) 
controls. Nations who go to war on the earth-plane reflect certain wars in 
Heaven.
It is true that the Masonic founders of the United States knew of this occult 
control and even something of their own mission. Ruling families of Europe knew 
of this occult control and believed themselves in power by divine right, but 
occult control was secret and not discussed by historians or political writers 
until just the last few years,
All of this may be absolute nonsense, but we cannot overlook the unhappy fact 
that these truths were completely believed for thou­sands of years by the 
leaders of the world and therefore had an appalling influence over human events 
and destiny. Bloody religious wars were fought for centuries as the different 
religions attempted to gain total domination of the known world.
Even worse, man's own record of his early history was sys­tematically destroyed 
by the conflicting factions. The library at Alex­andria, Egypt, which housed 
thousands of years of history was sacked and burned The remnants of early 
cultures were wantonly
destroyed. And then we were given a new history, generously dic­tated by the 
ultraterrestrials, and we bogged down in the Dark Ages for a thousand years. The 
human race quite willingly turned itself Qver to the ultraterrestrials.
It was not until the nineteenth century that we began to claw our way out from 
under occult rule. In 1848 the whole world exploded. There were more than fifty 
major revolutions. Spiritualism was born that year in Wayne County, New York, 
when two teenaged girls -the Fox sisters - learned to communicate with a rapping 
poltergeist. The Communist Manifesto was published. Kings were dethroned. There 
were major political assassinations just as mysterious as the murder of 
President Kennedy. The first Woman's Suffrage Movement got underway in Seneca 
Falls, New York. The whole world was sud­denly in upheaval. A host of brilliant 
inventors and scientists sud­denly appeared simultaneously, and the great 
Industrial and Scientific Revolutions got underway. (Thomas Edison was born in 
1847.) Mankind hurtled into a fantastic hundred-year period that saw the rapid 
development of steam-boats, railroads, aeroplanes, and finally the atomic bomb. 
Social structures everywhere were sud­denly revised.
Ironically, the feared goals of the seventeenth century Illuminali have now 
become a reality to millions of people. Red China and the Soviet Union have gone 
to an extreme, suppressing religion and carving out totalitarian states that 
appear to be steps towards robotizing the human race.
But the technological advances and the conflict of political ideo­logies are 
insignificant when compared to the amazing revolution of the mind which has 
taken place - almost unnoticed - in the past decade. The secret cults of the 
past have been replaced by the eerie mysticism of the LSD cults and the Hippie 
movement Young people everywhere are turning to witchcraft and Black Magic and 
engaging in a sophisticated form of occultism which attempts to link their minds 
with the Cosmic Consciousness.
It is easy to see why some buffs and cults are viewing all this with alarm and 
trying to blame the mythical Nine Unknown Men or II-luminati. Anyone who studies 
history carefully can detect the pre­sence of some outside influence - an 
influence that has largely been detrimental, even sinister. Yet the ancient gods 
and the modern Brothers from space have come to us in a benevolent guise. They 
have never practised what they preached.
To support our outrageous hypothesis we must make two basic
assumptions: (1) That the ultraterrestxidls are teal in some manner and are not 
merely a psychological phenomenon or myth. (2) That the UTs have a need for 
communicating with us. If such a need exists, then it would be logical for them 
to create secret societies or even a whole race of people to carry out their 
wishes. To be truly effective, such a race would have to be clannish and aloof 
from the societies in which it moved. They would, undoubtedly, be so strange and 
furtive that outsiders would soon surround them with legends and nonsense.
A group like this does exist. They are spread all over the world. We call them 
Gipsies. The ultimate secret society.
Nobody really knows where the Gipsies come from, not even the Gipsies 
themselves! Some tribes have advanced the notion that they somehow came from the 
sky. We do know that no Gipsies existed before their sudden appearance in Europe 
in the fourteenth century. They identified themselves as Dukes of Egypt. They 
quickly estab­lished themselves as remarkable magicians and clairvoyants and 
were regarded as the fulfilment of EteMel's prophecy, 'I shall scatter the 
Egyptians among the nations'. Their talents for sorcery and for­tune-telling led 
to the creation of a whole body of myth. Even the modern Washington seer, Jeane 
Dixon, claims that a wandering Gipsy ladypresented herwith her first crystal 
ball when she was eight.
Gipsies have their own language, which is derived from Hindi and Tibetan. They 
apparently have no racial ties with the Egyptians at all but probably came from 
India and Afghanistan originally. In February 1968 a Gipsy tribe established a 
government-in-exile in Paris to demand payment of reparations from the Germans 
for what they suffered in World War n, claiming that four million Gipsies had 
perished in Hitler's death camps. They also announced their plans to 
re-establish Romanistan where Somaliland is today. They even sought United 
Nations recognition.
An estimated two million Gipsies now live in the United States, so they 
outnumber the surviving Indians by a large margin. But they are a silent 
minority, remaining by themselves, keeping their chil­dren out of pubEc schools, 
and suffering constant persecution with­out complaint. Gipsies do not use the 
mails or telephones, yet when a prominent Gipsy dies, the word seems to spread 
instantly, and tribes from all over the country converge for the funeral. They 
pay no income taxes, even though some tribes seem to have accrued considerable 
wealth and ride about in big black Cadillacs.
The Gipsy religion is a curious mixture of witchcraft, Black Magic, and 
elementalism. Periodically, all the Gipsies will spring into their
Cadillacs in the middle of the night and drive off to some isolated forest or 
hilltop where, according to reliable sources, they converse with 
materializations. Gipsies also have a curious habit of turning up in Window 
areas during UFO flaps.
Morris K. Jessup caused the Gipsies to become part of the UFO lore in the 1950s, 
when he received a series of strange letters from one Carlos Allende. A couple 
of these letters were released to the UFO buffs and have been a source of 
controversy ever since, In 1955 a paperback copy of Jessup's The Case for the 
UFO arrived in the mail at the Office of Naval Research (ONR). The pages of the 
book were covered with marginal notes pencilled in by three different hands. 
These comments indicated that the anonymous writers were extremely knowledgeable 
in UFO matters and made a number of pointed references which suggested they were 
Gipsies. Although Jessup himself dismissed the annotations as some kind of hoax, 
the ONR was so impressed that they had the whole book retyped and reproduced 
with the marginal notes printed in different colours. The reproduction was 
prepared for the Navy by the Varo Corporation in Garland, Texas. One of 
Allende's letters to Jessup, dated January 13th, 1956, was postmarked in 
Gainesville, Texas, which is about sixty miles north of Garland. Only a few 
hundred copies of this Varo ' edition were printed, and they were carefully 
distributed to a select few within the Navy. Since it has always been almost 
unobtainable, very few UFO buffs have ever even seen this interesting document.
The annotations discuss the Great Ark (which supposedly circles Jupiter and has 
already been discussed) and try to answer some of the questions Jessup raised in 
his book. Jessup was found dead in his automobile in Dade County Park near Coral 
Gables, Florida, on April 20,1959 - an apparent suicide. But Carlos Allende has 
gone marching on,
A fantastic array of Allende imposteis have turned up over the years to bedevil 
and bewilder the UFO buffs. He has managed to turn up in several different 
states at the same time. All kinds of letters and phone calls have been received 
by buffs in his name. Those who claim to have met him describe him as a swarthy 
man of Cuban or Spanish extraction. He rides around in a black Cadillac, of 
course. Until the late 1960s Allende was nothing more than a myth bandied about 
in very limited UFO buff circles. Then author Brad Steiger obtained a 
photostated copy of the Varo edition and used it as the basis of an article in 
Saga magazine. He was instantly in­undated with new AJlende letters and even a 
letter from a woman claiming to be Allende's widow.
In 1969 a man claiming to be Carlos Allende visited the Lorenzens, who operate 
the civilian UFO research group, APRO, in Tucson, Ar­izona. He presented them 
with an original copy of the Vaio pub­lication. How he managed to acquire the 
copy was not determined. (The real Allende, if there is a real Allende, would 
not have had access to a copy.)
Other mystery men oE the Allende type have haunted the UFO researchers for 
years. La the early 1960s a man calling himself Zdeen Alexander toured the 
United States, amusing some flying saucer en­thusiasts and terrifying others. He 
answered to the usual descrip­tion. Some buffs claimed he was able to disappear 
in front of their eyes. He visited prominent ufologists in New York and offered 
to finance a newsstand UFO publication. In California he predicted the 
appearance of UFOs in Santa Barbara, and those predictions came true. After 
shaking everyone up, he simply dropped from sight.
The next mystery man appeared in Boulder, Colorado, during tie Colorado 
University UFO research project. He arrived in a chauffeur-driven Cadillac, 
inarched straight into the office of Dr Edward U. Condon, head of the project, 
and announced that he was Mr Dixsun and represented the Seventh Universe. He 
was, of course, a swarthy little man wearing dark glasses. He offered to help Dr 
Condon contact the space people, provided he received a substantial amount of 
money. Condon was not exactly enthused, so Mr Dixsun got into his Cadillac and 
drove off to rendezvous with Mr Alexander and Mr Allende.
It is likely that some of these characters were actually Gipsies playing some 
little game of their own. Many of these hoaxes were very complicated and 
expensive, and the perpetrators obviously had both imagination and a sense of 
humour. Flying saucer enthusiasts are notably lacking in these qualifications. 
But why would anyone bother to spend inordinate amounts of time and money 
contriving and executing elaborate pranks against random cultists?
The answer seems to be that believers have always been dished up manifestations 
which appeared to support their beliefs. Believe in the devil and he will 
appear, the old saying goes. An even older saying, dating back to the dawn of 
history, states that those whom the gods wish to destroy they first make mad.
An ancient madness is overtaking the human race in these closing years of the 
twentieth century.
'Why don't they contact us?' the sceptics ask.
It might be better for us to ask, 'Why didn't they leave us alone?'
PART THREE
Alice laughed. There's no use trying,' she said, 'one can't believe impossible 
things.*
*I daresay you haven't had much practice,' said the Queen. 'When I was younger* 
I always did it for half an hour a day. Why, sometimes I've believed as many as 
six impossible things before breakfast.'
—Lewis Carroll, Through the Looking Ottos
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
'HELLO, CENTRAL. GIVE ME GANYMEDE'
High on a bleak mountainside 6,000 feet above sea level outside of Colorado 
Springs, Colorado, a weird looking tower Jutted 135 feet into the air in the 
summer of 1899. It was designed and erected by a tall, gaunt man named Nikola 
Tesla - the now forgotten genius who perfected alternating current and whose 
many contributions to our electrical age are almost inestimable. Thomas Alva 
Edison walked away with most of the glory, and Tesla ended up a burnt-out 
eccen­tric alone and ignored in a dingy Manhattan hotel room. But while the 
spark was in him it shed a blinding glare.1
That summer, using thirty thousand dollars given to him by Colonel John Jacob 
Astor,, Nikola Tesla was experimenting with radio. He had built a powerful 
transmitter and receiver and was trying to develop a method for broadcasting 
electrical energy through the air to eliminate the need for expensive wiring 
systems. Energy that could run motors and light lamps. He succeeded at least 
partially, for the lights and equipment in his later laboratories worked without 
wiring. * "
Thousands of miles away a young man named Marconi was also toying with batteries 
and coils. That summer Marconi managed to broadcast the letter V (three dots and 
a dash) to a crude receiver operated by his assistants less than fifty miles 
away. These were the only operable radios on the planet Earth.
But somewhere there must have been a third transmitter.
One night while Tesla was working alone in his mountain lab, his equipment 
suddenly came to life, and he received an apparently intelligent signal, though 
indecipherable. 1 was familiar, of course, with such electrical disturbances as 
are produced by the sun, Aurora Borealis, and earth currents,' he later wrote, 
'and I was as sure as I could be of any fact that these varations were due to 
none of these causes. *. The feeling is constantly growing on me that I had been 
the first to hear the greeting of one planet to another,*
Tesla became the first scientist to intercept the mysterious intel­ligently 
organized radio waves which permeate our planet and have
1 See Joihn J. ©'Neil's Mogtaphy. Prodigul Genius, Neville Spearman.
baffled generations of scientists. He was a very odd man. sexless, and mystical. 
In 1900 he told a reporter, 'We cannot even with positive assurance assert that 
some of them [ultraterrestrials] might not be present here in this our world in 
tie very midst of us. for their constitution and life manifestations may be such 
that we are unable to perceive them.'
He amplified this in 1921 when American Magazine quoted him:
During my boyhood I suffered from a particular affliction due to the appearances 
of images, which were often accompanied by strong flashes of light. When a word 
was spoken, the image of the object designated would present itself so vividly 
to my vision that I could not tell whether what I saw was real or not… Even 
though I reached out and passed my hand through the image, it would remain fixed 
in space,
Two years after Tesla's Colorado experiments, Marconi broadcast the letter S 
{three dots) across the Atlantic, and a new era of com­munications was born. 
From the very beginning radio operators throughout the world received signals 
which no one could identify or understand. Some of these signals were so strong 
they seemed to be originating only a mile or two from the receiver, and they 
drowned out all other signals. The only identifiable thing about these 
enig­matic messages was the repetitive transmission of the letter v. Mar­coni 
reported that stations of his company on both sides of the Atlantic picked up 
these pirate signals even before World War I. la 1921 Marconi stated flatly that 
he believed that the signals were coming from another civilization from 
somewhere in space.
By the time 1924 rolled around signals from Mars were a popular theme in the 
Sunday supplements, and when the orbit of Mars brought it close to the earth in 
1924, a well organized programme was set up to intercept any possible 
transmission. Most of the major radio stations and ham rigs around the world 
deliberately fell silent and listened. Dr David Todd, head astronomer at Amherst 
College, set up a gadget known as the Jenkins Radio-Camera at a naval 
observatory. (Jenkins was a pioneer TV experimenter.) Mars crept closer, and 
everyone waited. On August 24, 1924 (note the date), amateur, military, and 
government radio stations closed down their transmitters. They were not 
disappointed. Freak signals of un­identifiable origin were reported by awed 
listeners all over the world. Dr Todd's apparatus whirred and clattered, and a 
long strip of
photographic tape poured out of it. When the tape was developed, it displayed 'a 
fairly regular arrangement oi dots and dashes along one side,' according to The 
New York Times, 'but on the other side at almost evenly spaced intervals are 
curiously jumbled groups, each taking the form of a crudely drawn human face.*
The Jenkins device was technically incapable of producing draw­ings.
This amazing experiment hit the headlines everywhere, and hun­dreds of amateur 
radio operators submitted reports of what they themselves had picked up. Since 
there were very few commercial stations at the time and most amateurs were 
operating crude, home­made equipment with very limited capabilities, we have 
another mystery here. Those freak signals had to be exceptionally strong. There 
was no possibility of a worldwide hoax, yet it did seem that the signals had to 
be of ter re strial origin. But from where and by whom ?
These signals continued to be received throughout the 1920s and 1930s. Dr Hugh 
Mansfield Robinson conducted one set of experi­ments with a set of high-powered 
receivers in 1921. He received intelligent signals on the thirty-thousand-meter 
wave-length and Ernest B. Rogers, the engineer in charge of the test, 'felt 
compelled to state that they were of extraterrestrial origin, as there were no 
sending instruments of that power on Earth.*
An amateur radio astronomer named Grote Reber reported receiv­ing strong 
dot-and-dash signals from space in 1939. He had built a thirty-foot dish antenna 
in Wheaton, Illinois {just outside of Chic­ago), and said he often listened to 
the signals for eight hours at a time. They seemed to come from one specific 
spot in the sky.
Radio astronomy was then in its infancy and signals were being detected from 
both Venus and Jupiter. But these appeared to be statidike natural phenomena 
covering a wide part of the band. Pro­fessor Hermann Oberth, the German rocket 
pioneer, worked with radio telescopes and suggested that intelligent signals 
were coming from the distant stars of Epsilon Eridani and Tau Ceti. both of 
which are about eleven light years away. He based his calculations on his 
erroneous assumption that the signals were sporadic (they are con­stant) and 
were only received every twenty-two years, thus taking eleven years to go out 
and another eleven to be returned.
If the true nature of the central phenomenon is electromagnetic, and if the 
earth is constantly being bathed in rays or beams of energy under intelligent 
direction, then these manifestations are hardly surprising. These signals could 
have existed long before we developed the devices necessary to intercept them. 
Once we had the
necessary equipment, the source of the signals adjusted the frequen­cies so. we 
could heat them. It - or they - are also able to play havoc with our 
communications at will… and there is evidence that this is happening.
During the ghostflier wave over northern Europe in the 1930s, isolated people in 
Norway and Sweden picked up enigmatic broad­casts on their shortwave sets, 
purportedly the ufonauts chattering back and forth over the airwaves, often in 
broken Swedish. The Scandinavian press speculated that Germany or the Soviet 
Union might be responsible for the broadcasts, but so evidence of this ever came 
to light.
In countless modern UFO eases witnesses have claimed they re­ceived strange 
guttural voices and dot-and-dash signals on car radios, TV sets, and telephones 
while flying saucers hovered over­head. Citizens' Band (CB) radios also have a 
habit of picking up these signals in flap areas. On many occasions these voices 
and sounds hav'e been emitted by loudspeakers which were turned off or weren't 
even connected.
A loudspeaker consists of an electromagnet which vibrates a cone of paper or 
stiff cloth. When the cone vibrates, it naturally vibrates the air and produces 
audible sound waves. Theoretically, a beam of electromagnetic energy on a very 
low frequency (VXF) could activate the magnet.
In January 1954, people throughout the Midwest allegedly heard a strange voice 
coming from turned -off radios. The voice stated in a dull monotone: 'I wish no 
one to be afraid, although I speak from space. But if you do not stop 
preparations for war, you will be destroyed.* Sven stranger, the same kind of 
message delivered by the same kind of voice was supposedly picked up by the 
equipment at London airport that month.
George Hunt Williamson, an anthropologist, claimed he was pre­sent when an 
amateur radio operator established contact with another world in the summer of 
1952. Here's Williamson's account of that experiment:
This test was of such a nature that if the messages were a hoax, they would have 
been revealed as such immediately… He sent a question over his transmitter [to 
the space people], and he re­ceived an answer. Without any warning he quickly 
switched to 160 meters and asked another question. To his surprise an answer was 
soon forthcoming! Any radioman knows that no power on Earth would have enabled 
any operator to know where he was
switching to! Even if Mr R. had told the other operator that he was going to 
switch to 160 metres, still they would not have found him on that band until 
after the question had been asked. And of course, they couldn't have answered 
the question if they hadn't heard itl
Williamson spent a lot of time probing around the ancient ruins of South America 
before he suddenly vanished without a trace in the early 1960s.
At a flying saucer buffs' convention in Giant Rock, California, in 1954 one 
speaker informed the audience:
The entities of the spaceships and saucers can and do read the mind of a radio 
operator, exchanging communications. They know when he is several yards from his 
set and will give him time to reach it before they signal… In one case involving 
something in the nature of mind reading at a distance, these entities gave the 
answer to a discussion going on in a room and not taken up or referred to on the 
radio.
Quite a few amateur radio operators have joined the ranks of the UFO contactees 
in recent years, perhaps because all night they sit surrounded by equipment 
radiating powerful magnetic fields which can somehow be utilized by the 
phenomena. On August 3rd, 1958, ham operators throughout the United States 
reportedly picked up a strange broadcast on the seventy-five-metre international 
band. A male voice claiming to be 'Nacoma from the planet Jupiter' warned his 
listeners that the atomic bomb tests could lead to disaster. He spoke for 
two-and-a-half hours in English, German, Norwegian and his own language, 
described as kind of musical jibberish.
'It was the most powerful signal ever picked up,' one account said. There was 
plenty of time during the broadcast for hundreds to listen in, and radio 
operators called in friends and neighbours and phoned long distance to relatives 
in other states.'
The Federal Communications Commission later denied any knowl­edge of the 
broadcast.
The far-off, far-out planet of Korendor checked in on a warm night in July 1961. 
An eighteen-year-old radio buff, Bob Renaud. was "browsing around the shortwave 
bands' in his home in a little town in Massachusetts, when 'suddenly from the 
loudspeaker came a very high pitched beep-beep-beep'. He was annoyed by it, he 
said, and tried unsuccessfully to tune it out. 'It stopped,* he wrote later, 
"but
was replaced by a soft, warm, crystal clear feminine voice that said, "Bob, we'd 
like you to stay on this frequency for a while."'
This space lady identified herself as linn-Erri (like the demons and angels of 
yesteryear, the space people are fond of names containing double letters). Over 
the months that followed she dictated endless treatises on what was wrong with 
us and what was right with her world. The Renaud story quickly fell into the 
pattern of all the earlier contactees. At 2 a.m.on the momingof December 22nd, 
1962,a car drove up in front of his house, according to his story, and three 
rather normal looking men invited him to hop in. They drove him to ay isolated 
field where they demonstrated an antigravity device which lifted a huge boulder 
a hundred feet in the air. Then they pointed another gadget at it, and it 
disintegrated in a Dash. later they conducted him on a tour of a secret 
underground UFO base in Massachusetts and even took him for a little faunt in a 
flying saucer.
Following the Korendians' instructions, Renaud claims he rebuilt a TV set so 
that he could receive outer space TV shows. When linn-Erri's face appeared on 
the screen, she turned out to be a beautiful blonde, 37-22-26. She appeared to 
be eighteen or nineteen years old but admitted to being seventy-four 'which in 
our society is the prime of life*. (Renaud's TV set probably operates on the 
same nonprindple employed by the celebrated Psionic Machine of Thomas G. 
Heir-cnymous which was promoted by Astounding Science Fiction for some years. If 
the parts are removed from, the Psionic Machine, it continues to work anyway 
because it apparently operates on some psychic force, like Ouija boards and 
dowsing rods do.)
Another ham radio operator was swallowed up by the contactee phenomenon on 
January 30th, 1965. Towards midnight on January 29th George M. Clemins, mayor of 
Monterey, California, and several other people reportedly saw a brilliantly 
illuminated spherical object hovering over Monterey Bay. It appeared to slowly 
descend out of sight on the other side of the bay. Two hours later a 
forty-five-year-old TV repairman named Sidney Padrick shut down his ham radio 
rig and decided to take a stroll before going to sleep. On Manresa Beach 
directly opposite Monterey he heard a loud humming noise and saw a strange 
machine shaped like 'two real thick saucers in­verted.' He was none too happy 
about this apparition, he admitted, and so he turned and started to run away.
'Do not be frightened," a voice reportedly boomed from the object 'We are-not 
hostile.' Mr Padrick kept running. *We mean you no harm. You are welcome to come 
aboard."
Padrick stopped and considered, feeling slightly bewildered and foolish. A door 
slid open, he said, and he cautiously approached it. The voice urged him on. He 
stepped into a small room about six by seven feet, where he was greeted by a 
medium-sized man with very pale skin. He had, Padrick noted, a very sharp nose 
and chin and unusually long fingers. 'His hands were very clean. The fingernails 
looked as if somebody had just given them a manicure.' Padrick said:
They wore two-piece suits with no buttons or zippers that I could see. The 
bottom section actually included shoes - it looked like boots which continued on 
up to the waistline without any break around the ankles, just like a child's 
snowsuit. They had soles and heels similar to ours -I could hear them walking 
with a "thump-thump" sound on the rubberylike floor. The collar had a very 
pretty design on it - it came down to a V in the front, and the neckpiece, right 
around his neck, had a braid of some kind on it, very pretty. It had colours, 
but I can't tell you what they were, because they weren't colours that I had 
ever seen before… much more beautiful than ours.
When Padrick asked for the man's name, he was told, "You may call me Zeeno.' 
Although the witness didn't know it, the Greek word for stranger (xeno) is 
pronounced zee-no. Being a technician, Padrick was able to supply a detailed 
description of the interior of the craft and was nonplussed when Mr Zeeno showed 
him a room 'similar to a chapel*.
The colour effect in that room was so pretty that I almost fainted when I went 
in. A mixture of beautiful colours - I can't describe it. There were eight 
chairs, a stool, and what appeared to be an altar. Zeeno said, *WouId you like 
to pay your respects to the Supreme Deity?' I didn't know how to accept it… I'm 
forty-five years old, and until that night I had never felt the presence of the 
Supreme Being, but I did feel Him that night.
After taking a short flight in the object, Padrick claimed he was returned to 
the beach where he had been picked up. He reported his experience to the Air 
Force immediately and was later inter­viewed for three hours by officers from 
the nearby Hamilton Air Force Base. They wanted an account of it, word for 
word,' he said in a later telephone interview. 'I told them exactly what 
happened.
They were the first to hear it. There were certain details which they asked me 
not to talk about publicly; but I think in telling it every­thing should be 
disclosed. I can see no reason for anything being held back. The Air Force 
didn't want me to say that Zeeno told me the space people had no money. They did 
not want me to disclose the type and shape of the craft because they said that 
would indi­cate the Air Force was not doing its duty. I told them I could see no 
reason for that either. I know the Air Force believed it - I know it from the 
standpoint that they did a lot of checking down here in the area. They were here 
for quite some time after the incident. -. They didn't want me to divulge the 
saucer's means of communication or power. [Padrick was led to assume that the 
object was powered by light waves or magnetic rays]. Also, the man's name… they 
didn't want me to repeat that… because "It didn't mean anything."'
Reporters found that Sid Padrick was backed up by everyone who knew him. He was 
highly regarded as an honest man and was not a religious fanatic or UFO nut. 
Ironically, the hardcore UFO cultists rejected his story out of hand because of 
the unpalatable religious overtones. Everyone else, including the Air Force, 
took him very seriously.
Radio amateurs continue to receive strange messages from some­where. Ham 
operators in flap areas have cautiously reported all kinds of manifestations, 
including the materialization of entities in their radio shacks. It is common 
for UFO contactees to hear alien voices delivering personal messages to them 
from their ordinary home receivers. A number of people even claim that images of 
the spacemen have appeared suddenly on their TV sets and addressed them 
directly. The rapid increase of such cases since 1965 suggests that a new game 
may be in the making. It sounds like a cliche science fiction plot, but a time 
may come when a general message to the human race may suddenly spurt from every 
receiver on Earth in every language. Wouldn't that be a kick in the teethl
During World War I very low frequencies (VLF} were briefly ex­perimented with. 
These are very long radio waves which require a specially built receiver. In the 
last few years VLF stations have quietly been constructed all over the world, 
although there are only a few commercial receivers on the market, and very few 
hams have VLF equipment. Most of that is of World War I vintage.
The U.S. Navy maintains several gigantic installations which cost millions of 
dollars and serve the announced purpose of com­municating with our atomic 
submarines throughout the world's seas
(VLF can penetrate underwater}. To give some idea of their size, the largest 
commercial broadcasting station allowed puts out fifty thou­sand watts of power. 
The Voice of America has conventional stations which broadcast five hundred 
thousand watts. Yet the Soviet Union has a VLF station, EWB in Odessa, which is 
pouring out five million watts! And the U.S. VLF station at Cutler, Maine, is 
putting out two million watts. There are now 150 VLF stations all over this 
planet, and aside from a few atomic submarines and a bevy of spies, there's no 
one to listen.
What are all these stations broadcasting? Well, station WWV transmits nothing 
but time signals…if anyone needs to set a watch. Teletypes are used by many 
stations exclusively. The teletype signal sounds somewhat musical, like 
bagpipes, over a loudspeaker. Voice transmission on the lower VLF channels is 
very difficult for a variety of reasons and not much of it is being done. Yet 
some amateurs with VLF equipment have reported picking up guttural, 
unintelligible voices at the very bottom of the scale around six KiloHerz.
'All manner of strange (and often unexplained) radio sounds and signab 
mysteriously appear on VLF receivers,* noted the Radio-TV Experimenter, 
April-May 1967. (That issue gives details on how to build a VLF receiver for a 
few dollars.]
The government is currently turning hundreds of square miles of Wisconsin into a 
massive VLF antenna, causing quite an uproar in that state. Everytime the VLF 
transmitter is cranked up, telephones for miles around go amok with false rings 
and strange noises. In fact, many of the telephone problems currently plaguing 
the United States can probably be blamed on VLF experiments. These very long 
waves of electromagnetic energy can and do seriously affect equip­ment operating 
in the lower ranges of the spectrum.
Another culprit is the National Security Agency, the James Bond-ish organization 
that runs the CIA. We maintain a twenty-four-hour message service to our agents 
around the globe via VLF. These mess­ages are broadcast in code on the higher 
VLF channels. A voice endlessly rattles off six-digit numbers. When the Cuban 
government arrested Humberto Carrillo Colon, an alleged CIA spy, in September 
1969, they found a unique VLF transceiver in his possession. Cuban counterspies 
claimed they had been monitoring his transmissions for months and had broken the 
CIA code. Copies of Colon's alleged messages were released to the Havana 
newspapers and reprinted in Communist propaganda organs in the United States. A 
number of oddities are buried in the dense text of these purported com­muniques 
with the CIA. In April 1969, Colon is supposed to have
reported a conversation with a Cuban official: 'On the way to the hotel he told 
me that I would be witness to something historical. THAT WTTHIN SIX MONTHS THERE 
WOULD BE NO MORE MONEY.' (Capitals were used in the published quote). He 
allegedly saw 'something strange, like a whale or large fish, that was no such 
thing, more like a minisubmarine or something like that' at Vara-dero. On 
October 8th, 1968, during a visit to Holgiun, he reported: "About 8.30 I saw a 
shooting star. First I saw a. red light on the horizon very fast from right to 
left. I don't know what it was. I also saw a shooting star… I wasn't even 
drunk.'
If the published reports are true - and of course, there is always room for 
doubt - then it would seem that CIA agents have been instructed to report 
anomalies and aerial phenomena.
In recent years voices catling off numbers on VLF channels have frequently been 
intercepted by conventional equipment when weather conditions were right. Tape 
recorders, sound movie pro­jectors, TV sets, and even public address systems 
have been picking up these signals. For some reason, public address amplifiers 
in churches in England and the United States (such as the All Saints Roman 
Catholic Church in Portland, Oregon, and the St Laurence Church in Cambridge, 
England) have been especially prone to this type of interference. Listeners 
usually conclude they are hearing broadcasts of taxicab companies. Actually, 
taxi companies use a much higher frequency, and their signals are not likely to 
be picked up by low frequency equipment, TV, incidentally, uses FM (frequency 
modulation) for sound, and it should be nearly impossible for a TV set to 
intercept any other signal.
At the other end of the radio spectrum on the ultratrigh frequen­cies (UHF) 
reserved exclusively for space satellites and manned-space flight 
communications, there has also been a plague of anomalous radiosignals. Back in 
November 1957, shortwave listeners everywhere were baffled by a strange tonal 
pattern which was broadcast next to the 20.00S frequency used by the two Russian 
satellites. Both the Soviet Union and the United States announced emphatically 
that the signals were not related to the satellites. 'It isn't classified,' an 
FCC spokesman declared. 'We just don't know what it is.'
They never found out either. The signals were much stronger than those being 
broadcast by Sputniks I and II, they were worldwide, and they were picked up by 
stations at times when the satellites were out of range on the other side of the 
world.
During his fourth pass over Hawaii in MA-9 (Faith 7) on May
15th, 1963, astronaut Gordon Cooper's voice transmission was sud­denly 
interrupted and drowned out by "an unintelligible foreign language transmission" 
on the channel reserved for space flights - a frequency which few if any 
amateurs are equipped to broadcast on. If the signal came from the ground, it 
had to come from Hawaii (VHF and UHF are highly directional), but the FCC never 
arrested a Hawaiian ham for the hoax, NASA recorded that transmission, a voice 
grunting and speaking rapidly in a language that has never been identified.
Later space shots have been repeatedly troubled by these anomal­ous 
transmissions. The broadcasts from our astronauts circling the moon in 1968 and 
1969 were often interrupted by strange noises. Anyone listening to those NASA 
transmissions closely heard things like Indian war whoops and strange music. 
Because the space chan­nels are highly directional, these odd insertions had to 
come from space or from specially equipped planes flying directly over the 
di­rectional dish antennae used to pick up the astronaut's transmission. NASA 
has been uneasily silent about its investigations into these problems.
All of the American astronauts and Soviet cosmonauts have seen and photographed 
unusual lights and objects in space. The final report of the Colorado University 
UFO study devotes a full chapter to the unexplained astronaut sightings.
The late Frank Edwards, a famous radio newsman and author of flying saucer 
books, made much of the weird radio signals that had been received in Uppsala, 
Sweden, in 1961 (the same area where the ghostflier broadcasts had been received 
in 1934-6. A group of young radio enthusiasts had built tracking equipment and 
receivers that could pick up the high frequencies employed by the American and 
Soviet space programmes. As soon as they had their equipment in operation, they 
picked up an extended (it lasted seven days and nights) series of broadcasts, 
apparently from orbiting manned space vehicles. These were in Russian and were 
taped and translated. A hapless pair of cosmonauts was presumably lost in space. 
They dis­cussed the critical situation they were in and wearily concluded, The 
world will never know about it anyway…'
They were wrong. Other amateur tracking stations in Italy and Alaska were also 
tuned in. according to Edwards.
Edwards' conclusion was that the Russians had secretly sent two cosmonauts into 
space, and they had been killed. There is one prob­lem. The Soviet space 
programme was nowhere nearly advanced enough for such an effort in 1961. Yuri 
Gagarin bad made his
historic orbital flight - the world's first - only one month before the signals 
were received. The next manned flight would require months of preparation. The 
Soviets could not and would not have Attempted a two-man mission at that point 
in their programme. It is much more probable that the radio transmissions were 
the work of out mysterious radio hoaxsters.
We can offer many other examples of complicated and seemingly pointless radio 
hoaxes. A frantic distress signal swept the Pacific early in 1968 and was 
received by marine radio stations and ships at sea. The signals were 
triangulated and the exact position of a pur­portedly distressed freighter was 
determined. Following the law of the sea, several ships in the vicinity changed 
their courses and rushed to the aid of the sinking vessel.
There was one slight hitch. The freighter in question was safely docked in the 
harbour at Calcutta, India, and the would-be rescuers found nothing but empty 
ocean.
A few months later the atomic submarine Scorpion vanished in the Atlantic in the 
section popularly known as the Bermuda Tri­angle. Once again mysterious radio 
signals were received by several ships and naval stations and were triangulated, 
pin-pointing the exact position. These signals were broadcast on the VLF 
frequency reserved for atomic submarines and used the secret code names 
em­ployed by the Navy. Planes and rescue vessels rushed to the spot and found 
nothings In December, 1968, the Navy issued a statement announcing that the 
Scorpion had finally been located hundreds of miles away from the spot where the 
signals had presumably orig^ inared. The signals were denounced as a hoax.
What kind of hoax? Did some practical Joker load some rare VUF equipment into a 
small boat after somehow stealing a copy of the Navy's secret code book? Did he 
then sail out into the middle of the Atlantic, broadcast his false signals, and 
then somehow sail back, managing to elude the planes and rescue ships on the 
way?
Anomalous radio broadcasts also played a baffling role in the assassinations. 
Four minutes after President Kennedy was shot in Dallas. Texas, in 1963, someone 
was broadcasting on the police hands in Dallas, offering a description of Lee 
Harvey Oswald. This was long before the police had even heard of Oswald or had 
any reason to think that he might have been implicated in the as­sassination. 
None of the regular police dispatchers had broadcast that alarm. Who did? The 
question remains unanswered.
Immediately after the Rev. Martin Luther King was shot in
Memphis, Tennessee, in April 1968, a phoney broadcaStsjn the police band sent 
all the police rushing to the wrong side of town, while the alleged killer went 
ofi in the other direction unhindered.
Our radio pranksters are a fact, not a myth. They operate in all languages and 
are obviously equipped with rare, specialized trans­mitters so powerful they can 
drown out all conventional signals. Their enterprises are usually pointless, 
sometimes harmful, never ex­plainable. It must be a very expensive operation , 
..if it is purely terrestrial. But many of these incidents smack of the 
mischievous work of our ultraterrestxials.
Our phantom broadcasters have also zeroed in on super sophisticated scientific 
equipment. At 4 ajn. on the morning of April 8th, 1960, the great dish antenna 
of the radio telescope at Green Bank, West Virginia, swept across the skies and 
focused upon the predetermined target: Epsilon Eridani and Tau Ceti. This was 
Project Ozma, the search for intelligent signals from outer space, headed fay Dr 
Otto Struve and Dr Frank Drake. They tuned their equipment to 1420.4 megacycles 
(they had calculated that com­munication over vast stellar distances would be 
most feasible at this wavelength -the frequency of hydrogen). Eureka! Even 
before they could switch on their loudspeakers a powerful signal blasted in, 
•knocking the needles off the dials,' as Drake put it. They received a very 
strong series of pulses, about eight per second, so uniform that they had to 
come from an intelligent source.
After recovering from their initial excitement, the scientists re-checked every 
part of their equipment but could find nothing wrong. The signals lasted for 
about five minutes and then stopped abruptly. Later the Naval Research 
Laboratory revealed that its stafi had been listening to these same signals for 
the past six months.
Two weeks later the men at Green Bank tuned into the signals again. This time 
they carefully moved their antenna away from the two stars as they listened, and 
they found the signals continued to come in loud and clear. This proved that the 
transmissions were not coming from a star but were very probably of local, 
terrestrial origin from some unknown but amazingly powerful transmitter.
Rumours that secret radar experiments were responsible for the signals proved 
unfounded. Radar does not use that wavelength, does not pulse eight times per 
second, and could not affect the highly directional radio telescope.
A trio of Soviet scientists, Gennady B. Sholomitsky. Nikolai S. Kardashev, and 
I. S. Shklovskü, won world-wide headlines in 1965, when they announced that they 
had received radio signals from
beacons of some superdvilization in space.-Later other radio astron­omers 
discovered that these signals were coming from fantastically huge stars labelled 
quasars, the furthest out of all known objects in the universe. The signals are 
apparently natural radio propagation. The Russians later retracted tfteir 
theories about the civilization, causing the UFO buffs to howl 'Cover-upl' once 
more.
In 1967 Dr Drake and other scientists working at the Arecibo, Puerto Rico, 
radio-telescope installation detected waves of hissing and static coming from 
four different points. Experimentation re­vealed numerous other invisible 
sources of radio waves in space and these objects have been tagged pulsars. The 
current theory is that pulsars are the hardcore remnants of a supernova which 
has col­lapsed inwardly and is made up of densely packed neutrons. So far it 
seems that the magnetic fields of the pulsars are one trillion times greater 
than the Earth's. The sky may be filled with these things, and if any should 
ever happen to wander into our solar system^ things could become very 
uncomfortable on this planet.
Sadly, the United States lags far beind in radio-telescope research, Germany, 
Britain, Holland, Australia, and even Argentina and Israel are building bigger 
and better instruments to probe into these new mysteries.
Meanwhile mankind is unwittingly overloading or overcharging the Earth's 
atmosphere with all kinds of magnetic and radio waves. As the man-made 
electromagnetic field increases, it clashes with the natural magnetism of the 
Earth. The result is that apparatus de­pendent on small magnetic fields (such as 
generators, computers, and tape recorders) are now being thrown askew by these 
larger blankets of incompatible electro-magnetism.
Nikola Tesla calculated that the Earth's natural fields lie at a frequency of 
about 150 kilocycles. Perhaps when there is an inter­change between the Earth's 
fields and the rays or fields coming in from stellar sources such as pulsars, an 
overcharge develops in some areas, indulging power failures and malfunctions of 
electronic equip­ment. One of the few really secure facts in ufology is that 
there have been hundreds of power failures simultaneous with the appearance of 
unidentified flying objects. The popular notion that UFOs cause power failures 
could be erroneous. It is possible that the appearance of UFOs and the 
accompanying power failures could in some cases be the result of this cosmic 
energy exchange.
During the great Northeastern Blackout of 1965 several local power companies 
completely independent of the affected main power grid also failed. 
Interestingly, while normal AM radio frequencies
continued to operate that night, short wave and VLF transmission and reception 
in the affected regions were hopelessly jammed with static. This alone indicated 
that an extraordinary electromagnetic condition existed. Following the big 
blackout. New York's Con Edison power company quietly installed expensive 
magnetic shield­ing devices around key equipment and new, heavily shielded 
cables were introduced in sensitive areas. Since 1965 Bell Telephone Company has 
been switching from overhead lines to more expensive, heavily shielded cables 
buried under the ground.
In the summer of 1970 all the electronic gear in the video tape studios of 
Waddell & Reed, Inc., in Kansas City, Missouri went hay­wire,
'Something made our equipment completely sensitive to every­thing around us,* 
the manager of the studio, Mrs Kevin Eisenbrandt, told the Kansas City Star 
(August 5th, 1970). The nearby Commerce Bank experienced similar problems with 
their computers and elec­tronic gear at the same time. Experts called in to 
investigate were baffled.
In far-off Noebbet, Denmark, a sawmill closed down in October 1970, economically 
ruined 'by mysterious forces that have blown out fuses by the thousands, bulbs 
by the hundreds, and electric motors by the dozen'. Hans Nielsen, the owner, 
told reporters that the dis­turbances began eighteen months earlier. Scientists 
and technicians measured twenty-nine thousand 'lightning-like electrical 
discharges in mill installations in one day*. The bursts occurred even when all 
electricity to the mill was cut off.
Incidents such as these are on the increase. Electromagnetic pol­lution is 
becoming a serious worldwide problem. Another more grisly aspect of the 
phenomenon, death by lightning, is also on the rise. A worldwide wave of 
lightning deaths took place in August and Sep­tember 1970. In a number of cases 
the fatal lightning bolts lashed out of a clear, cloudless sky.
Satellites whizzing around the Earth have detected a powerful beam of VLF energy 
being projected intermittently from a specific area of empty ocean near 
Antarctica. This has inspired scientific speculation that the Earth may be 
broadcasting natural radio waves into space on the same order of the waves 
coming from Jupiter and Venus.
A few years ago newspapers carried a puzzling report from Green­land, describing 
how a group of scientists there had discovered a massive object buried deep in 
the ice. It supposedly broadcast a
strange radio signal at regular intervals. This odd report was never verified, 
and nothing further was ever published about it.
One of the persistent UFO rumours of the early 1950s claimed that an unnamed 
scientist in Washington had in his possession a tiny box which had been 
extracted from a 'crashed flying saucer in New Mexico'. According to the rumour, 
the box emitted a loud beep every fifteen minutes and so one could figure out 
what it was made of or how it worked.
Radio itself is supposed to have been one of the secrets of the ancient mystical 
societies: a closely guarded means of com­munication between members. A form of 
primitive crystal sets was allegedly used by the brothers of the Rosenkreuz 
(Rosy Cross - the Rosicrucians) centuries ago. It is even possible - there is no 
way of knowing for sure - that the mysterious plates and amulets used by ancient 
priests may have been crystal sets of some sort, tuned to some secret mountain 
transmitter.
We do know that the atmosphere of our haunted pknet is over­loaded with 
electrical energy today, ranging from manmade radio signals on every frequency 
to mysterious, patterned signals from some unknown source. While our scientists 
have been tuning their multimillion-dollar equipment into remote hisses and 
squeaks from distant stars, hundreds, if not thousands, of ham radio operators 
and teenagers with homemade coils and condensers have been listen­ing with awe 
to the wild, unidentifiable, and obviously intelligent signals radiating from 
and around our own planet. These signals ejdst. They existed from the moment 
Tesla first tuned into them accidentally. If the present trend continues, more 
and more people will be hearing these strange voices and signals from their 
radios and TV sets in the future. We live in a world ruled by 
electro-magnetisni, and there is every indication that someone - the Earth's 
phantom Inhabitants - learned to utilize these forces long ago. In time we may 
learn to separate the natural static and the CIA codes from the truly enigmatic 
waves that are flowing all round us.
CHAPIBR FIFTEEN
i
WHERE IS EVERYBODY GOING?
Strange things happen on the twenty-fourth of die month. People vanish. On 
October 24th, 1593, a Spanish soldier standing guard in Manila in the 
Philippines suddenly disappeared. Twenty-four hours later he found himself in 
Mexico City, some nine thousand miles from Manila, without any idea how he had 
managed to travel so far so fast. We could dismiss the seemingly factual 
historic account of this case if it weren't for the disturbing fact that such 
things con­tinue to happen on a regular basis.
On October 24th. 1967, Bruce Burkan, nineteen, found himself sitting in a bus 
terminal in Newark, dressed in a cheap, ill-fitting suit with exactly seven 
cents in his pocket He didn't have the fog­giest notion what he was doing there, 
noi could he remember any­thing that had happened during the previous two 
months. On August 22nd, 1967. Burkan and his girlfriend went to a beach at 
Asbury Park, New Jersey. He left her later to go and put a coin in a parking 
meter. He was wearing nothing but a bathing suit. When he failed to return, his 
friend went looking for him. She found his locked cat where he had parked it.
Burkan's family held a well publicized search for him, but not a single clue 
turned up. Finally they conducted a funeral service in his memory, giving him up 
for dead. After his reappearance on October 24th, tie young man told reporters, 
There's one thing that really bothers me. I have fiery red hair. Where was I 
that despite all the publicity no one recognized me?"
On August 15th, 1967, seven days before Burkan's still unex­plained 
disappearance, a thirty-seven-year-old research scientist named Paul T. 
MacGregor left his office at the Polaroid Corporation in Boston. Massachusetts, 
and started out for Camp Kirby to join his vacationing family. He never got 
there. One month latex he walked into a police station in Buffalo, New York, and 
told them he didn't know who he was. His identity was traced through the labels 
of his clothes and the inscription on his wedding ring. Doctors at the Meyer 
Memorial Hospital examined him and said they were con­vinced that he was 
suffering from amnesia.
Who 01 what had met him on that Massachusetts highway that night and caused Ms 
mind to shut off the past?
Despite all the movie and soap opera plots that have revolved around amnesia, a 
simple blow on the head rarely induces the con­dition. The traditional medical 
explanation is that an overwhelming emotional trauma is the cause of most 
amnesia. A man murders his wife in a fit of rage, and then his mind wipes out 
his entire memory. A child sees his dog run over by a car and erases the painful 
memory by blotting out that entire period of his childhood. Skilled 
psy­chiatrists can Spot this form of amnesia and cope with it. But most o£ the 
amnesia cases induced by paranormal happenings, such as encounters with fairies 
or flying saucers, are not so easily diagnosed and dealt with. The nature of the 
trauma is never fully determined.
Every July there is a sudden rash of new amnesia cases in the national press, 
coincidence with the traditional July peak of UFO sightings. Thousands of people 
who have been exposed to psychic phenomena and UFO manifestations have suffered 
lacunar amnesia; that is, they find they are unable to remember a short period 
of time before, during, or after their experiences. Others appear suddenly in 
different parts of the world, sometimes knowing who they are but baffled that 
they are suddenly so far from home. A Londoner sud­denly finds himself in South 
Africa. A girl from Cleveland awakes to discover she is in Australia. An 
unemployed Swedish milkman sud­denly finds himself on a golf course on a remote 
island resort for the very rich.
A woman in Allentown, Pennsylvania, soberly related this strange story; she said 
she and her husband maintained a small summer cottage in the Pocono mountains, a 
mere thirty-minute drive from their home. One Saturday morning in July 1966, the 
young couple got into their car and started out for the cottage. As they drove 
along the Pennsylvania Turnpike, which seemed strangely devoid of traffic that 
day, they saw a large circular object in the sky ahead of them. It looked as if 
it was going to land directly on the turnpike, she said. Her husband, mildly 
alarmed, pulled over to the edge of the road and stopped. They watched as the 
object, a shiny metallic thing with large black spots or windows, flew very low 
over their car. Then it was suddenly gone. Her husband started the car again, 
and they drove on to their cottage. It was not until after,they arrived at their 
destination that they looked at their watches. It was 1.30 pjn. They had started 
out at 9.30 ajn. For some reason which neither of them could understand, it took 
them four hours to make a drive that normally took thirty minutes!
On a warm night early in August 1966, a Philadelphia policeman named Chester 
Archey, Jr., set out on a routine patrol in North Philadelphia. He drove instead 
through that door into the unknown. Archey, a veteran of fifteen years on the 
force, suddenly found him­self in Pennsauken, New Jersey, where he became 
involved in a minor accident as he drove around in confusion. 'I don't have an 
idea how I got there," Archey protested at a police hearing later. "I don't even 
know where Pennsauken is!"
In occult and UFO lore there are hundreds of reports of this phenomenon. It also 
seems to work in reverse. Witnesses claim that they drove or even walked 
incredible distances - sometimes hun­dreds of miles - in incredibly short 
periods of time. It is as if they crossed over into another dimension where time 
and space have a different relationship.
There is also a peculiar cloud phenomenon connected with some of these 
teleportations, or transferences. According to the news­paper Diario de C6rdoba, 
a well-known Argentine businessman suffered a strange distortion of time and 
space in 1959. He re­portedly got into his brand-new car one morning in the city 
of Bahia Blanca, Argentina, and started to drive away from his hotel, when a 
strange cloud seemed to envelope his vehicle. The next thing he knew he was 
standing alone on a deserted spot in the countryside. He hailed a passing truck 
and asked the driver to take him to Bahia Blanca. Looking at him as if he were 
some kind of maniac, the driver explained that they were in Salta. Bahia Blanca 
was over a thousand kilometres away I He drove the befuddled businessman to the 
nearest police station, and they called the police in Bahia Blanca. The police 
later called back and confirmed that the businessman's car was still outside the 
hotel with its engine running. Strangest of all, only a few minutes had elapsed 
from the time the man had first climbed into the car - yet he had somehow been 
transported over a thousand kilometres.
Bahia Blanca is a busy Window area and has been the site of many strange psychic 
and UFO reports in recent years. In May 1968, Dr Gerardo Vidal and his wife said 
they were driving outside the city when their auto was caught up in dense fog, 
and they lost con­sciousness. They came to on a strange road. Their watches had 
stopped, and the surface of their car was badly scorched. They soon learned that 
forty-eight hours had passed, and they were now in Mexico, many thousands of 
miles north of Bahia Blanca!
On March 4th, 196S, a leading Japanese newspaper, Mainkhi, carried an 
unbelievable story about an automobile disappearing in
Ml view of a crowded highway. The reporting witnesses were three officials of 
the Fuji Bank on their way to the golf course at Ryuga-zaki. As they drove 
outside of Kanamachi, they said they saw a black car ahead of them going in the 
same direction. Aside from the driver, they could see an elderly man in the back 
seat reading a newspaper.
'Suddenly a pug of something gaseous, like white smoke or vapour, gushed from 
somewhere around the black car, and when this cloud dispersed (a matter of not 
more than five seconds), the black car had vanished,' the newspaper account 
said.
The trio of witnesses were so shaken by the incident that they stopped and 
reported it to the police, and so another inexplicable oddity was added to our 
bulging files. Could that car in Japan have been taken by the same unknown force 
that transported the Ar­gentine businessman a thousand kilometres? Could the 
same force have been at work when British Wing Commander J. Baldwin flew into a 
cloud and never came out again during the Korean War? Other pilots in his 
formation scoured the area but could find no trace of their commander or his 
plane. Was it the same kind o£ cloud that literally devoured a whole regiment of 
British soldiers near Sulva Bay, Turkey, in 1915? An entrenched group of men 
later signed affidavits swearing they had watched the One-Fourth Norfolk 
Regiment march into a peculiar brown cloud that hugged the ground in their path 
and that none of them reappeared on the other side. After a few moments the 
cloud rose up and flew away, the witnesses reported, joining a group of similar 
clouds which then sailed off against the wind. No one from that regiment was 
ever seen again. Eight hundred men gone - or taken - from the face of the earth!
On August 4th, 1968, Gradela del Lourdes Gimenez, eleven, was playing outside 
her home in Cordoba. Argentina, when she too was caught up in one of these 
mysterious clouds.
'I wanted to go back indoors and watch TV,' she told reporters from the 
newspaper Cdrdoba, 'and then just as I was about to turn around… a white cloud, 
like mist, appeared on the front path. It gradually came towards where I was, 
and then I could no longer see the other houses, and I couldn't move or call out 
to Mummy… And after that… I don't know anything more… until I found myself on a 
square where there were lots of people and lots of little boys…'
She knocked at a nearby house, and the residents turned her over to the police. 
How had she travelled from a C6rdbba suburb to the Plaza Espaüa in the heart of 
the city? Mr Gordon Creighton, a retired British consular officer, collected the 
reports and translated
them for Flying Saucer,Review, September-October 1970. He reports that the child 
suffered fits of weeping and cold chills following the incident.
There are periodic waves of disappearances which create brief sensations in the 
newspapers and are quickly forgotten. No one ever manages to find out where 
these people have gone. In 1912 five men, all unrelated, disappeared 
unaccountably in a single week in Buffalo, New York. Montreal, Canada, had a 
wave of missing persons in July 1883, and again in July 1S92.
Children vanish more frequently than any other group. We're not talking about 
ordinary runaways. In August 1869, thirteen children vanished in Cork, Ireland. 
No sign of kidnapping or foul play. That same month there was a wave of 
disappearing children in Brussels, Belgium. Another group of youngsters melted 
away in Belfast in August 1895. And again in August 1920, eight girls (all 
tinder twelve years of age) disappeared forever in Belfast.
The latter part of the nineteenth century produced several classic 
disappearances. On Thursday, September 23 rd, 1880, a fanner named David Lang 
took a few steps into an open field near Gallatm, Tennessee, and vanished 
instantaneously in front of several wit­nesses, including Judge August Peck. 
Where did he go? A long and thorough search of the field never produced an 
answer. Five years later on Thursday, April 23rd, 1885, another farmer named 
Isaac Martin walked into a field near Salem, Virginia, and like David Lang, 
dissolved into nothingness.
Christmas Eve (a twenty-fourth, naturally), 1889, an eleven-year-old boy named 
Oliver Larch joined the legion of the missing when he went outside his home near 
South Bend, Indiana, to get a pail of water. His family heard him cry out, 
'Helpl Help] They've got me!" His footprints led fifty feet away in the fresh 
snow and then stopped. His bucket lay a few feet beyond that point. There were 
no other marks of any kind. It was as if Oliver larch had been scooped into the 
sky off the face of the earth.
This type of sudden, inexplicable disappearance still takes place. In the summer 
of 1969 a seven-year-old boy named Dennis Martin was whisked away in Great Smoky 
Mountains National Park in Ten­nessee. One second he was walking along with Ms 
father and other relatives, the next second he was gone. Every stone and crevice 
was searched. A massive hunt was launched with more than fourteen hundred people 
looking under every bush. The boy was never found.
Children began to disappear in the city of Villa Velha, Brazil, early
in December 1969, according to Brazilian correspondent Eduaido Keffel of the 
German magazine Die Bunte llhstriette, March 24th, 1970. Within a few weeks a 
minor mystery had exploded into a frightening epidemic. Scores of youngsters, 
ail between the ages of nine and fifteen and all from poor families (ruling out 
any ransom motive), vanished without a trace. The police in the state of 
Espirito Santo rallied their forces and began a massive search for a sinister 
kidnapping ring. But they had no leads. The disappearances seemed random, were 
not ordinary runaways, and none of the children knew each other or shared a 
common school.
Then in February 1970, four of the missing youngsters reappeared separately. Two 
were stumbling about the streets blindly, suffering from amnesia. The other pair 
were able to remember fragments of their adventure, but their stories were as 
bizarre as a James Bond tale. They had been stopped on the street, they said, 
and offered a ride in a large American style limousine (quite a treat to a poor 
Brazilian youngster). Once they were in the car, they were given a cigarette 
{apparently drugged) and they lapsed into uncon­sciousness. One returnee 
recalled that he awoke in a small hut, tied hand and foot, when a stranger 
entered, freed him, and told him how to find the nearest police station. An 
eleven-year-old girl identified as Vani said her kidnapper was a woman named 
Laura. Laura fed her sweets and then took her to a field where an aeroplane was 
waiting. Vani began to scream and fuss, and surprisingly Laura gave her some 
money and returned her to her viliage.1
Most of the Brazilian victims were boys, although a few girls were included. 
Once the kidnapping wave received publicity, a number of youths had narrow 
escapes, fleeing the big cars and their mysterious occupants when they were 
offered a lift. Local police never caught up with these cars and speculated they 
were dealing with some kind of slavery ring.
Actually, children have been disappearing in large numbers for centuries all 
over the world, and most of these cases have remained unsolved. In the Middle 
Ages it was popularly believed that fairies and leprechauns frequently stole 
children away. The Indians of North and South America also have many myths and 
stories about children being kidnapped by the little people. The notion that 
para-
1 Jessup discussed the case of the teleported Spanish soldier mentioned at the 
opening of this chapter in his book The Case for the UFO. Among the annotations 
in the later Vato edition there was a pointed des­cription of bow the soldier 
had made so much trouble that they decided to let him go.
humans kidnap children is deeply entrenched in every culture. In more recent 
times Gipsies have often been accused of kidnapping.
The celebrated Pied Piper of Hamelin, Germany, is more than just a charming 
children's story. A stranger actually did appear in Ham­elin in the Middle Ages, 
and he lured away 1,50 children never seen again. The event is still 
commemorated with an annual festival in Hamelin.
In a.d. 1212 a teenaged boy in France, Stephen of Cloyes, began to hear voices 
which inspired him to collect together fifty thousand children for the pathetic 
Children's Crusade. They marched off to do battle with the infidels and 
disappeared en masse. The popular ex­planation is that they were all seized by 
slavers.
One of the first colonies to be established in the New World - the Roanoke 
Island colony begun in 1585 off the coast of what is now North Carolina - 
disappeared magically, Virginia Dare, the first child of European descent to be 
born on this continent, was among the missing. The local Indians were not 
hostile and were as bafited by the vanishing colony as the explorers who came 
searching for it.
Another entire village, a remote Eskimo settlement in northern Canada, lost its 
entire population sometime in August 1930. The Northwest Mounted Police found 
the village abandoned, but its thirty inhabitants had left behind their food, 
clothing, kayaks, rifles, and dogs. Since no Eskimo is likely to travel very far 
without his precious rifle or his dog, the police were baffled. A two-week 
inves­tigation of the area failed to yield any clues. Strangest of all, a grave 
on the edge of the village had been opened, and the body was gone. Grave robbing 
is an unspeakable crime among the Eskimos, and it is very unlikely that they dug 
up the body and fled the village, leaving behind their weapons, tools, food, and 
their dogs.
At the other end of the world in Antarctica an American scientist vanished 
without a trace on May 7th, 1965. He was Carl Robert Disch, twenty-six, and he 
was assigned to the Byrd Station, oper­ating equipment to investigate VLF radio 
noises for the National Bureau of Standards. He set out to walk from his hut to 
the main station a short distance away, following a hardline that was strung as 
a guide for the path between the two points. When he failed to appear after 
forty-five minutes, the other scientists went out search­ing for him in tracked 
vehicles.
If Disch had fallen and was lying in the snow,' Ron Sefton the leader of the 
Byrd Station explained to William J. Perkinson of the Baltimore Sun, 'the 
huskies would have seen him long before the searchers did. Similarly, if he had 
fallen and was covered by drifting
snow, the dogs would have sighted the mound and rushed out to investigate it. 
That's the way huskies are.'
The search went on for three days and covered a thirty-five-mile area around the 
hut. Disch's own dog, 3 husky called Gus, disap­peared shortly afterwards. Some 
of the searchers claimed they saw mysterious lights and heard engine noises in 
the distance. Antarctica is, of course, uninhabited except for a handful of 
international scien­tists who work very closely with one another.
Aeroplanes, ships and submarines have also disappeared by the hundreds. In quite 
a few cases the missing ships or planes were later found, mysteriously abandoned 
by their crews. One of the first and most celebrated of these incidents took 
place on July 24th, 1924, whea Lt W. T. Day and Pilot Officer D. R. Stewart went 
off in a single-engined biplane for a routine patrol over the Arab desert. A 
search party found their plane the next day, parked on the desert and completely 
intact, in excellent working order. There was gaso­line in the tack, and no sign 
of trouble or violence. The footprints of the two men were clearly visible in 
the sand. They had taken a few steps away from the plane - and then the 
footprints ended abruptly, like young Oliver Larch, they had taken a stroll into 
thin air.
An Italian ufologist, Alberto Fenoglio, reported rumours of a similar 
disappearance in the Soviet Union in 1961. A small mail plane was reported 
missing but was quickly located in perfect shape near the remote town of 
Tobolsk, Siberia. 'Everything on board - engine, radio, mailbags, etc. - was in 
perfect order,* Fenoglio stated. "The tank contained fuel for two hours of 
flight The four passengers had vanished without a trace. A distance of about 
three hundred feet from the aircraft there was a huge, clearly defined circle on 
which the grass was all scorched and the earth depressed.'
Over fifty pilots and men of the United States Air Force have lost their lives 
or disappeared suddenly while pursuing unidentified flying objects. Their deaths 
have been officially documented. Their names and the peculiar circumstances 
surrounding these tragedies have been released to a bewildered and sometimes 
disbelieving press and public. Some of these incidents involved 
aerial-collisions with in­visible objects.
On June 11th, 1938, the Chicago Daily News described the crash of a U.S. Army 
bomber outside of Delaware, Illinois. Nine men were killed after what one ground 
witness described as a 'sudden crash in midair'. Crash with what? No one knows.
Three more pilots died on June 8th, 1951, when four jets crashed simultaneously 
near Richmond, Indiana. Another four jets came to a
strange end near LawrenceyiUe, Georgia, cm December 3.1955. The tower operators 
at the Dobbins Air Base heard one of the pilots exclaim, "We can'c miss itt* 
Moments later all four planes came diving out of the clouds in flames.
After a thorough study of the debris of a Jetliner which crashed outside 
Calcutta on May 2nd, 1953, the British Ministry of Gvil Aviation announced that 
it had 'collided with a fairly heavy body*.' Witnesses said that there was no 
other plane near the doomed air­liner when it 'seemed to stop short in midair* 
and crashed.
A B-47 smacked into something solid in October 1955, and only one man survived. 
He was quoted in the newspaper accounts as saying that the plane was 'struck in 
midair', and the jolt was so terrific he thought they had struck the ground. The 
crash took place near Lovington, New Mexico, and authorities said there were no 
other planes in the vicinity. One ground witness did claim, however, that a ball 
of fire appeared near the plane just before the crash. A couple of weeks later, 
another B-47 met with an identical fate in Texas. Witnesses said they saw *a 
ball of fire with sparks shooting out of it* just before the plane went down.
Are there invisible things haunting our airways, endangering planes, pilots, and 
passengers?
Ufologist Jerome dark uncovered an extraordinary item from an old 1939 
newspaper. "On a day in late summer, 1939j a military transport left the Marine 
Naval Air Station in San Diego, California, for a routine flight to Honolulu,* 
Clark wrote in Flying Saucer Review. "About three hours afterwards several 
urgent distress signals sounded from the plane and then silence. Later the craft 
came limp­ing back to execute an emergency landing. When Air Station per­sonnel 
entered the plane, they found every man of the crew, including the co-pilot who 
had lived long enough to pilot the craft back to its base, dead of unknown 
causes.
Each of the bodies carried large, gaping wounds, and the out­side of the ship 
was similarly marked. Air Station men who touched parts of the craft came down 
with a mysterious skin infection.
One of the most puzzling aspects of the whole affair was that the .45 automatics 
carried by the pilot and copilot as service pieces had been emptied, and the 
shells lay on the floor. A smell of rotten eggs pervaded the atmosphere inkde 
the plane… Mys­terious skin infections and rotten egg odors [hydrogen sulphide] 
are phenomena familial to all UFO researchers, It would seem
that the transport was attacked - apparently without provocation - by some sort 
of strange aerial intruder.
Air Force records show that one of the first cases of an electro­magnetic effect 
took place over Iwo Jima on August 28,1945, when a C-46's engines failed as 
three UFOs manoeuvred around it In those days military men called UFO's Foo 
Fighters. The Foo Fighters baffled both Allied and Axis pilots over Germany and 
Japan in the final days of the war. Bomber crews were also reporting constant 
appearances of little green men who invaded their planes and caused all kinds of 
mischief. The press labelled them Gremlins and the popular conclusion was that 
the crews were merely hallucinating because of the high altitude and thin 
atmosphere. Since then there have been thousands of little green men reports 
from all over the world. They are now an integral part of the flying saucer 
lore.
People in Florida were also watching aircraft in the autumn of 1945, the common 
assumption being that the objects were some kind of new secret weapon. Then on 
December 5th, 1945, one of the most famous disappearances in aviation history 
occurred. Five TBM Avenger torpedo bombers took off from Fort Lauderdale Naval 
Air Station on a routine training mission. Fourteen men were aboard. Although 
the weather was perfect, the flight soon ran into some kind of trouble. Radio 
contact with the base ended abruptly. A Martin Mariner flying boat carrying a 
crew of thirteen was sent up to find the missing Blight 19. Twenty minutes after 
it took off radio com­munications with it also ended abruptly.
Altogether, twenty-seven men and sis planes completely disap­peared a few miles 
off the Florida coast that afternoon. An extensive search by land, sea, and air 
was conducted for weeks afterwards. It was one of the biggest searches in 
history, and it failed to turn up a single piece of debris. >. not even an oil 
slick.
The disappearance of Flight 19 and the rescue plane marked the official 
beginning of the Bermuda Triangle mystery, In the twenty-five years since, a 
total of seventeen planes have vanished in the lozenge-shaped area southwest of 
Bermuda, carrying with them a total of 190 people. A number of ships, together 
with their entire crews, have also melted away there forever. Such incidents can 
be traced back as far as 1846. Ivan Sanderson, who has made a study of this 
phenomenon, believes there are at least six of these vile vortices, as he calls 
them, spaced evenly around the world. The Devil's Sea off the coast of Japan, 
for example, has swallowed up so many ships that fishermen carefully sail around 
it
The Navy took the disappearance of Flight 19 very seriously. In January 1946, a 
group of Naval Intelligence officers were ordered by President Truman to form an 
investigative body called the Central Intelligence Group. This was the 
forerunner to the CIA. In the spring of 1946 the CIG participated in a series of 
secret hearings in Wash­ington. The wives and relatives of tie missing men were 
flown to Washington to attend the meetings. Since then most of these people have 
refused to discuss the subject at all. But one mother of a mis­sing man did 
confide to a researcher Art Ford, the famous disc jockey who has made a hobby of 
investigating the Flight 19 case, that she believed her son was still alive 
'somewhere… maybe in space*.
During 1965-6 the National Bureau of Standards mounted special microphones and 
instruments along the coastline facing the Ber­muda Triangle to try to pick up 
sounds that might lie above the range of human hearing. They succeeded in 
recording odd whis­pering sounds of unknown origin. The Navy quietly conducted a 
new search of the Triangle in 1967, spending over five million dollars to search 
the ocean floors with special research submarines and devices. As usual, they 
failed to find any trace of the missing planes and ships and were unable to come 
up with any new explanation for the mystery.
Sanderson's cautious theory about the vile vortices, as expounded in his book 
Invisible Residents, is that these areas are plagued with magnetic and 
gravitational anomalies. Maybe the planes fell up!
In the summer of 1970 a giant Soviet cargo plane carrying sup­plies to 
earthquake-stricken Peru disappeared south of Greenland Planes from several 
countries searched the area for days and failed to find a trace of it. That 
September three adventurers set out in a balloon from New York, hoping to cross 
the Atlantic. They too van­ished and repeated searches could not locate their 
supposedly un-sinkable gondola.
Everyone has heard of the Marie Celeste, the ship found floating crewless in the 
Atlantic in 1872. There have been scores of similar finds. Usually such ships 
are completely intact, often with food cook­ing on the stoves and the galley 
tables set for dinner. The crews and passengers simply abandon ship, leaving all 
their personal effects behind, Five such ships were found adrift in the Bermuda 
Triangle area during June-July 1969.
In the spring of 1969 a British sailor named John Fairfax was crossing the 
Atlantic alone when he reportedly observed two brilliant lights on the horizon. 
They separated and flew higher into
the sky. As be watched, fascinated, he claims he entered a mo­tionless 
trancelike state. 'It was more than just seeing them,' he related afterwards. 
'It was this force. It was as though they were saying to me: "Do you want to 
come with us?" And I was fighting it and saying back: "No, no, nol" It was like 
telepathy, like being hypnotized.'
After the objects swooped away, Fairfax realized for the first time that the 
cigarette he was holding had burned his fingers.
In January 1970, another ship drifted ashore at the island of Tri­nidad, It was 
the Sta Filomena and had accommodations for seven persons. There was no one on 
board.
A C-46 loaded with five tons of meat disappeared over the Car­ibbean in April 
1970. The usual fruitless search was conducted.
Submarines too have shown a tendency to vanish in tightly spaced waves or 
eyries. Back in 1939 before World War II got underway, four subs vanished in 
four months. They belonged to Japan, the United States, Great Britain, and 
France. During the week of Janu­ary 21st, 1968, both a French and Israeli 
submarine disappeared without a trace in the placid Mediterranean. They were 
hundreds of miles apart when they performed a disappearing act almost 
simul­taneously. Searching parties reported unidentified flying objects in the 
area, and one group of would-be rescuers detected a metal object and thought 
they had found one of the missing craft But the object scooted away and was 
never explained. Since then four more subs belonging to the United States, 
England, and France have vanished. The most recent, the French Eurydice. was 
swallowed up on Wed­nesday March 4th, 1970, in the Mediterranean, Somebody seems 
to be collecting submarines.
People, planes, ships, submarines, and even automobiles are con­stantly 
disappearing suddenly and inexplicably all over this haunted planet of ours. 
Naturally, these mysteries have attracted the flying saucer researchers, and two 
uf ologists apparently joined the missing voluntarily on November 11th, 1953. 
Wilbur J. Wilkinson held a responsible position with the Hoffman Radio 
Corporation in Los Angeles and according to his wife, 'had tape recordings of 
con­versations with men from other planets who landed here in saucers'. The den 
in his home was lined with UFO photographs and weird symbols and formulations, 
supposedly passed along by Ettle men from the planet Maser who were preparing to 
invade Earth. Wil­kinson's partner, Karl Hunrath, claimed to have information 
about landed saucers and talked his friend into renting an aeroplane so they 
could try to find it. They took off from the Gardenaj California
airport with a three-hour supply of gasoline. That was the last anyone saw of 
them. A widespread search failed to turn up either the plane or the two men.
At least one eyewitness claims to have seen a UFO seize a plane in midair and 
carry it off. Eugene Metcalfe of Paris, Illinois, has signed a notarized 
affidavit avowing that on Wednesday, March 9th, 1955, he was watching a jet 
fighter shoot across the sky, when suddenly a gigantic object 'shaped like a 
call bell' descended over it. This object, Metcalfe said, literally swallowed up 
the fast-moving jet *as easy as a hawk would a chicken' and then disappeared 
upwards with its prey. A fighter and its pilot were reported missing in the 
region that day!
In earlier times the ultraterrestrials established religions among men which, 
while they seemed benevolent, introduced the practice of making human sacrifices 
to the gods. This barbaric sacrifidal rite was common throughout Europe, Asia, 
the Pacific, and South Am­erica for thousands of years. Only the finest 
specimens of the tribe were accepted for sacrifice - beautiful young virgins and 
muscular young men. In most cultures the victims volunteered. It was in fact a 
very high honour. They were feted before they were led to a high holy place or 
the top of a pyramid. In some cultures they were taken to a sacred island and 
left there. They were always gone the next month or year when the tribe returned 
with new sacrificial victims.
Physical sacrifice continued into biblical times and persisted in some cultures 
until only a few centuries ago. The brutal inquisitions of the Middle Ages 
claimed more millions of victims and included mass disappearances of people who 
were presumably hauled off to some dungeon never to be seen again. Robed and 
hooded men pounded on doors in the middle of the night and dragged away whole 
families.
The record shows that the ultraterrestrials have a need for physi­cal human 
beings. Once they were quite open in demanding speci­mens to serve that need. 
Times have changed though, and their methods are more subtle. Thousands of 
people disappear annually without a trace (not counting the hundreds of 
thousands who are fleeing the law, creditors, and spouses). They once exploited 
the human race in the guise of benevolent gods living on hilltops; they now 
exploit us through the modern myth of extraterrestrial visitors from distant 
stars.
Perhaps the planet Earth is nothing more than a gigantic farm, We unfortunately 
are the crop.
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
THE REVOLUTION OF THE MIND
The new man is living amongst us now I He is here I' Adolf Hitler declared. *I 
have seen the new man. He is intrepid and cruel. I was afraid of Mm.'
Hitler's Germany was a phenomenon that will be studied by scholars for centuries 
to come. This mad genius createdthe ultimate secret society. He exhumed all the 
ancient symbols - the swastika was an old Oriental symbol - and gathered around 
him a fascinating assortment of perverts and, yes, Black Magicians.1 The skull 
and crossbones adorned the uniforms of the dread Gestapo. A double lightning 
bolt was the symbol of his Storm Troopers. Each man had it secretly tattooed out 
of sight under his armpit. (Rioters at the Democratic Convention in Chicago in 
196S were puzzled when the Chicago police forced them to strip to the waist and 
raise their arms so their armpits could be explored. Were the cops looking foe 
SS agents?)
Hundreds of books about the Nazi movement have been written since World War II, 
many of them authored by intimates of Hitler and members of the Nazi inner 
circle. One recurrent theme in this literature is Hitler's mediumship and 
apparent demonic possession. His strange epileptic-type fits were classic 
manifestations of pos­session. Dr Achille Delrnas wrote, 'A person close to 
Hitler told me that he wakes up in the night screaming and in convulsions. He 
calls for help and appears to be half paralysed… He utters confused and 
unintelligible sounds, gasping, as if on the point of suffocation.' Often when 
fully conscious. Hitler would suddenly cry out, 'He is herel There! In the 
corned* He would point to empty space, appar­ently seeing entities that no one 
else could see. Was it madness? Or was Adolf Hitler haunted by, even directed 
by, ultratertestrials?
It is known that many men in Hitler's inner circle were members of the ancient 
Rosicrucian-style order Thule, a secret society that is supposed to have had its 
beginnings in Thule, Greenland, in ancient times. Himmler, Hess, and other 
prominent figures in the Nazi party spoke privately of strange goals: of 
creating a New Order in which
i The Speir of Destiny by Trevor Ravenscrof't, Neville Spearman.
the masses would be robotized to serve a select inner circle, who in turn would 
serve undefined supernatural forces. Dr Joseph Goebbels. Hitler's brilliant 
minister of propaganda, won his PhD with a thesis on The Spiritual and Political 
Undercurrents of the Early Romantics. In 1925 he wrote, 4I want to be an apostle 
and a preacher". He became instead an apostle to the strangely mesmeric little 
ex-cor­poral who set out to rule the world. like his boss, Goebbels had an 
incredible sense of history and the ability to sway the minds of large groups of 
people. Hitler, it is said, had such imposing presence and such a brilliant, 
decisive, seemingly logical mind that when generals and officials barged into 
his office prepared to argue with him about issues and decisions, they left 
cowed and awed, convinced he was the greatest man alive.
All kinds of kooks and cultists were welcomed into the Nazi inner circle. Many 
of them suffered from tnessiah complexes, convinced that Hitler was going to 
save the world rather than destroy it. Vidkun Abraham Quisling, the Norwegian 
traitor, is a minor bat typical example. Quisling's father was a clergyman who 
had visited with angels and written books about them. In 1929, Quisling himself 
published About the Matter That Inhabited Worlds Outside Ours and the 
Significance Caused by It to Our Philosophy of Ufe. Later he wrote another 
massive book called Vniversismus. which summarized his cosmology and outlined a 
new religion. He founded the Nor­wegian Nazi party in 1933 and served as Premier 
during the German occupation of Norway, after virtually handing the country to 
Hitler on a plattej. He was executed at the end of the war.
'After Quisling was imprisoned in 1945, he was convinced that he would have been 
able to reach the acme in all sections of art and science," Dr G. Langfeldt 
wrote in the Psychiatry Digest in May 1970. 'Of interest with respect to his 
paranoid ideas is that during the trial Quisling maintained on several occasions 
that he believed in a new world of God to come to this earth and that this faith 
had been the driving force in all his actions.*
Quisling, like Hitler, was dominated by an overpowering sense of historical 
mission and, having failed in that mission, degenerated into a babbling lunatic. 
,
European Gipsies were rounded up by the Nazis and slaughtered as we have already 
noted. Hitler also maintained all-out war against scientists and philosophers 
who did not conform to his own beliefs and cosmology. Nazi gangs burned down the 
archives of Rudolf Stei-ner's Anthroposophical Society and attempted to wipe out 
his life's work. (Sterner was a major philosopher and student of the occult
who made many outstanding contributions to human knowledge.) Books were wantonly 
destroyed, and the leading thinkers and intel­lectuals of Europe were either 
killed or driven into exile.
In his drive for world domination Hitler created a scientific estab­lishment 
which developed new rocket weapons, revolutionary aircraft (such as jets), and 
worked towards atomic fission. The influence of this new science changed the 
world forever in the 1940s. One direct result was our voyage to the moon aboard 
craft designed by men trained in the laboratories of Nazi Germany.
In retrospect the Nazi era was a repetition of the earlier patterns of history. 
It is a pattern which will undoubtedly be repeated again, perhaps in the 
not-too-distant future.
One facet of Hitler's madness was demonic obsession with liquid' ating the Jews. 
Actually, Ms racism was much broader than anti-Semitism. To him all races were 
inferior to pure German stock. He sought to create a super race which could run 
a worldwide govern­ment. And his fixation with the Jewish question was Ms urge 
to invalidate the ancient prophecies and thus alter the whole history of the 
future.
This brings us to the sticky and highly unscientific subject of prophecy. From 
the beginning the ultraterrcstrials have presented man with a fairly complete 
outline of his future and Ms destiny. On one level, millions of individuals have 
received precise predictions of future events in their own lives through 
mediums, oractes, and prophets who communicated with ultraterrestüals. On 
another level, every major culture has attempted to preserve their prophetic 
teachings by carving them in stone or sealing them in tombs and caves (as the 
Dead Sea Scrolls). All of these occult and religious records from all parts of 
the world offer essentially the same pre­dictions. The Bible's Revelation oE St 
John is an outstanding example. It explains to us that the final war, 
Armageddon, will begin in the Middle East after the Jews have resettled In their 
ancient homeland. Obviously, if Hitler's evil crusade had succeeded, Israel 
would never have been created, and Armageddon would have been averted.
Nostradamus,2 a French physician in the sixteenth century, com­posed many 
verses' which have since proved to be precise pre­dictions of events which came 
centuries after his death (he even described the rise and fall of Napoleon). One 
of his most quoted prophecies is:
4 The Complete Prophecies of Nostradamus by Henry C. Roberts. Neville Spearman.
The year 1999, seventh month.
A great King of Terror will come from the skies,
… Around this time Mars to reign for the good cause.'
Oriental armies will sweep across the world, according to many of these 
prophets. Even the Hopi Indians have a tradition that great hordes will invade 
North America from the Orient, The number 666 is stressed in the Bible and many 
other works. Invert it and you have 999.The Bible states repeatedly that all 
kinds of wonders will appear in the sky before the end comes. Man has been 
warned to be wary of false prophets and not to go into the desert to meet them. 
Scores of modern UFO contactees have had their encounters in remote desert 
areas.
All religions promise that the end of mankind will come suddenly, like the thief 
in the night. Some refer to this event as the Second Coming, the reappearance of 
Chirst, the Harvest The Hopis call it the Purification. To take the sting out of 
this threat - and the de­struction of all humanity must be regarded as a threat 
- religious, interpreters have presented it as a step upwards towards the 
immor­tality of the individual soul. But if science is on the right track, if 
the soul is merely an extension of some giant energy field in the sky, then the 
process is more in line with the moon food concept of the Oriental philosophers. 
Withdrawal of these extensions or controls of the supermind of the cosmos would 
mean that the individual would be absorbed into it and cease to exist as a 
separate physical unit. Ego, personality, and memory, being properties of the 
physical body, would be left behind.
There are two fundamental forms of religion: (1) the worship of elemental's and 
supernatural manifestations, already discussed; and (2) the awareness of and 
submission to the supermind of the cosmos. The Cosmic Consciousness. Buddhism is 
the best example of the latter. The former concentrates on worshipping 
manifestations, while the latter is devoted to understanding the whole.
We are witnessing a worldwide phenomenon today: mass illumi­nation of millions 
of people, particularly young (under thirty) men and women in all walks of life. 
This process is quite well understood but never openly discussed in the mass 
media. In 1900 a Canadian psychiatrist, Dr Maurice Bucke, published the first 
Important study of the subject, Cosmic Consciousness. Illumination is basically 
a sudden, overwhelming insight into the whole structure of the cosmos and man's 
relationship to it. Suddenly, for a few brief seconds the percipient understands 
everything with incredible clarity. In some
cases the process occurs over a long period in the form of short flashes of 
insight which gradually add up. In others it takes place instantaneously with 
the percipient seemingly bathed in a reddish glow or caught in a beam of 
brilliant white light cast down from the skies (thus we have the ancient phrase, 
'He has seen the light").
No one is ever exactly the same after an illuminating experience. Mediocre men 
become great leaders, preachers, statesmen, scientists, poets, and writers 
overnight! Others divorce their wives, quit their jobs, and embark on new 
careers which catapult them into unex­pected prominence. Some fear for their 
sanity at first because the experience is so overwhelming. Some are unable to 
cope with it and disintegrate into various kinds of fanatics.
Illumination often accompanies UFO sightings, particularly when the witnesses 
are caught in a beam of light from the objects. Their IQ later skyrockets, and 
their lives change appreciably. But as in all aspects of the general phenomenon, 
there seem to be other forces Imitating this process and producing false 
iUuminism. Young people experimenting with LSD and other hallucinogens sometimes 
have ex­periences which they believe are contacts with the Cosmic Con­sciousness 
but which ultimately prove to be destructive. Charles Hanson is a good example 
of this. Some LSD users do, however, appear to undergo a pure form of iUuminism, 
but it is likely that they were already illumination prone and would have had 
the ex­perience eventually anyway.
Psychic abilities appear to be hereditary, and this includes illumi­nation. Many 
people attracted to metaphysics spend years of their lives following the secret 
teachings, meditating, and disciplining their minds in an effort to gain godhead 
(another term for mystical illumination). More often than not they only succeed 
in opening themselves up to possession and hallucinations similar to those 
in­curred by the use of psychedelic drugs or the practice of Black Magic and 
witchcraft. Today's young people are rapidly gaining firsthand knowledge of the 
phantom world of demons and ultraterrestrials as a result of such efforts. The 
Hippie underground newspapers and comic books are now filled with a new lore of 
demons and demigods as well as much inside information on the cosmology of the 
super-mind. Dr Timothy Leary started the stampede to illumination and the Cosmic 
Consciousness in the late 1950s with his LSD experi­ments. Today the drug scene 
is a very important part of the youth subculture, much to the alarm and 
confusion of the over-forty crowd.
The notorious musk festival at Woodstock in the closing days of
the last decade was actually a mass illumination experience. The seemingly 
schizophrenic and destructive philosophy being touted by today's young people is 
in fact identical to the programme of the Illuminati three centuries ago. A 
revolution of the mind is taking place almost unnoticed and certainly 
undeciphered by the older population and their Establishment. There is a 
worldwide movement against violence and war (the cornerstone of civilization 
over these past several thousand years).
Another offshoot of the process is the rapid decline of organized religion. 
People who have attained direct personal contact with the Cosmic Consciousness 
(or who at least believe they have attained such contact) have no need for the 
rites and trappings of the oldtime religions. There is no need to go to church 
when your own head is your church. The fear of death and the promise of 
immortality have always been one of the main appeals of all religions. But as Dr 
Bucke noted in his study, one of the effects of illumination is the complete 
elimination of the death fear. The percipient suddenly understands with 
convincing clarity that he is merely part of the larger whole and that he is 
assured of immortality because his consciousness, the actuating mechanism of his 
physical body, survives as a part of the supermind. The Bible thumper's concept 
of heaven and hell is quite different from the illuminated's insight into the 
cosmic structure. This is not a movement towards atheism, as many horrified 
adults believe. According to the young people, it is instead a movement away 
from elementalism and the many misinterpretations the ultra -terrestrial 
manifestations have inspired.
Within a few years many of our present orthodox beliefs may seem as archaic and 
ridiculous as the belief in Zeus. This movement towards a higher truth has been 
predicted for a thousand years. In Catholic lore the last pope will be an 
apostate who will supervise the decline of the church. He will be named Peter, 
as was the first pope. The prophecy states that the final pope before Peter will 
be as­sassinated. In 1967 the Vatican removed the Throne of St Peter from the 
basement, dusted it off, and put it on display for the first time in centuries.
The birth, life, and effect of Moses, Christ, and others were pre­dicted well in 
advance. In these times we have been subjected to a new series of prophecies 
which extends beyond the earlier prophecies describing the days before 
Armageddon and the ultimate Harvest. Jeanne Dixon and several other seers claim 
that the anti-Christ was bom somewhere in the Middle East on February 5th, 1962. 
He will, they say, rise up and attract a huge following in the 1980s and will
lead a large segment of humanity into the crisis-filled 1990s. There was a 
massive conjunction of planets on February 5th, 1962, and Oriental astrologers 
caused considerable excitement with their claims that the world would come to 
end on that day.
Arthur C Clarke, the British scientist, studied the UFO phenom­enon in the early 
1950s and summarized his findings in 1953 in the form of an astonishing novel, 
Childhood's End. He visualized the flying saucers as part of the psychic system 
of our environment, peopled by giant, winged beings remarkably similar to the 
strange Mothm^n allegedly seen by hundreds of people in the Ohio Valley during. 
1966-67.s
He described a last generation of children endowed with heightened psychic 
abilities and the total Cosmic Consciousness. While the Overlords silently watch 
from their flying saucers, this final generation suddenly merges into a single 
vast unit of energy and ascends to join the supermind of the cosmos. Their 
development is completed. They have reached the climactic stage of xosmic 
evol­ution - a form of intelligent energy which no longer needs the physi­cal 
shell and all of its accoutrements.
Close observers of today's youth subculture, from Dr Leary to R. Buckroinster 
Fuller, detect the tremulant beginnings of such a last generation among those 
born after 1945. As they came of .age in the 1960s a whole new cycle began. The 
Beatles really got the ball roll­ing with a cultural upheaval that is still 
continuing. Fantastic changes in political and occult belief have occurred 
almost over­night. Anyone who reads the daily newspapers can see that we are 
headed at breakneck speed into a new society with a whole new set of values. If 
the present trends continue, the decade of the 1970s will be filled with 
violence and confusion as the restructuring takes place on every level of 
society. The process is visible behind the Iron Cur­tain and in China also.
The year 1848 really marked the beginning of this massive col­lective overhaul 
of our planet. We nowseem to be in the final stages of something - something of 
cosmic proportions. In order to play out the prophesied game, the 
ultraterrestrials will need to create a new Hitler. The men who will confront 
him and hopefully defeat him are presently sitting on floors in Greenwich 
Village, Paris, and Hong Kong, stoned on pot and tripping out on LSD. At least 
two American presidents, Abraham Lincoln and John F. Kennedy, showed all the 
signs of having undergone illumination. Winston Churchill and
s See Strange Creatures from Time and Space foe many documented accounts.
Charles de Gaulle were also likely candidates, as were Gandhi and possibly the 
late Carnal Nasser of Egypt, But there ate no apparent Illuminati on the world 
scene at the moment. It is certain, though, that they will appear at the 
appropriate moment. They always have.
* • *
The sexual revolution is another key part of all this, for sexual repression and 
frustration have always been a basic cause of viol­ence, peculiar social 
attitudes, and destructive psychoses. Fools that we are, we have always been in 
the habit of electing misfits to lead us - from Julius Caesar, who was an 
epileptic, to Adolf Hitler. Hitler's peers tried to crucify Sigmund Freud when 
he first dared to suggest this. But history demonstrates that he was right. We 
have followed an insane course for thousands of years. Once we took our finest 
young men to the top of a pyramid and cut out their hearts with pomp and 
ceremony. Today we send them off to battlefields. Once they happily climbed the 
pyramid under their own power. Now they are rebelling. They are questioning the 
system that wants their heart. The real hope of mankind may be that the system 
will break down or be drastically altered in the few years before our unknown 
Arab hears a voice in Ms head, dons a red cape, and gallops into the United 
States to free the Hopi Indians.
The members of WOW are still watching as they have always done, probably with 
considerable amusement. The ultraterrestrials are still running about in their 
black suits and a thousand other disguises, whispering in our ears, setting race 
against race, and nation against nation. Our modern witch doctors, the 
scientists, are planting atomic bombs in known earthquake faults on the floor of 
the Pacific to see what will happen.
Great civilizations blossomed and died here before us. Others will certainty 
come after us, unless we leave the planet in such a pol­luted, radioactive state 
that it will be rendered unlivable for physical beings.
But even then we will have left our imprint behind. Thousands of years from now 
real visitors from some distant star may enter our solar system. They may stand 
upon our barren moon and look down at the burnt-out cinder that was once Earth, 
and they may find a metal plate among the" craters. It will puzzle their 
scientists because obviously the moon is uninhabitable and has never been 
settled. The plate will be just another erratic for their museum. They'll forget 
about it and never try to decipher the cryptic lettering. The lettering that 
states, *We came in peace for all mankind'.